EDITED    UNDER    THE    DIRECTION    OF    THE 

MISSIONARY  EDUCATION  MOVEMENT 

OF    THE    UNITED    STATES    AND    CANADA 


THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 


THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 


BY 

JOHN  MONROE  MOORE 

\\ 


THE  METHODIST  BOOK  CONCERN 
NEW  YORK  CINCINNATI 


HCtol 


Copyright,   1916,  by 

MISSIONARY  EDUCATION  MOVEMENT 
OF  THE  UNITED  STATES  AND  CANADA 


CONTENTS 

CHAPTER  PAGE 

PREFACE vii 

I    FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH i 

II    THE  NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM 27 

III  INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  59 

IV  EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  AND  ACHIEVEMENTS 83 

V    THE  SOUTH'S  HUMAN  PROBLEMS in 

VI    SOCIAL  RESPONSIBILITY  AND  ENDEAVOR 139 

VII    RELIGIOUS  LIFE  AND  PROTESTANT  FORCES 169 

VIII    A  STRONGER  SOUTH  FOR  A  GREATER  NATION 193 

APPENDIXES 

A    TABLE        I,  VALUE  OF  PROPERTY  IN  THE  SOUTH,  1912.  219 

TABLE       II,  STATISTICAL  SURVEY  OF  THE  SOUTH 220 

TABLE     III,  TENANCY  IN  THE  SOUTH,  1910 221 

TABLE     IV,  EXHIBIT  OF  TOTAL  MANUFACTURES,  1860.  222 

TABLE       V,  EXHIBIT  OF  TOTAL  MANUFACTURES,  1910.  223 

TABLE     VI,  PERCENTAGE  OF  ILLITERACY  IN  1910 224 

TABLE    VII,  PRINCIPAL  OCCUPATIONS  OF  NEGROES 225 

TABLE  VIII,  NEGROES  TEN  YEARS  OF  AGE  AND  OVER 

IN  PROFESSIONAL  SERVICE 226 

B    VALUE  OF  THE  MINERAL  PRODUCTS 227 

C    DENOMINATIONAL  COLLEGES  AND  SCHOOLS 228 

D    WORK  OF  THE  DENOMINATIONAL  MISSION  BOARDS  IN 

THE  SOUTH  230 

E    WORK  OF  THE  MAIN  DENOMINATIONS  IN  THE  SOUTH  . .  235 

F    INTERCHURCH  MOVEMENTS  AND  ORGANIZATIONS 239 

G    BIBLIOGRAPHY  246 

INDEX    249 


M12S558 


ILLUSTRATIONS 

PAGE 

Stock  Farm  Near  Oak  Ridge,  Virginia 14 

Mr.  Robert  C.  Ogden 24 

Vegetable  Farm 30 

Tannery  Near  Newport,  Tennessee 30 

Logging  on  Chattooga  River 30 

Plantation  Homes  Near  Summerville,  South  Carolina....  36 

Dr.  Seaman  A.  Knapp 42 

Country    Schools 52 

Great  Manufacturing  Center,  Birmingham 60 

Part  of  a  4,000,000  Bale  Cotton  Crop,  Texas 64 

Harvesting  Rice  on  a  Texas  Plantation 64 

Collecting  Crude  Turpentine,  North  Carolina 66 

Greatest  Resin  Market  in  the  World,  Savannah 66 

Typical  Cotton  Mill  Village 68 

Interior  of  Cotton  Mill ! 68 

In  the  Cotton  Fields 72 

Typical    Cotton    Mill 72 

Washington  and  Lee  University,  Lexington,  Virginia 84 

University  of  Tennessee,  Knoxville 92 

High  School,  Oklahoma  City 96 

High   School,   Savannah 96 

Nucleus  of  a  Mountain  Church 128 

Mountain  Home  and  Family,  Father  Absent 128 

Second   Baptist    Church,    Atlanta 178 

First  Presbyterian  Church,  Columbus 178 


PREFACE 

The  South  declines  absolutely  to  be  considered  in 
any  sense  to-day  as  a  country  apart.  As  a  component 
part  of  our  common  country,  and  not  very  different 
from  the  rest,  the  South  is  simply  one  of  the  units  into 
which  the  national  domain  is  divided  by  natural  lines 
and  normally  developed  conditions.  This  study  is  not 
meant  to  establish  the  independency,  the  separateness, 
the  peculiarities,  the  unique  capabilities,  or  the  unusual 
needs  of  the  South  or  its  people,  but  to  present  a  succinct 
yet  informing  statement  of  the  present  economic,  social, 
and  religious  conditions  of  the  people,  the  forces  that  are 
at  work,  and  the  seeming  potentialities  and  tendencies 
of  this  vast  and  important  section  of  the  United  States. 
A  similar  study  might  be  profitably  made  of  other  sec- 
tions, such  as  New  England,  the  Northwest,  or  the  Great 
Lakes  region.  The  American  people  of  to-day  do  not 
know  their  country,  and  it  can  no  longer  be  studied  as 
a  whole.  What  is  the  condition  of  New  England  to- 
day? The  influence  of  the  Plymouth  colony  on  early 
New  England  is  well  known  but  what  of  the  Italian 
colony,  the  Greek  colony,  the  Slavic  colony,  and  the  rest 
which  to-day  have  become  so  strong?  What  are  the 
basal  constituents  in  the  great  Northwest  and  what  the 
forces  that  are  emanating  therefrom  to  affect  the  course 
and  progress  of  the  nation?  What  influence  will  the 

xi 


xii  PREFACE 

Pacific  Coast  civilization,  resulting  from  the  present 
dominant  elements,  have  upon  our  national  life?  Such 
studies  should  be  faithfully  pursued  in  order  to  secure 
the  highest  practical  knowledge  of  the  country  as  a 
whole.  The  solidarity  of  the  nation  depends  upon  the 
sympathy  and  appreciation  of  all  the  people  for  all  sec- 
tions founded  upon  an  intelligent  and  just  estimate  of 
the  forces  and  values  of  those  sections.  The  man 
from  Maine  and  the  man  from  Mississippi  can  have 
no  messages  for  each  other  so  long  as  they  are  igno- 
rant of  the  widely  different  conditions  of  life  in  the 
two  states.  The  man  in  Ohio  with  only  the  knowledge 
of  farm  life  in  his  state  cannot  prescribe  a  course 
of  action  suited  to  the  rural  conditions  in  the  Brazos 
bottoms  in  Texas,  in  the  Carolina  Piedmont,  or  the 
Ozark  Hills.  But  whatever  the  natural  physical  pecu- 
liarities, the  economic  features,  the  social  traits  and 
characteristics  of  the  people  of  any  section,  none  are 
so  great  as  to  warrant  any  divisions  that  will  in  any 
way  weaken  the  national  life  and  purpose  now  so 
dominant  in  the  thought  of  all  the  people  of  the  republic. 
The  South  has  no  distinctness  which  any  Southerner 
would  have  interpreted  as  separateness  in  the  body 
politic  or  unusualness  in  the  social  and  economic  rela- 
tions of  the  nation.  The  day  of  the  old  separateness  has 
gone  never  to  return.  The  South's  new  era  is  an  era  of 
national  relations,  national  sympathies,  and  devotion  to 
national  ends.  The  South  can  no  longer  be  content 
with  sectional  prosperity  and  sectional  social  and 
political  expression,  and  is  seeking  more  and  more  to 


PREFACE  xiii 

find  its  larger  self  in  the  thought,  life,  ideals,  plans,  and 
activities  of  the  nation.  Whatever  the  record  of 
history,  the  South  to-day  is  the  nation's  South,  ready 
to  perform  its  national  task,  socially,  politically,  and 
economically. 

The  Southern  people,  with  all  their  pride  in  their 
Anglo-Saxon  blood,  their  boasted  heritage  from  noble 
leaders,  and  their  marvelous  record  of  progress  during 
the  last  fifty  years,  are  painfully  conscious  of  their 
shortcomings  and  deficiencies.  The  upheaval  of  the 
sixties  not  only  wiped  out  five  thousand  million  dollars' 
worth  of  their  property,  but  it  destroyed  the  capacity 
for  creating  rapidly  any  large  wealth.  They  had  to 
go  in  want  of  the  enriching  implements  of  a  great 
civilization.  They  saw  powerful  educational  institu- 
tions crowd  the  North,  while  their  schools  struggled 
and  lived  distressingly.  They  watched  the  growth  of 
strong  publishing  houses  in  the  North  with  their  enor- 
mous output  of  great  books,  and  the  enlarging  influ- 
ence of  fine  Northern  literary  weekly  journals  and 
monthly  magazines,  while  their  own  section  went  with- 
out them.  They  have  not  been  unmindful  of  the  mar- 
velous Northern  establishments  that  command  wealth, 
and  influence  the  national  life.  They  have  had  to 
depend  largely  upon  Northern  capital  to  build  their 
railroads  and  then  sometimes  endure  harsh  criticism 
because  they  were  no  better.  But  the  Southern  people 
have  not  been  bitter,  envious,  nor  ugly  spirited.  They 
loved  and  love  the  South  with  a  devotion  rarely  known 
in  any  other  people.  They  are  wounded  when  it  is 


xiv  PREFACE 

criticised,  but  they  know  that  criticism  is  possible  if 
there  are  any  who  are  inclined  to  expose  their  want 
and  weakness.  While  the  masses  are  not  in  poverty, 
in  fact  are  comfortable,  they  are  far  from  rich.  Many 
years  will  pass  before  there  will  be  any  large  easy 
wealth  in  the  South  by  which  great  philanthropy  may 
be  maintained  and  the  needed  higher  institutions  of 
learning  may  be  established,  equipped,  and  maintained. 
Without  them  many  who  would  avail  themselves  of 
the  advantages  which  such  institutions  would  afford 
must  go  lacking  and  only  the  few  who  can  go  North 
or  East  or  abroad  will  be  able  to  reach  the  great 
foundations  of  knowledge  and  power.  These  condi- 
tions will  change  as  the  nation's  wealth,  however  held, 
becomes  more  and  more  available  for  the  nation's 
South. 

What  the  South  is  and  is  to  be  economically,  socially, 
intellectually,  and  religiously  will  affect  in  no  small 
degree  the  destiny  of  this  republic.  It  is  hoped  that 
this  study,  though  necessarily  limited,  may  serve  to 
awaken  a  new  regard  for  the  resources  and  potentiali- 
ties of  the  Southern  States,  a  new  appreciation  of  the 
efforts  and  achievements  of  the  Southern  people,  and 
a  new  estimate  of  the  part  which  the  South  in  the 
future  is  to  have  in  the  affairs  of  the  nation. 

JOHN  MONROE  MOORE. 

Nashville,  Tennessee. 

June  r,  1916. 


CHAPTER  I 
FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH 

I.  Introduction 

The  South  to-day  is  a  thrifty,  progressive,  and  invit- 
ing section  of  the  United  States.  The  guiding  influ- 
ence in  Southern  progress  has  been  distinctively 
Southern.  The  consciousness  of  inherent  power  equal 
to  their  responsibilities  has  possessed  the  people,  and  a 
spirit  of  self-reliance  and  commercial  and  industrial 
self-direction,  without  any  show  of  arrogance,  has  be- 
come dominant.  In  the  morning  of  a  new  era  the 
South  stands  confident  but  modest,  knowing  its  short- 
comings and  capabilities,  and  realizing  its  possible 
mastery  of  both.  Its  people  have  their  faces  to  the 
future,  although  they  revere  the  past,  honor  the  leaders 
of  the  old  South,  and  hold  in  becoming  veneration  their 
heroes  of  the  rostrum  and  the  battlefield.  They  are 
awakening  more  and  more  to  the  priceless  value  of  the 
magnificent  heritage  that  has  come  to  them  in  the 
South's  traditions  and  ideals,  its  natural  resources,  ad- 
vantageous location,  and  vast  possibilities  of  wealth  and 
power. 

Their  temperament,  spirit,  manner  of  life,  and 
mental  attitude  toward  present-day  issues  give  them 


2  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

an  individuality  all  their  own,  but  not  such  as  to  create 
in  them  any  aloofness  from  the  common  humanity  of 
their  country.  The  people  of  the  South  are  warm- 
hearted, reasonable,  adjustable,  and  devoted  to  the 
sacred  interests  of  their  home,  their  country,  and  reli- 
gion. The  men  who  have  been  the  South's  public 
representatives  in  political  life,  on  the  rostrum,  in  the 
pulpit  and  in  the  large  relations  of  the  nation  have  for 
the  most  part  exhibited  a  high  idealism,  splendid  patri- 
otism, and  a  noble  devotion  to  the  principles  of  honor, 
liberty,  and  personal  integrity. 

That  the  South  has  social,  intellectual,  and  moral 
deficiencies  the  Southern  people  freely  admit.  These 
deficiencies  may  at  times  seem  glaring  and  censur- 
able, but  neither  criticism  nor  defense  will  remove 
them,  nor  supplant  them 'by  virtue  and  power.  Only 
sympathetic  and  intelligent  treatment  of  conditions  and 
existing  causes  by  skilled  laborers  and  master  spirits 
in  any  country,  section,  or  community  can  bring  about 
a  state  of  social  equilibrium  and  moral  effectiveness. 
The  inspiration  to  noble  achievement  for  any  people 
must  arise  from  knowledge  of  the  actual,  and  be  sus- 
tained by  a  vision  of  the  possible.  Deficiencies  wher- 
ever found  fade  away  with  the  coming  of  light  and  the 
development  of  power.  The  South  to-day  is  a  learner 
in  its  own  school  and  is  generating  light  and  power 
by  its  own  machinery.  It  has  felt  the  spell  of  the  new 
sense  of  national  responsibility  and  heard  the  call  to 
produce  and  equip  forces  to  meet  the  greater-world 
responsibilities ;  this  has  quickened  the  speed  of  its  own 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH      3 

progress,  and  energized  its  efforts  at  the  removal  of  its 
delinquencies  and  the  remedying  of  its  neglects. 

A  study  of  the  South  to-day  should  bring  to  light 
its  strength  and  its  weakness,  its  excellences  and  its 
deficiencies,  its  powers  and  its  perils,  its  potentialities 
and  its  possibilities.  As  in  every  country,  the  chief 
interest  is  in  its  people — the  fiber  of  its  being — the 
ideals  that  rule  them,  the  convictions  that  stir  and  stay 
them,  and  the  hopes  that  inspire  them.  Since  the 
human  spirit  finds  expression  in  the  institutions  which 
it  creates  and  maintains,  and  since  by  man's  efforts 
and  achievements  his  motives  and  capabilities  are 
revealed,  a  competent  study  of  the  South  must  deal 
with  the  industries  and  employments  of  the  people  and 
the  educational  processes  and  religious  faiths  by  which 
they  have  come  into  their  present  social,  intellectual, 
and  moral  life.  Such  a  study  would  be  incomplete  if 
it  failed  to  disclose  the  social,  mental,  and  religious 
neglects  and  needs  of  any  portion  of  the  people,  and 
indicate  the  perils  which  might  ensue  should  these  needs 
go  unmet.  The  South,  as  America  and  all  its  parts,  is 
a  field  and  a  force  for  missionary  activity  and  mis- 
sionary endeavor.  The  survey  and  occupation  of  the 
field  is  an  obligation  not  to  be  evaded,  while  the  enlist- 
ment, preparation,  and  employment  of  the  force  must 
receive  that  attention  which  national  and  world  respon- 
sibilities require. 

2.  The  People 
The  South  as  understood  in  this  book  embraces  six- 


4  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

teen  states,  which  comprise  the  old  slaveholding  terri- 
tory, with  an  area  of  945,028  square  miles,  a  domain 
equal  to  Europe,  excepting  Spain,  Portugal,  Norway, 


Sweden,  Greece,  and  Russia.  Eleven  of  the  states  are 
east  of  the  Mississippi,  the  five  west  being  Missouri, 
Arkansas,  Oklahoma,  Texas,  and  Louisiana.  The  popu- 
lation of  these  sixteen  states  in  1910  was  32,149,274, 
including  8, 78 1,2 1 5  Negroes  and  about  1 10,000  Indians. 
The  total  foreign-born  population  in  1910  was  927,386 
while  that  of  foreign  parentage  was  1,687,065.  The 
white  population,  native-born  and  of  native  parentage, 
was  64.1  per  cent,  of  the  total  population,  the  Negro 
27.4  per  cent.,  the  Indian  3  per  cent.,  the  foreign-born 
and  of  foreign  parentage  8.2  per  cent.  The  white 
native-born  and  of  native  parentage  was  88.7  per  cent, 
of  the  total  white  population,  a  condition  not  found  in 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH      5 

any  other  section  of  the  nation.  It  must  be  kept  in  mind 
that  the  Indians  and  Negroes  are  also  Southern-born 
people.  During  the  six  years  since  the  last  census  was 
taken  the  population  of  the  South  has  increased  quite 
materially  but  the  percentage  of  the  various  elements 
has  not  perceptibly  changed. 

Spanish  Element.  The  basal  constituents  in  the 
early  white  population  of  the  South  were  English, 
Scotch,  Irish,  French  Huguenots,  with  some  German 
and  Spanish.  The  early  Spanish  element  was  not 
strengthened  by  any  large  number  of  immigrants  and 
soon  became  almost  negligible  except  in  Texas,  which 
was  a  part  of  Mexico  until  1836.  Even  in  that  state 
there  was  very  little  amalgamation  of  nationalities 
and  the  Mexicans  remained  a  distinct  people.  To 
this  day  they  speak  the  Spanish  language  and  fol- 
low to  a  large  extent  Spanish  manners  and  customs. 
The  Spanish  priests  built  a  line  of  mission  churches 
in  southern  Texas  in  their  efforts  to  provide  for 
the  religious  nurture  of  the  people,  and  their  splen- 
did ruins,  especially  near  San  Antonio,  remain  as 
mute  monuments  to  an  unsuccessful  attempt  to  make 
Spanish  influence,  social  and  religious,  dominant  in  that 
section.  What  Texas  might  have  become,  had  that 
attempt  succeeded,  may  be  surmised  by  a  glance  at  the 
country  beyond  the  Rio  Grande  where  it  has  been  dom- 
inantly  supreme. 

Mexicans.  The  last  census  gave  the  number  of  Mex- 
icans in  the  sixteen  Southern  States  at  241,130,  of 
whom  only  2,300  are  outside  of  Texas.  But  that  does 


6  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

not  include  the  grandchildren  and  even  great-grand-, 
children  born  in  Texas  who  are  as  much  Mexican  in 
thought,  speech,  dress,  manner  of  life  and  social  cus- 
toms as  those  of  the  first  generation,  neither  does  it 
include  75,000  to  100,000  Mexicans  who  have  come  to 
the  United  States  during  the  last  six  distressing  years. 
The  Mexican  population  of  Texas  in  1916  is  not  less 
than  350,000  to  400,000  and  the  probabilities  are  that 
it  will  increase  rather  than  decrease  with  the  coming 
years.  Mexico  for  many  years  cannot  offer  the  eco- 
nomic and  political  advantages  which  the  Mexicans  find 
and  enjoy  in  the  United  States.  Can  this  population 
be  assimilated  and  be  made  a  real  component  part  of  a 
homogeneous  people?  The  same  question  may  be 
raised  regarding  the  Mexicans  in  New  Mexico  and 
Arizona  where  the  proportion  of  Spanish-speaking  to 
English-speaking  people  is  much  greater  than  in  Texas. 
Only  a  new  social,  domestic,  economic,  intellectual,  and 
religious  life  can  bring  them  to  where  such  a  condition 
is  possible. 

Germans.  The  German  element  was  not  strong  in 
the  early  settlements  and  what  there  was  infiltrated 
from  the  German  colonists  in  Pennsylvania.  Many  of 
them  went  into  the  Carolinas  where  their  numerous 
descendants  are  to  be  found  to-day.  With  the  increase 
of  German  immigration  after  1870  large  numbers  of 
Germans  began  coming  to  the  Southern  States.  In 
recent  years  large  colonies  have  settled  in  Texas  and  in 
those  southern  cities  and  industrial  centers  where  eco- 
nomic conditions  are  inviting.  The  last  census  showed 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH      7 

247,193  foreign-born  Germans  and  740,110  of  foreign 
parentage  in  the  sixteen  Southern  States.  They  are 
most  numerous  in  Maryland,  Kentucky,  Missouri  and 
Texas,  but  in  all  these  states  the  foreign-born  Germans 
were  fewer  in  1910  than  in  1900.  Their  influence  in 
political  and  social  affairs  is  very  strong  wherever  their 
numbers  are  large.  They  have  maintained  German 
schools,  German  churches,  and  German  customs,  but 
their  children  refuse  to  be  wholly  Teutonized  in  speech, 
thought,  and  manner  of  life  and  are  rapidly  transform- 
ing German  colonies  and  communities  into  genuine 
American  settlements,  where  the  American  school  and 
church  may  become  the  directive  agencies  in  a  new  ex- 
pression of  life  and  religion.  The  Teutonic  element, 
notwithstanding  the  decrease  in  German  immigration, 
will  become  more  and  more  a  forceful  influence  in  the 
new  development  of  the  South  because  of  its  exhibition 
of  robust  energy,  emphasis  on  industrial  skill,  solid 
honesty,  love  of  fine  arts,  and  devotion  to  the  principle 
of  general  efficiency. 

Other  Foreigners.  The  Germans  and  Mexicans  con- 
stitute one  half  of  the  people  of  the  South  of  foreign 
parentage.  All  others  except  the  French  are  of  recent 
arrival.  There  are  15,520  foreign-born  French  and 
39,046  of  foreign  parentage.  One  third  of  the  former 
and  four  fifths  of  the  latter  are  in  Louisiana.  A  major- 
ity of  these  are  Roman  Catholics  and  have  been  an 
influential  factor  in  that  region.  The  Italians  in  the 
South  in  1910  were  150,287,  but  this  number  has  been 
increased  by  immigration.  The  Russians  in  the  South, 


8  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

who  are  for  the  most  part  Jews  and  Poles,  number 
160,182,  while  the  Austrians  of  various  classes,  a  large 
majority  being  Bohemians  and  Hungarians,  are 
122,107.  The  Cubans  in  1910  in  the  South  were 
31,859,  of  whom  26,792  were  in  Florida.  There  were1 
12,080  Greeks.  The  foreign-born  English  number 
59,461,  and  those  of  foreign  parentage  134,048;  the 
foreign-born  Irish  64,568,  of  foreign  parentage 
224,033;  foreign-born  Scotch  16,403,  of  foreign  par- 
entage 38,485. 

French  Huguenots.  The  first  colony  of  French 
Huguenots,  sent  out  by  the  famous  Admiral  Coligny 
to  the  South,  reached  Florida  in  1564,  but  they  were 
soon  wiped  out  by  the  bloodthirsty  Spaniard,  Pedro  Me- 
nendez.  In  1610  a  settlement  was  made  near  Hampton 
Roads  and  in  1702  a  colony  settled  on  20,000  acres  in 
Nansemond  County,  Virginia.  With  the  opening  of 
the  eighteenth  century  the  Huguenots  began  to  come 
over  from  Europe  in  shiploads  and  settle  in  large  num- 
bers in  the  congenial  climate  of  Virginia  and  especially 
of  South  Carolina.  In  1680  the  city  of  Charleston, 
South  Carolina,  was  founded,  largely  under  French 
auspices.  When  the  Edict  of  Nantes  was  revoked  by 
the  King  of  France  and  the  Huguenots  were  deprived 
of  their  civil  rights,  and  bodies  of  dragoons  were  sent 
to  compel  them  to  abjure  their  religious  faith,  about 
50,000  of  these  Protestants  were  driven  out  of  France, 
and  from  that  time  a  steady  stream  began  to  flow  into 
the  American  colonies.  Virginia,  South  Carolina, 
and  Georgia  received  large  numbers  of  these  liberty- 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH      9 

loving,  God-fearing  people.  South  Carolina  is  some- 
times called  the  home  of  the  Huguenots.  Some  of  the 
greatest  names  in  Southern  history,  such  as  Francis 
Marion,  a  great  revolutionary  general,  John  Sevier, 
early  governor  of  Tennessee,  Sidney  Lanier,  poet, 
Henry  Laurens,  statesman,  and  John  Bayard,  patriot, 
are  French,  and  many  of  the  leading  families  in  South 
Carolina  and  Virginia  to-day  trace  their  ancestry  to 
these  Huguenot  settlers.  The  character  and  action  of 
the  state  of  South  Carolina  have  been  unquestionably 
deeply  affected,  if  not  largely  molded,  by  this  fiery, 
impulsive,  gallant  strain.  In  state  affairs,  in  matters 
•of  education  and  religion,  they  figured  conspicuously. 
Like  the  Puritans  of  New  England  they  loved  liberty 
and  religion  more  than  life,  and  passed  on  to  posterity 
a  heritage  priceless  in  value  and  in  power. 

Scotch-Irish.  The  Scotch-Irish  in  America  have 
been  a  mighty  folk  and  were  extremely  influential  in 
the  revolutionary  times  of  the  colonies  and  the  nation. 
The  unkept  promises  and  broken  compacts  of  the  Eng- 
lish government  when  the  Province  of  Ulster  in  northern 
Ireland  was  settled  by  sturdy  farmers  of  Scotland  in 
the  sixteenth  and  seventeenth  centuries,  resulted  in  a 
remarkable  exodus  from  Ireland  in  the  early  years  of 
the  eighteenth  century.  Some  had  come  before  that 
time,  but  between  1729  and  1750,  it  is  estimated  that 
not  less  than  12,000  of  these  Scotch-Irish  immigrants 
arrived  annually  in  Philadelphia  alone.  The  stream 
continued  with  more  or  less  activity  till  the  breaking 
out  of  hostilities  in  1775,  when  the  number  of  Scotch 


jo  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

and  Scotch-Irish  in  the  colonies  was  between  500,000 
•and  800,000,  and  of  these  the  Scotch-Irish  were  much 
more  numerous  and  potential.  While  the  majority 
landed  in  Philadelphia,  and  many  of  them  settled  in 
Pennsylvania,  yet  a  great  body  of  them  passed  into 
Virginia  and  North  Carolina,  and  later,  up  the  valleys 
into  the  Alleghany  Mountains  and  the  Blue  Ridge  and 
became  the  early  settlers  of  Tennessee  and  Kentucky. 
Many  of  these  landed  at  Wilmington  and  Charleston 
and  passed  on  westward  into  the  hill  country  of  North 
Carolina,  Virginia,  Tennessee,  and  Kentucky.  The 
pathfinders  and  pioneers  of  the  country  beyond  the 
Alleghanies  were  these  sons  of  Scotland  born  in  Ire- 
land. These  Scotch-Irish  immigrants  became  the  pro- 
genitors of  many  of  the  greatest  leaders  of  Church  and 
State  who  have  been  the  boast  of  the  South.  It  was 
the  Scotch-Irish  of  Mecklenburg  County,  North  Caro- 
lina, who  formed  the  famous  convention  which  gave  to 
the  world  the  first  declaration  of  independence  that 
emanated  from  the  colonies.  The  Scotch-Irish  have 
been  a  dominant,  God-fearing,  patriotic  force  in  the 
South ;  and  the  South' s  ideals,  social  stability,  political 
principles,  and  religious  life  have  been  molded  in  no 
small  measure  by  the  remarkable  vigor,  sturdy  char- 
acter, strong  mentality,  and  deep  religious  faith  of 
the  Scotch-Irish,  who  have  found  here  a  congenial 
home.  In  the  fiber  of  the  Southern  people  the  Scotch- 
Irish  form  a  notable,  powerful,  and  noble  strain. 

Anglo-Saxon.     The  chief  basal  constituent  in  the 
blood  of  the  South  is  English  or  Anglo-Saxon.     Vir- 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     n 

ginia  was  indeed  the  mother  colony  and  her  people  were 
largely  English.  Georgia  under  Oglethorpe  became 
another  strong  English  colony  and  a  distributing  center 
for  peopling  the  adjoining  states  and  even  those  farther 
west.  In  the  Carolinas  the  original  settlers  were  from 
various  quarters,  but  the  Anglo-Saxon  element  predom- 
inated. The  increase  of  the  South' s  population  has  been 
largely  through  English  sources.  In  manners,  speech, 
and  habits  of  thought  the  Southern  people  approach  the 
people  of  Canada  and  England  perhaps  more  than  the 
people  of  any  other  section  of  this  country,  with  the 
possible  exception  of  the  native  people  of  New  Eng- 
land. The  Anglo-Saxon  blood  of  the  South  is  more 
nearly  pure  than  in  any  other  portion  of  the  United 
States. 

j.  Resources 

The  South's  Wealth.  The  South's  wealth  is  not  far 
from  $50,000,000,000,  while  the  wealth  of  the  United 
States  in  1880  was  only  $43,642,000,000.  Between 
1880  and  1912  the  estimated  true  wealth  of  all  property 
in  the  South  increased  from  $9,177,000,000  to  $43,- 
473,000,000,  or  378.8  per  cent.,  the  increase  in  the  rest 
of  the  country  being  317.6  per  cent.  The  average 
wealth  for  each  inhabitant  increased  in  these  thirty-two 
years  from  $493  to  $1,264  'm  the  South  and  that  in  the 
entire  country  from  $866  to  $1,965.  In  the  South  as 
in  the  rest  of  the  country  the  greatest  increase  in  the 
value  of  property  has  taken  place  since  1900,  but  the 
rate  of  increase  is  proportionately  greater  in  the 


12  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

South.  In  the  twenty  years  between  1880  and  1900  the 
average  rate  of  increase  in  the  rest  of  the  country  was 
four  times  that  in  the  South,  but  in  the  twelve  years 
between  1900  and  1912  the  ratio  was  only  three  to  one. 
The  increase  in  the  true  value  of  all  property  in  the 
South  between  1900  and  1904  was  from  $17,919,- 
000,000  to  $21,519,000,000  or  at  the  average  rate  of 
$2,466,000  a  day.  The  increase  between  1904  and 
1912  was  from  $21,519,000,000  to  $43,473,000,000  or 
at  the  average  rate  of  $7,518,000  a  day,  an  amount 
more  than  seven  times  the  daily  increase  in  England. 

Economic  Standing.  The  South  has  now  $7,000,- 
000,000  more  capital  invested  in  manufacturing,  $108,- 
000,000  greater  value  of  mineral  output,  $866,000,000 
greater  value  of  farm  products,  is  cutting  3,483,000,- 
ooo  more  feet  of  lumber,  has  a  greater  railroad  mileage, 
and  has  $765,000,000  more  banking  resources  and 
$225,000,000  more  deposits  in  financial  institutions 
than  the  whole  country  had  in  1880.  The  South  is 
cutting  more  than  half  the  lumber  in  the  entire 
country;  it  virtually  monopolizes  the  cotton  seed  in- 
dustry ;  it  makes  seventy  per  cent,  of  all  the  commercial 
fertilizers  manufactured  in  the  United  States,  having 
an  annual  value  of  $105,000,000;  it  mines  practically 
all  of  the  country's  output  of  phosphate  rock,  sulphur, 
fuller's  earth,  pyrite  and  other  basic  materials,  and  it 
has  in  its  beds  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  all  the  coal  in 
this  country  suitable  for  coke  that  is  used  in  smelting. 

Potentialities.  The  great  natural  resources  have  for 
the  most  part  been  scarcely  touched  in  the  development 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     13 

of  Southern  wealth.  In  the  South  there  are  258,700,- 
ooo  acres  of  land  covered  with  forests  capable  of  yield- 
ing twelve  hundred  billion  feet  of  lumber;  and  56,106,- 
ooo  acres  underlaid  with  coal  estimated  at  five  hundred 
and  twenty-five  billion  tons.  The  possible  acreage  for 
agriculture  is  54,260,000.  In  normal  years  the  South  is 
producing  $472,000,000  from  mines  and  quarries, 
$590,000,000  from  forests  and  $3,600,000,000  from 
farm's.  Southern  streams  have  latent  20,000,000  horse- 
power with  only  about  1,500,000  horse-power  developed 
and  applied.  The  South  has  potentialities  for  the  sup- 
port of  over  100,000,000  population,  a  number  equal  to 
that  of  the  whole  country  to-day.  But  to  support  such  a 
population  would  require  the  building  of  improved 
highways,  steam  and  electric  railroads,  the  chaining  of 
water-powers,  the  bringing  of  the  farm  acreage  to  its 
greatest  efficiency,  the  draining  of  the  wet  lands, 
and  the  instituting  of  scientific  methods  of  farm  culti- 
vation. The  possibilities  of  the  South  are  enormous. 
They  call  loudly  for  the  development  of  the  people  to 
be  the  masters  of  them. 

Values.  In  the  appendix1  will  be  found  two  most 
interesting  and  instructive  tables  of  statistics  which 
were  compiled  from  the.  reports  of  the  Federal  Census 
by  the  Manufacturers  Record  of  Baltimore.  They 
show  the  value  of  the  property  of  the  South  and  give 
a  splendid  exhibit  of  what  is  being  done  in  the  South. 
They  may  well  be  studied  diligently,  minutely,  and 


See  Tables  I  and  II. 


14  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

sympathetically,  as  they  are  full  of  suggestion,  stimula- 
tion and  inspiration.  The  South  with  the  world's 
cotton  trade  absolutely  under  its  domination,  with  88,000 
square  miles,  or  56,320,000  acres  of  practically  virgin 
coal  fields,  with  iron  ore  sufficient  to  duplicate  for  years 
to  come  the  entire  iron  and  steel  trade  of  Europe,  with 
almost  limitless  soil  capabilities  already  producing 
800,000,000  bushels  of  grain  a  year,  able  to  produce 
foodstuffs  for  hundreds  of  millions  of  people,  able  to 
do  more  manufacturing  than  the  whole  country  to-day 
is  doing,  must  come  into  a  new  consciousness  of  its 
sufficiency  and  force.  The  new  era  of  prosperity  and 
achievement  has  created  an  attitude  of  self-confidence, 
and  developed  a  conviction  in  the  people  that  their 
day  is  a  day  of  possibility,  their  land  a  land  of  oppor- 
tunity. 

4.  Natural  Advantages 

Agriculture.  Agriculture  and  manufacture  are  the 
two  great  wealth-producing  occupations  of  any  people 
and  for  these  the  South  possesses  unusual  and  invalu- 
able advantages.  For  agriculture  the  topography,  rain- 
fall, soil,  and  climate  could  scarcely  be  excelled.  Irri- 
gation is  not  needed  in  many  places,  and  should  it  be 
required  or  considered  desirable,  the  streams  are  numer- 
ous, so  plenty  of  water  is  at  hand.  The  moderate 
temperature  of  the  South,  seldom  distressingly  hot, 
appeals  strongly  to  those  who  would  labor  in  the  open 
field,  as  the  season  is  longer,  the  number  of  crops 
greater,  vegetation  is  more  luxuriant,  and  the  main- 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     15 

tenance  of  life  is  less  difficult  than  in  the  more  northerly 
sections.  Immigrants  from  the  southern  countries  of 
Europe  and  Asia  find  it  a  climate  very  much  like  that 
of  their  native  lands. 

Manufacture.  Manufacturing  is  the  second  great 
wealth-producing  occupation  of  a  people.  While  the 
South  has  not  been  distinctively  a  manufacturing  sec- 
tion, yet  its  natural  advantages  for  becoming  such  are 
many.  The  three  things  to  be  considered  in  manu- 
facture are  raw  materials,  power,  and  labor,  and  in 
these  the  South  is  well  supplied,  or  has  the  ability  to 
supply  them.  Highly  developed  and  diversified  agri- 
culture will  furnish  a  very  large  percentage  of  all  raw 
materials  for  manufacture.  Cotton,  the  chief  of  tex- 
tile materials,  is  the  South's  natural  monopoly.  Iron 
is  being  mined  in  large  quantities,  and  the  untouched 
beds  of  ore  are  many  and  extended.  Lumber  is  abun- 
dant for  all  woodenware.  Coal,  oil,  gas,  and  wood  are 
found  in  such  enormous  quantities  as  to  insure  an 
unlimited  supply  of  fuel.  Water  is  near  at  hand  in 
every  community  for  the  production  of  steam  and  the 
possible  water-power  from  the  numerous  well-filled 
streams  will  reduce  the  cost  of  power  to  a  minimum. 
Labor  is  as  plentiful,  as  intelligent,  and  as  reasonable  in 
cost  as  will  be  found  in  any  section,  while  the  possible 
European  supply  would  come  to  the  South  more  quickly 
than  to  the  North  because  of  the  climate.  The  South's 
inducements  to  manufacturers  cannot  be  easily  overesti- 
mated from  the  standpoint  of  natural  advantages. 

River  Systems.     The  South  has  another  advantage 


16  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

in  the  river  systems  of  the  country.  For  this  reason 
some  national  leaders  have  declared  that  the  Mississippi 
Valley  is  to  be  the  lap  for  the  nation's  and  the  world's 
wealth.  The  great  rivers  east  of  the  Rockies  flow 
south.  What  this  means  has  not  yet  been  made  fully 
known.  Rivers  are  eventually  to  produce  the  power 
through  great  electrical  plants  that  shall  give  light,  heat, 
and  locomotion  for  the  American  people.  Coal,  gas, 
and  wood  will  probably  become  scarce  before  another 
thousand  years  are  gone,  if  the  present  rate  of  con- 
sumption continues,  and  then  men  must  depend  upon 
water  and  air  to  furnish  the  necessities  of  civilization. 
The  South  will  have  plenty  of  both.  The  South  is 
already  interested  in  the  plans  for  storing  the  rain  in 
great  reservoirs  at.  the  heads  of  the  rivers  in  order  to 
break  the  flow  that  creates  floods  and  brings  destruc- 
tion to  the  lower  states.  These  stored  waters,  as  has 
been  pointed  out  by  many  advocates,  could  be  used  for 
irrigation  whenever  needed.  They  would  not  only  pre- 
vent floods  but  would  insure  proper  water  in  the  dry 
seasons  for  navigation  and  for  power-producing  plants. 
The  navigation  is  important  and  will  become  more  so 
when  the  population  becomes  three  or  four  times  its 
present  size.  The  Mississippi  River  and  its  great  trib- 
utaries will  in  the  future  even  more  than  in  the  past 
be  an  incalculable  asset  for  the  states  of  the  South  as  it 
is  now  proving  to  be  in  the  North. 

Shipping  Advantages.  The  South  puts  no  small 
estimate  upon  its  possible  shipping  advantages.  The 
coast-line  of  the  South  begins  with  Baltimore  and  ends 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     17 

with  Brownsville,  Texas,  a  distance  of  3,743  miles,  or 
78.8  per  cent,  of  the  entire  eastern  and  southern  coast- 
tine  of  this  country.  The  present  harbors  and  the  pos- 
sible harbors  render  -shipping  possibilities  immeas- 
urable. Charleston  and  Savannah  are  on  the '  same 
parallel  as  the  ports  of  the  Mediterranean  and  the  Suez 
Canal,  and  there  are  no  menacing  icebergs  and  chilling 
blasts  of  Newfoundland  to  render  dangerous  and  un- 
comfortable, at  any  season  of  the  year,  the  journey 
between  the  Southern  States  and  Southern  Europe. 
The  short  way  to  India  from  the  United  States  through 
the  Suez  Canal,  or  to  eastern  Asia  through  the  Panama 
Canal,  begins  in  the  Southern  ports.  The  journey  to  the 
South  American  republics  and  the  Central  American 
nations,  with  which  closer  relations  are  constantly  being 
established,  must  necessarily  be  made  through  the 
Southern  waters.  What  greater  advantage  in  interna- 
tional transportation  could  any  section  ask  ?  The  ship- 
ping to  and  from  the  Southern  harbors  is  of  recent 
development.  But  with  the  Panama  Canal  shortening 
the  journey  from  Japan  to  New  York  by  3,768  miles, 
and  to  New  Orleans  by  4,700  miles;  from  Chilean 
ports  to  New  York  by  5,000  miles,  and  to  New  Orleans 
by  over  6,000  miles ;  what  fifty  years  may  bring  no  man 
can  estimate. 

5.  Agencies  at  Work 

What  They  Are.  The  South  has  many  agencies  at 
work  for  its  promotion,  development,  and  purification, 
but  there  are  four  special  organizations,  with  well- 


1 8  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

defined  and  honorable  purposes,  that  are  touching  the 
vital  interests  of  all  the  people  and  ministering  pro- 
foundly to  the  economic  and  social  progress  of  the 
entire  South.  They  are  of  Southern  origin,  composed 
of  Southern  people,  supported  and  directed  by  Southern 
men  and  women.  They  are  the  Southern  Commercial 
Congress,  the  Southern  Settlement  and  Development 
Organization,  the  Southern  Conference  for  Education 
and  Industry,  and  the  Southern  Sociological  Congress. 
The  conventions  of  these  organizations  are  planned  to 
give  instruction  and  stimulation  to  the  men  and  women 
who  are,  and  who  are  to  become,  leaders  in  the  various 
phases  of  economic  and  social  life,  and  the  impact  of 
these  organizations  is  transmitted  through  these  leaders 
to  the  community  life  and  activities  of  the  various  states 
and  sections.  No  little  credit  is  due  these  organizations 
for  the  new  economic,  social,  and  educational  progress 
of  the  South,  and  their  influence  in  bringing  to  this 
section,  in  the  immediate  as  well  as  remote  future,  cap- 
ital, immigration,  and  new  facilities  for  agriculture, 
manufacture,  and  commerce  can  scarcely  be  estimated. 
These  organizations  may  change  their  names  and  forms 
as  conditions  demand,  but  the  purposes  for  which 
they  now  exist  will  be  kept  before  the  people  until  they 
are  fully  consummated. 

Southern  Commercial  Congress.  The  Southern 
Commercial  Congress  was  organized  in  1907  at  Chat- 
tanooga, Tennessee,  by  the  Secretaries  of  the  leading 
commercial  organizations  of  the  South  for  the  purpose 
of  promoting  and  developing  the  interests  of  the  sixteen 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     19 

Southern  States.  It  is  supported  by  contributions  from 
the  various  commercial  organizations  of  the  South,  the 
amount  expected  from  each  being  in  proportion  to  the 
population  of  the  respective  cities.  At  each  annual 
meeting  some  distinctive  phase  of  the  commercial  or 
economic  interests  is  emphasized  and  thereby  stimu- 
lated. No  little  credit  must  be  given  to  this  Commercial 
Congress  for  arousing  interest  and  creating  confidence 
in  the  vast  commercial  possibilities  of  the  Southern 
States,  and  its  influence  persists  and  enlarges  from  year 
to  year.  The  statement  of  some  of  its  expressed  pur- 
poses is  as  follows : 

1 i )  To  encourage,  foster,  and  promote  the  develop- 
ment of  the  resources  of  the  South  by  its  own  inhabi- 
tants and  with  its  own  capital. 

(2)  To  encourage  and  obtain  the  establishment  in 
the  South  of  commercial,  industrial,  manufacturing, 
and  other  enterprises,  and  to  foster  those  already  in 
existence  there. 

(3)  To  encourage,  foster,  and  promote  the  creation 
and   establishment   of   institutions   and   organizations 
whose  energies  shall  be  principally  directed  toward  the 
development  of  the  material  resources  of  the  South. 

(4)  To  promote  and  develop  proper  immigration  to 
the  South,  and  to  promote  and  foster  the  establishment 
of  such  organizations  as  may  bring  about  the  develop- 
ment of  desirable  immigration  to  the  South. 

(5)  To  encourage  the  movement  for  the  construction 
of  good  roads  and  for  the  extension  of  railroad  and 
trolley  transportation. 


20  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

(6)  To  encourage,  foster,  and  develop  patriotic  and 
national  sentiments  throughout  the  South  and  elsewhere 
in  the  nation,  and  particularly  to  encourage,  promote, 
and  foster  the  feeling  and  desire  for  a  greater  nation 
through  a  greater  South. 

(7)  To  promote  the  improvement  of  educational  and 
other  conditions  which  tend  to  develop  the  material 
resources  and  happiness  of  the  residents  of  the  South. 

Southern  Settlement  and  Development  Organiza- 
tion. This  organization  has  for  its  chief  purpose  the 
bringing  of  desirable  immigrants  to  the  South  and  the 
placing  of  them  where  they  can  do  most  for  this  section. 
The  organization  has  been  busy  in  its  efforts  to  estab- 
lish ocean  steamship  lines  connecting  directly  the  ports 
of  southern  Europe  with  the  Southern  ports  of  the 
United  States.  If  these  efforts  are  successful  the  immi- 
grant tide  to  the  Southern  States  will  be  much  in- 
creased when  the  great  war  is  over.  Who  can  tell  what 
this  will  mean  socially  and  politically  as  well  as  indus- 
trially? The  organization  has  issued  the  following 
statement  of  its  significant  and  far-reaching  purposes: 

1 i )  To  make  a  thorough  and  scientific  study  of  the 
resources   and   possibilities   of  the   sixteen    Southern 
States,  and  the  best  practical  methods  of  developing 
the  same. 

(2)  To  direct  public  attention,  both  in  this  and  in 
other  countries,  to  the  resources  of  said  states,  and 
more  especially  to  the  immense  area  of  unimproved 
lands. 

(3)  To  attract  into  said  states  capitalists,  investors, 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH  21 

and  desirable  immigrants,  and  more  especially,  expe- 
rienced farmers  and  agricultural  laborers. 

(4)  To  encourage  by  every  practical   means  the 
establishing  in  the  several  states  named  of  the  South, 
by  said  states  or  otherwise,  bureaus  of  agriculture  and 
immigration  bureaus  for  the  purpose  of  disseminating 
reliable  information  regarding  the  resources  and  pos- 
sibilities of  said  states. 

(5)  To  establish  and  maintain,  so  far  as  practicable, 
a  cooperation  between  the  United  States  government, 
the  governments  of  the  several  states  named,  the  rail- 
road and  transportation  companies,  commercial  bodies, 
real  estate  men,  and  members  of  the  said  Southern 
Settlement  and   Development   Organization,   to   place 
the  Southern  country  properly  before  the  people  of  the 
world. 

(6)  To  secure  from  the  United  States  government 
proper  port  facilities  at  Baltimore,  and  the  South  At- 
lantic and  Gulf  ports  for  the  handling  of  foreign  im- 
migration. 

Southern  Sociological  Congress.  The  Southern 
Sociological  Congress  was  inaugurated  by  Governor 
Ben  W.  Hooper  of  Tennessee  in  1912  with  a  conven- 
tion in  Nashville.  Mrs.  Anna  Russell  Cole  of  Nash- 
ville was  present  at  the  first  convention,  and  seeing  the 
great  possibilities  of  the  organization  established  a 
foundation  to  produce  sufficient  income  to  insure  its 
perpetuity.  The  annual  conventions  deal  with  the 
sociological  problems  of  the  South,  and  the  well-pre- 
pared and  illuminating  addresses  of  the  various  com- 


22  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

petent  speakers  are  published  and  widely  distributed. 
The  Congress  has  made  the  following  comprehensive 
declaration  of  its  challenge  to  the  men  and  women  of 
the  South : 

(1)  It  is  a  challenge  to  the  fathers,  mothers,  and 
all  social  workers  of  the  South  to  lift  the  burdens  of 
labor  from  childhood  and  to  make  education  universal 

(2)  It  is  a  challenge  to  the  men  who  make  and 
administer  law  to  organize  society  as  a  school  for  the 
development  of  all  her  citizens  rather  than  simply  to  be 
a  master  to  dispose  of  the  dependent,  defective,  and 
delinquent  population  with  the  least  expense  to  the  state. 

(3)  It  is  a  challenge  to  all  citizens  to  rally  to  the  lead- 
ers of  the  social  reforms,  so  as  to  secure  for  the  South 
civic  righteousness,  temperance,  and  health. 

(4)  It  is  a  challenge  to  Southern  chivalry  to  see  that 
justice  is  guaranteed  to  all  citizens,  regardless  of  race, 
color,  or  religion,  and  especially  to  befriend  and  defend 
the  friendless  and  helpless. 

(5 )  It  is  a  challenge  to  the  Church  to  prove  her  right 
to  social  mastery  by  a  universal,  unselfish  social  min- 
istry. 

(6)  It  is  a  challenge  to  the  present  generation  to 
show  its  gratitude  for  the  heritage  bequeathed  to  it, 
through  the  toil  and  blood  of  centuries,  by  devoting 
itself  more  earnestly  to  the  task  of  making  the  nation  a 
universal  brotherhood. 

(7)  It  is  a  challenge  to  strong  young  men  and  women 
to  volunteer  for  a  crusade  of  social  service,  and  to  be 
enlisted  for  heroic  warfare  against  all  destroyers  of 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     23 

public  health  and  purity,  and  to  champion  all  that  makes 
for  an  ideal  national  life. 

Southern  Conference  for  Education  and  Industry. 
This  organization  under  its  present  name  came  into 
existence  in  1915,  but  the  organizations  out  of  which 
it  grew  are  the  Southern  Educational  Association, 
which  was  organized  in  1890,  the  Conference  for  Edu- 
cation in  the  South,  organized  in  1898,  and  the  Southern 
Education  Board,  organized  in  1901.  The  present 
organization  is  the  consolidation  of  all  the  interests 
that  were  represented  in  the  other  three.  The  Southern 
Education  Board  distributed  $30,000  to  $40,000  a 
year  for  several  years  in  an  effort  to  stimulate  edu- 
cational work  in  the  South  and  to  awaken  the  South- 
ern States  to  the  importance  of  large  appropriations 
to  their  schools.  The  gratifying  result  was  shown 
in  the  fact  that  the  appropriations  in  eleven  states  in 
1910  were  $18,000,000  more  than  in  1900.  But  the 
most  important  result  was  the  aroused  and  enlight- 
ened public  sentiment  in  the  interest  of  better  educa- 
tional opportunities  for  all  the  people,  which  increases 
with  the  years.  The  Conference  for  Education  in 
the  South  was  organized  at  Capon  Springs,  Virginia, 
in  1898.  At  its  second  session  its  presiding  officer 
was  Dr.  J.  L.  M.  Curry  and  one  of  the  speakers  was 
Mr.  Robert  C.  Ogden.  At  the  next  session  Mr.  Ogden 
became  the  president  and  remained  in  that  position 
till  almost  the  day  of  his  death  in  1913.  He  was 
the  heart  and  soul  of  the  Conference  and  rendered 
a  service  to  the  South  which  is  incalculable.  The 


24  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

Southern  Education  Board  began  as  the  executive 
board  of  the  Conference  and  was  always  in  reality  the 
financial  part  of  the  organization,  being  a  small  body 
of  never  more  than  twenty-one  members.  The  board 
never  had  any  endowment  and  its  income  was  limited 
to  the  gifts  of  a  few  friends,  but  the  contributions 
made  it  possible  for  earnest  and  able  men  of  the  South, 
interested  in  education,  to  induce  the  Southern  people 
to  undertake  to  improve  their  schools  by  their  own 
means.  With  the  creation  of  the  large  foundations 
that  have  done  and  are  doing  so  much  for  education  in 
the  South,  and  the  decline  of  Mr.  Ogden's  health,  who 
was  always  the  leading  spirit  in  the  movement,  the 
Southern  Education  Board  ceased  its  labors.  How- 
ever, the  Conference  for  inspiration  and  the  discussion 
of  the  various  social,  industrial,  educational,  and  moral 
interests  has  lost  none  of  its  importance.  In  1915  the 
name  was  changed  to  include  the  real  interests  that  are 
being  promoted.  The  component  parts  of  the  Confer- 
ence are :  the  Southern  Education  Council  with  its  Col- 
lege Conference,  Superintendents'  Conference,  Teach- 
ers' Conference,  and  Library  Conference ;  the  Southern 
Industrial  Council  with  the  purpose  to  further  voca- 
tional education  and  the  cooperation  essential  to  de- 
velopment of  community  resources ;  the  Southern  Agri- 
cultural Association  to  deal  with  the  work  of  produc- 
tion, farm  management  and  the  agencies  interested, 
and  with  marketing,  rural  economics,  and  sociology; 
the  Country  Church  Conference  giving  specific  atten- 
tion to  social  service  in  agricultural  community  efforts ; 


MR.    ROBERT    C.    OGDEN 


FACTS  ABOUT  THE  SOUTH     25 

and  the  Conference  of  Southern  Women  whose  purpose 
is  to  work  for  cooperation  of  organizations  and  agencies 
in  developing  womanhood  through  home  and  com- 
munity activities.  The  Conference  gives  to  all  who 
attend  a  vision  of  the  possibilities  for  leadership  and 
provides  in  the  experiences  recorded  practical  guidance 
in  making  such  leadership  effective. 

Summary.  The  facts  about  the  South  are  too  inspir- 
ing and  too  hopeful  not  to  have  careful  study  and  sym- 
pathetic consideration.  The  basal  constituents  in  the 
composition  of  the  population  indicate  the  possibilities 
which  the  future  has  in  store.  The  marvelous  resources, 
developed  and  potential,  stamp  the  South  as  an 'inesti- 
mable national  asset.  The  natural  advantages  by  reason 
of  soil,  climate,  and  location  impress  the  investigator 
with  the  untold  future  power  of  such  a  section. 
Agencies  now  at  work  show  that  the  Southern  people 
are  awake  alike  to  their  opportunity  and  their  obliga- 
tion. How  important  it  is  that  such  a  land  be  constantly 
under  the  reign  of  the  Ruler  of  all  men  and  that  all  its 
wealth,  power,  and  potentialities  be  always  employed 
in  the  interest  of  the  kingdom  of  God.  It  is  to  impress 
this  fact  that  this  book  has  come  into  existence. 


CHAPTER  II 
THE  NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM 

J.  Farming  before  1860 

The  Great  Industry.  The  one  great  industry  of  the 
old  South  was  agriculture,  and  to  it  all  others  were 
subservient  or  tributary.  The  physical  qualities  and  con- 
ditions of  the  country  had  no  little  influence  in  deter- 
mining the  pursuits  of  the  colonists,  their  traits  of  char- 
acter, and  the  trend  of  their  history.  New  England's 
harsh  climate,  its  glaciated  soil  and  limited  area  for- 
bade any  extensive  and  highly  fruitful  agriculture. 
Natural  conditions  forced  the  people  to  barter  with  the 
Indians,  to  gain  profit  from  the  teeming  fisheries  of  the 
coast,  to  build  and  hire  vessels  for  coast- wise  com- 
merce, and  eventually  to  develop  manufacture  as  the 
chief  wealth-producing  occupation  by  which  the  popula- 
tion could  be  sustained.  Landholdings  then  were 
small,  and  the  density  of  the  population  increased  with 
its  growth.  The  Southern  colonies,  on  the  other  hand, 
not  only  found  a  mild  climate  with  considerable  variety, 
but  also  a  large  domain,  extending  a  distance  of  one 
thousand  miles,  having  a  breadth  of  fifty  to  three  hun- 
dred miles  from  the  sea  to  the  mountain  range,  of  flat 
or  gently  rolling  land  of  immense  fertility,  with  numer- 

27 


28  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

ous  large  rivers  and  with  a  seashore  of  one  thousand 
miles,  indented  by  many  bays  and  estuaries.  The  for- 
ests with  their  soft  woods  and  little  underbrush  were 
easily  cleared.  This  great  area  of  340,000  square 
miles  was  so  favorable  to  remunerative  agriculture  that 
from  the  beginning  of  the  Jamestown  settlement  farm- 
ing became  almost  the  exclusive  occupation  of  the 
people.  The  land  grants  in  the  South  were  large  and 
the  profitable  areas  were  devoted  to  expansive  rather 
than  intensive  crops.  Much  of  this  territory  was  in  the 
bottom  lands  of  the  great  rivers,  in  the  swampy  regions 
of  the  bays,  estuaries,  and  the  coast.  Crops  and  labor 
had  to  be  selected  and  secured  that  could  be  made  profit- 
able in  the  country.  This  condition  may  explain  the 
use  of  Negro  labor  and  the  cultivation  of  such  crops  as 
tobacco,  rice,  and  indigo,  and  later  sugar  and  cotton. 

The  Southern  Colonists.  There  were  very  few  if 
any  skilled  farmers  among  the  Jamestown  settlers,  and 
necessarily  the  agricultural  methods  adopted  were 
crude,  although  fashioned  after  those  obtaining  in  Eng- 
land. The  settlers  sent  to  England  for  their  seeds, 
stocks,  and  implements  with  which  they  were  more  or 
less  familiar.  They  found  here  the  Indian  corn,  pota- 
toes, and  tobacco.  Sugar  cane  was  introduced  from 
Santo  Domingo  about  1750,  while  the  cultivation  of 
cotton  began  with  the  arrival  at  Jamestown.  Tobacco 
became  the  staple  crop  by  1616,  and  its  cultivation  had 
not  a  little  to  do  with  the  inauguration  and  development 
of  the  plantation  system.  It  was  a  profitable  crop,  re- 
quired less  labor  and  less  ground  and  consequently  less 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  29 

clearing  than  grain,  and  was  more  easily  marketed 
because  of  its  small  bulk  for  its  value. 

The  Plantation  System.  The  exhaustive  culture  of 
a  single  crop  and  large  areas  for  the  staple  crops  of 
tobacco,  cotton,  rice,  indigo,  and  sugar  became  the  rule 
of  the  Southern  plantation.  Restorative  crops,  rest  by 
fallow,  and  model  rotations  were  practically  unknown. 
The  system  was  essentially  wasteful.  Tobacco  was 
peculiarly  exhaustive  and  made  continuous  demands 
for  fresh  lands  for  its  profitable  production.  With  no 
fertilizers  and  with  crude  implements  and  wasteful 
methods,  accentuated  by  the  use  of  unintelligent  slave 
labor,  it  was  found  that  the  best  alluvial  lands  became 
exhausted  in  eight  years  and  thinner  lands  in  three 
years.  This  led  to  the  continued  abandonment,  with- 
out relinquishing  the  title,  of  old  depleted  lands  for 
new  lands  of  virgin  fertility.  The  average  plantation 
required  annually  about  seventy  acres  of  new  land. 
The  productive  area  was  continuously  enlarged  until 
practically  the  entire  coastal  region,  embracing  a  terri- 
tory 400  miles  long  and  200  miles  wide,  was  occupied 
by  planters.  As  this  territory  was  occupied,  the  planters 
pushed  up  into  the  back  country  of  which  parts  had 
been  put  into  cultivation  by  the  small  farmers.  The 
original  European  settlers  in  the  lower  South  and  their 
followers  and  descendants  clung  to  the  broad  flat  coastal 
plains. 

Planters  and  Farmers.  There  were  two  classes  of 
agriculturalists  in  the  old  South,  the  planters  and  the 
farmers.  The  planters  were  the  tobacco  growers  of 


30  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

the  Chesapeake  Bay  region,  the  rice  and  cotton  pro- 
ducers of  the  Carolinas  and  the  lower  South,  and  the 
sugar  growers  of  the  Mississippi  delta.  They  usually 
owned  large  estates,  worked  fifty  to  one  hundred  slaves, 
even  more,  and  maintained  a  high  social  and  polit- 
ical position.  They  were  looked  to  as  the  proper  per- 
sons to  sit  on  the  county  court  'bench,  in  the  legislature, 
and  even  in  Congress.  The  planter's  home  was  the 
resort  of  a  host  of  friends,  and  the  hounds  of  the  whole 
countryside  were  called  to  the  chase  by  the  sound  of  his 
horn.  The  farmers  who  made  up  the  great  body  of  the 
white  Southern  population  lived  in  the  valley  of  Vir- 
ginia, in  middle  and  western  North  Carolina,  North 
Georgia,  northern  Alabama,  eastern  Tennessee,  and 
western  Virginia  and  Kentucky,  a  region  which  in  1850 
contained  one  million  whites  and  only  one  hundred  thou- 
sand Negroes.  The  hill  country  was  settled  largely  by 
persons  from  the  northward  along  lines  parallel  to  the 
mountain  range.  These  constituted  the  bulk  of  the 
non-slaveholders  of  the  South.  The  farmers  lived  also 
along  the  ridges  of  the  plantations  and  on  small  land 
grants  between  them;  for,  in  spite  of  the  large  estates, 
there  was  left  a  vast  quantity  of  unoccupied  territory 
to  furnish  adequate  homesteads  for  humble  families. 
Nine  tenths  of  the  South's  landholders  at  any  time  in 
its  history  were  small  proprietors  who  raised  grain  and 
livestock  as  well  as  cotton  and  tobacco.  The  farmer 
cultivated  fifty  to  one  hundred  acres,  maintained  a 
simple  home,  reared  a  large  family,  had  no  servants 
and  seldom  any  slaves.  He  usually  kept  a  hound  or 


VEGETABLE    FARM 

TANNERY    NEAR    NEWPORT,    TENNESSEE 
LOGGING   ON    CHATTOOGA   RIVER 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  31 

two,  which  enabled  him  to  join  his  planter  neighbor  in 
the  chase.  He  was  not  without  social  and  economic 
ambitions,  as  he  wanted  slaves,  a  mansion,  carriages 
and  thoroughbred  horses,  and  secured  them,  if  fortune 
favored  him. 

The  Non-Slaveholder.  The  total  white  population  of 
the  fifteen  slaveholding  states  in  1860  was  8,099,760, 
and  the  number  of  slaveholders  was  383,637;  of  whom 
277,000  owned  less  than  ten  slaves  each;  10,751 
owned  fifty  or  more;  1,733  owned  one  hundred  or 
more;  312  owned  over  200;  fourteen  owned  over  500; 
while  there  were  practically  75,000  who  owned  only  one 
each.  There  were  at  least  6,000,000  Southern  people 
who  had  no  direct  interest  in  slaves.  These  figures  show 
that  the  great  majority  of  the  slaveholders  were  simply 
farmers  owning  a  few  slaves  with  whom  they  worked 
as  managers,  overseers,  and  drivers.  It  is  readily 
seen  that  every  slaveholder  was  not  the  proprietor  of 
a  large  estate.  The  Black  Belt  where  slavery  was  con- 
centrated embraced  only  about  one  third  of  the  terri- 
tory of  the  South  and  in  the  remaining  two  thirds  there 
dwelt  a  population  which  sustained  itself  by  its  own 
labor  and  produced  for  the  market  some  grain  and 
staples.  It  is  true  that  some  slavery  existed  in  all  parts 
of  the  South,  but  the  number  of  whites  who  worked 
at  manual  labor  was  always  greater  than  the  number 
of  slaves. 

Nothing  is  more  absurd  than  the  idea  that  the  non- 
slaveholding  white  man  was  little  less  than  a  political 
nonentity,  an  economic  cypher,  and  a  social  outcast.  It 


32  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

is  true  that  the  planters  were  able  to  direct  the  lawmak- 
ing,  the  local  improvements,  the  general  affairs  of  life 
and  command  the  money  interests  of  the  community, 
yet  the  farmers  were  voters  and  nine  times  as  numer- 
ous, and  while  the  great  landowners  were  supreme 
among  the  slaves,  they  were  careful  not  to  give  offense 
to  their  less  affluent  neighbors  upon  whom  they  de- 
pended for  political  preferment.  The  democratic  spirit 
of  white  equality  was  as  strong  in  the  South  as  in  the 
North.  Hostility  between  economic  groups  in  the  pres- 
ence of  great  bodies  of  slaves  could  not  be  permitted. 
The  poor  man  stood  for  as  much  in  the  South  in  those 
days  as  he  does  anywhere  at  any  time.  Slavery  and 
the  larger  slaveholders  have  played  so  prominent  a  part 
in  Southern  affairs  that  the  world  has  all  but  ignored, 
if  not  held  in  contempt,  the  non-slaveholder  and  the 
man  who  owned  but  few  slaves.  Justice  has  never  been 
done  this  latter  class. 

Professor  G.  W.  Dyer  of  Vanderbilt  University,  in 
his  Democracy  in  the  South,  says :  "In  the  large  slave- 
holding  sections  of  Virginia  poor  men  represented  their 
counties  in  the  legislature  and  in  the  state  senate."  The 
small  offices  were  open  to  all.  He  says  also :  "There 
were  eight  men  who  served  as  the  chief  executive  of 
Virginia  from  1841  to  1861.  Two  of  these  had  been 
farm  hands  in  their  early  days,  and  one  had  been  a 
tailor.  A  fourth  was  the  grandson  of  a  school-teacher 
who  wrote  in  the  office  of  a  county  surveyor  and  acted 
•as  deputy  sheriff  of  Botetourt  County.  A  fifth  was 
the  son  of  a  Scotchman  who  came  to  Virginia  as  the 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  33 

employee  of  a  milling  company.  A  sixth  was  a  lawyer 
and  mail  contractor,  and  evidently  came  from  the  plain 
people.  Only  one  of  the  eight  who  filled  this  high  office 
belonged  to  a  prominent  family." 

The  Blight  of  Slave  Labor.  Slavery  was  a  mighty 
economic  influence  in  the  Southern  colonies  from  the 
time  of  its  introduction  in  1619,  or  at  least  from  the 
opening  of  the  eighteenth  century,  until  it  was  abol- 
ished. The  tide-water  section  of  the  South,  unlike  the 
North,  was  a  network  of  peninsulas,  skirted  by  rich 
alluvial  bottom  lands,  producing  in  abundance  corn, 
tobacco,  rice,  cotton,  and  indigo,  but  under  deadly 
climatic  conditions.  The  mortality  of  white  men  in 
such  sections  as  well  as  on  the  watercourses  was 
appalling.  The  Negro  soon  became  a  necessity,  as  he 
was  able  to  withstand  the  climate  ravages  and  was 
capable  of  much  manual  labor.  The  large  land  grants 
enabled  the  settlers  to  form  and  preserve  an  expansive 
system  of  large  estates  as  contrasted  with  the  restric- 
tions in  the  North.  These  two  facts  laid  the  basis  of 
the  tide-water  plantation.  The  rapid  growth  of  the 
cotton  industry  along  with  the  tobacco  crop  spread  the 
planter  regime  which  in  time  was  responsible  for  the 
increase  of  slavery.  The  slave  labor  regime,  which  \ 
included  4,000,000  Negroes,  is  responsible  for  the  reck- 
less land  exploitations  and  wastefulness  which  depleted 
the  soils,  destroyed  the  timber,  and  left  the  Southern 
States  agriculturally  impoverished.  The  slaves  were  i 
ignorant,  inefficient,  and  unsuited  as  a  rule  to  any  but 
the  crudest  manual  operations  and  could  not  be  de-  / 


34  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

pended  upon  to  produce  varied  crops,  fruits,  grains, 
dairy  products,  fine  stock,  or  to  use  improved  tools 
and  fertilizers.  They  could  only  produce  the  four 
great  staples  of  cotton,  tobacco,  rice,  and  sugar,  which 
required  little  skill  but  which  were  the  money  crops 
of  the  South  and  constituted  the  bulk  of  America's 
exports.  The  one-crop  system,  the  slovenly  manner  of 
cultivation,  the  abandonment  of  criminally  depleted 
lands,  the  greedy  destruction  of  the  new  frontiers,  may 
all  be  charged  to  the  slave  labor  regime.  These  large 
landowners  became  thoroughly  acquainted  with  im- 
provements in  agricultural  implements  and  methods, 
yet  with  slave  labor  they  could  not  adopt  them.  The 
small  farmers  and  tenants  who  constituted  the  great 
bulk  of  the  white  population  were  influenced  by  the 
example  of  their  rich  neighbors  to  keep  up  the  use  of 
primitive  and  ineffective  methods  and  tools.  From  an 
agricultural  standpoint  the  slave  labor  system  became 
a  curse  to  the  South  and  could  not  have  long  continued 
without  greatly  impoverishing  the  natural  resources  of 
the  Southern  soil  and  thoroughly  destroying  the  hope 
and  stay  of  Southern  civilization. 

A  Rural  People.  The  people  of  the  old  South  were 
a  rural  people.  There  was  not  only  no  disposition  to 
desert  the  country  for  the  towns  but  on  the  contrary 
when  a  merchant  or  tradesman  accumulated  a  fortune 
in  a  city  his  first  desire  was  to  purchase  a  landed  estate 
and  slaves,  and  set  himself  up  in  a  rural  home.  The 
population  of  all  classes  was  averse  to  urban  life  and 
urban  occupations.  In  fact,  there  were  few  towns  and 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  35 

fewer  cities.  The  towns  were  petty  market  places,  while 
the  cities  were  mere  distributing  centers  for  agricul- 
tural and  household  manufactured  supplies.  In  1860 
the  South  had  thirty  cities  of  8,000  population  and 
over,  with  an  average  population  of  33,315,  and  a  total 
population  of  999,947,  or  nearly  one  eighth  of  the  white 
population  of  the  South.  The  South  had  three  out  of 
the  eight,  and  four  out  of  the  eleven  largest  cities  in 
the  United  States.  Yet  the  cities  can  not  be  said  to 
have  been  very  great.  They  had  very  little  influence 
upon  the  social  life  of  the  state.  From  these  rural 
communities  came  the  leaders  of  the  South.  Washing- 
ton, Jefferson,  Madison,  Monroe,  Jackson,  Calhoun, 
and  a  great  company  of  illustrious  representatives  of 
the  South  in  public  life  had  their  homes  on  their  landed 
estates.  The  agricultural  system  was  conducive  to  the 
development  of  individuality,  leadership,  and  a  sense  of 
liberty.  The  education  of  the  sons  of  the  plantations 
was  largely  European,  and  as  a  consequence  their  taste 
was  predominantly  classical,  while  their  manner  of 
expression  was  oratorical  and  florid.  The  planters  be- 
came conservative  in  their  views  as  they  became  self- 
sufficing  and  exclusively  specialized  in  their  interests. 
As  there  was  an  ample  supply  of  laborers  in  the  slaves 
there  was  little  room  for  immigrants  from  the  North 
and  Europe,  and  consequently  no  introduction  of  a 
foreign  influence  to  undermine  the  existing  social  and 
economic  order.  Finally  land  hunger  forced  great 
streams  of  emigrants  over  the  Appalachian  range 
through  Kentucky  into  the  Mississippi  Valley  and 


36  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

down  into  Texas,  but  they  carried  with  them  prac- 
tically the  same  social  and  economic  system,  modified 
by  conditions  as  they  arose. 

2.  Recovery  and  Reconstruction 

Lost  Wealth.  From  1865  to  T88o  was  a  period  of 
industrial  reconstruction.  The  economic  and  social 
system  of  the  old  South  was  terribly  shaken,  and  in 
many  ways  destroyed  by  the  upheaval  of  the  early 
sixties.  Of  the  three  richest  states  in  the  Union  in 
1860,  two  were  Southern ;  of  the  five  richest,  three  were 
Southern;  of  the  ten  richest,  six  were  Southern;  of  the 
seventeen  richest,  ten  were  Southern.  The  waste  of  the 
war  left  the  country  bare  and  the  agricultural  interests 
as  well  as  other  industries  of  the  South  prostrated  and 
nearly  destroyed.  The  country  was  necessarily  at  the 
beginning  of  a  new  endeavor.  Many  of  the  plantations 
could  not  be  restored  because  of  lack  of  money,  man- 
agement, and  labor,  and  those  that  remained  were 
forced  into  a  sudden  transformation  and  a  complete 
readjustment.  The  white  districts,  while  depleted, 
entered  at  once  upon  a  rapid  development,  while  the 
Black  Belt  was  face  to  face  with  difficulties  which  have 
never  been  fully  overcome.  But  the  necessity  of  life 
impels  to  action,  and  virtue  is  engendered  in  human 
effort. 

The  Laborers.  The  abolition  of  slavery  ushered  in 
a  revolution  in  the  employment,  management,  and 
direction  of  labor.  The  Negroes  just  released  from 
bondage,  wanted  to  give  themselves  unlimited  leisure, 


PLANTATION    HOMES    NEAR   SUMMERVILLE,    SOUTH    CAROLINA 

Old  Ingleside  Residence 
Ruins  of  Arthur  Middleton  Place 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  37 

enjoy  new  amusements,  and  they  moved  often. .  Very 
slowly  did  the  mass  of  them  settle  down  to  regular 
work.  Without  white  supervision  their  efficiency  was 
very  poor  and  continued  to  decline.  They  were  averse 
to  white  supervision  and  objected  especially  to  over- 
seers, leaders,  or  drivers,  and  plantation  bells.  They 
were  poor  tenants,  "cropping"  as  they  did,  with  the 
landowner  supplying  everything  except  their  own 
labor,  hence  production  decreased  and  the  soil  became 
more  and  more  impoverished  under  their  cultivation. 
Wherever  they  had  white  supervision  their  crops  were 
better.  The  want  of  reliability  as  well  as  capability 
in  the  Negro  laborer  brought  great  perplexity  to  the 
owners  of  large  agricultural  areas.  Up  to  this  time 
the  Black  Belt  suffers  from  the  lack  of  efficient  labor. 
In  some  sections  where  the  production  of  cotton  and 
rice  was  very  great  it  has  declined  to  insignificant  pro- 
portions, and  many  of  the  great  plantations  have  been 
cut  into  small  farms.  White  labor  in  1865  was  hardly 
to  be  had,  as  the  unsettled  conditions  of  the  South  pre- 
vented the  coming  of  white  immigrants  from  the  North. 
The  number  of  white  laborers  was  somewhat  increased 
by  the  accession  of  former  professional  men  and 
former  independent  farmers  and  even  planters  who 
had  been  reduced  to  penury  by  the  war.  But  wherever 
white  labor  was  employed  it  showed  its  marked  supe- 
riority. The  decrease  in  the  production  of  cotton,  the 
great  money  crop  on  the  remaining  plantations,  opened 
the  way  for  its  cultivation  in  the  white  sections.  The 
results  were  so  satisfactory  that  the  white  districts  all 


38  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

over  the  South  began  raising  cotton,  and  by  1876  the 
proportion  of  white  laborers  to  black  in  cotton  produc- 
tion was  as  two  to  three,  whereas  in  1860  it  was  one 
to  eight.  This  was  the  beginning  of  a  new  era  for  the 
white  farmer  of  the  South. 

The  Crops.  The  cotton  crop  in  1866  was  probably 
less  than  a  million  bales,  but  by  1879  it  was  5,755,ooo 
bales,  or  370,000  more  than  in  1859,  a  complete  recov- 
ery in  fourteen  years.  In  1860  the  tobacco  crop  in  the 
six  states  of  Virginia,  the  Carolinas,  Maryland,  Ken- 
tucky, and  Tennessee  was  346,91 1,876  pounds ;  in  1870 
it  was  190,827,916  pounds;  in  1880  it  was  335,887,420 
pounds.  The  sugar  crop  of  1860  was  235,856  tons;  in 
1866  it  was  21,074  tons;  in  1881  it  was  121,886  tons; 
but  the  crop  of  1861  was  not  reached  until  1893.  The 
total  bushels  of  cereals  produced  in  the  South  in  1859 
was  523,345,129;  in  1869  was  419.775,  732;  an<*  in 
1879  was  719,747,997.  The  tonnage  of  the  hay  crop 
in  1876  was  probably  twice  that  of  1860.  These  sta- 
tistics indicate  the  rapidity  with  which  the  South  rallied 
from  its  economic  disaster  of  the  sixties.  The  recon- 
struction in  agricultural  life  and  methods,  which  was 
made  a  necessity  by  the  exigencies  of  the  situation,  had 
not  a  little  to  do  with  the  speedy  recovery  of  the 
country  from  its  depleted  and  embarrassed  if  not 
impoverished  condition.  Not  only  were  larger  crops 
of  the  great  staples  produced,  but  diversification  began 
to  be  practised  in  the  grains,  grasses,  and  such  products 
as  were  necessary  to  home  comforts  and  appetites. 
With  the  shortage  in  money  which  embarrassed  all  parts 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  39 

of  the  South,  household  industries  were  everywhere 
established  and  these  called  for  raw  materials  of  all 
kinds.  The  period  of  economic  reconstruction  was  a 
time  of  initial  diversification. 

The  People.  The  plantation,  with  its  fine  social 
qualities,  aristocratic  mien,  commanding  wealth,  and 
political  power,  never  dominated  the  South  or  any  part 
of  it  after  the  sweeping  desolations  of  the  sixties. 
Many  of  the  mansions  were  destroyed,  many  of  the 
owners  were  killed  or  disabled,  the  broad  acres  had 
become  a  waste  of  weeds  and  bushes,  and  the  owners 
who  had  not  been  ruined,  had  been  reduced  to  financial 
straits.  Not  only  so,  but  the  old  South  with  its  senti- 
ment, sweetness,  wealth,  and  rare  civilization  had  gone 
never  to  be  restored.  Rehabilitation  was  in  many 
instances  undertaken,  but  the  conditions  would  not 
permit  such  achievement.  An  aristocracy  broken,  hope- 
less, embarrassed,  however  noble  and  high,  could  only 
seek  retirement  to  modest  surroundings.  The  society 
of  the  South  had  to  find  a  new  center.  The  town  and 
the  city  began  to  be  the  gathering-place  of  the  social 
and  economic  leaders  who  had  always  considered  the 
estates  as  the  proper  dwelling-places  for  high  humanity. 
The  Negro  had  lost  his  place  in  the  life  of  the  home, 
and  became  a  new  creature  quite  apart  from  the  white 
folk.  The  white  farmer  had  succeeded  the  planter  in 
the  agricultural  pursuits  and  was  building  a  new  South 
by  his  own  industry,  toil,  and  determination.  The 
exodus  to  the  town  and  city,  a  revival  in  railroad  build- 
ing, the  establishment  of  commercial  enterprises,  the 


40  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

diversification  of  crops,  and  many  other  signs  of  the 
modern  era  began  to  appear.  Educational  progress, 
which  is  always  largely  influenced  by  social  life,  took 
on  a  new  phase,  and  common  school  instruction  began 
to  be  a  recognized  necessity.  The  churches  were  quick- 
ened into  new  life  and  enlarged  activities  as  the  eco- 
nomic recovery  became  more  complete  and  the  social 
reconstruction  more  pronounced.  The  new  South  was 
to  have  a  new  people,  new  institutions,  and  new  modes 
of  living,  but  these  were  to  grow  out  of  the  old  South 
with  its  fine  gentility,  genuine  culture,  and  character- 
istic civilization. 

j.  The  Twentieth  Century  Era 

The  Awakening.  Farming  in  the  South  to-day  is  a 
new  occupation  because  of  the  awakening  of  a  new 
interest,  the  production  of  a  new  intelligence,  and  the 
development  of  a  new  attitude  in  the  farmers  and  in 
the  people  at  large  as  well.  The  farmers  have  been 
awakened  from  their  long-time  contentment  with  those 
inefficient  and  wasteful  methods  which  have  despoiled 
their  lands,  increased  and  consumed  their  labor,  and 
kept  down  to  a  disheartening  figure  the  fruits  of  their 
toil.  This  change  is  due  to  several  causes,  among  which 
may  be  mentioned  their  own  normal  development,  the 
influence  of  western  farming  with  its  prairie  sweep 
and  new  and  larger  implements,  and  the  aid  which  has 
come  to  the  South  through  the  federal  agencies  and 
private  benefactions  which  have  demonstrated  the  possi- 
bilities of  scientific  farming.  Not  only  have  the  men 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  41 

in  the  open  field  been  awakened,  but  the  commercial 
agencies  of  town  and  city  have  come  to  see  the  impor- 
tance of  proper  cultivation,  in  order  to  save  the  good 
soil,  redeem  the  waste  lands,  multiply  the  crops  and  the 
yield,  and  effectualize  rural  life.  The  educational 
leaders  and  authorities  have  seen  that,  whatever  may  be 
the  interest  in  popular  education  which  they  may  arouse, 
meager  agricultural  incomes  will  make  the  securing  of 
that  education  an  impossibility.  The  Church  leaders 
have  come  to  realize  that  the  support  of  religious  insti- 
tutions in  the  country  is  always  poor  when  agricultural, 
prosperity  is  at  a  low  state.  While  the  new  era  had  its 
beginning  with  the  economic  reconstruction  which  fol- 
lowed the  destruction  of  the  old  plantation  life  and 
system,  yet  it  has  come  in  its  fulness  only  in  the  last 
dozen  years  and  will  show  its  gracious  benefits  in  the 
immediate  future. 

Educating  the  Present  Farmer.  This  is  possible 
and  why  not  do  it  ?  That  has  been  and  is  the  attitude 
of  the  federal  government  and  multiplied  efforts  are 
being  made  to  accomplish  that  end.  That  is  the  pur- 
pose of  the  demonstration  work  which  is  being  now  so 
extensively  carried  on  in  the  Southern  States.  This 
work  recently  received  its  great  impetus  from  Dr.  Sea- 
man A.  Knapp,  who  was  a  special  agent  of  the  federal 
Department  of  Agriculture  for  several  years.  While 
operating  in  Texas  to  combat  the  deadly  effects  of  the 
boll-weevil  on  cotton,  he  attracted  the  attention  of  the 
General  Education  Board,  whose  officers  were  seeking 
an  agency  through  which  to  render  some  aid  to  the 


42  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

farmers  of  the  South.  His  plan  wherever  diligently 
carried  out  was  successful  in  making  a  crop  of  cotton 
under  boll-weevil  conditions.  With  the  funds  of  the 
General  Education  Board  at  the  command  of  Dr. 
Knapp  and  his  colaborers  in  demonstration  work,  plans 
were  at  once  made  to  take  to  the  farmers  in  the  persons 
of  well-chosen  agents  the  principles  and  the  program 
of  scientific  farming  with  its  diversification  of  crops, 
soil  treatment,  and  methods  of  cultivation.  For  a  dozen 
years  this  work  has  gone  on,  and  to-day  with  greater 
zeal  and  intelligence  and  by  a  larger  force  of  demon- 
strators than  ever  before.  There  is  a  state  agent  for 
each  of  the  sixteen  Southern  States,  with  three  or  four 
district  agents  in  each  state,  and  each  of  these  has 
fifteen  to  twenty-five  local  agents.  There  is  a  com- 
pany of  demonstrators,  reaching  into  the  various 
counties  and  limited  sections,  that  numbered  last  year 
1,229.  Of  these  842  are  engaged  exclusively  with 
adult  farmers  and  in  promoting  the  work  done  by  Boys' 
Clubs,  and  387  are  engaged  in  forming  and  directing 
Girls'  Clubs.  Last  year  105,000  adult  farmers  par- 
ticipated in  demonstration  work  and  saw  in  their 
own  communities  the  actual  results  of  scientific  farm- 
ing. The  demonstrators  held  farmers'  meetings  as 
well  as  supervised  the  demonstration  farms,  and  at 
these  meetings  649,733  farmers  were  in  attendance. 
These  demonstrations  are  carried  on  for  the  Negro 
farmers  as  well  as  for  the  white  farmers.  As  they 
go  they  proclaim  the  ten  agricultural  commandments : 
( i )  Remove  all  surplus  water  on  and  in  the  soil. 


DR.    SEAMAN    A.    KNAPP 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  43 

(2)  Plow  eight,  ten,  or  twelve  inches  deep  in  the 
fall  with  implements  that  will  not  bring  the  subsoil  to 
the  surface. 

(3)  Use    seed    of    the    best    variety,    intelligently 
selected  and  carefully  stored. 

(4)  In  cultivated  crops  give  the  rows  and  the  plants 
in  the  row  a  space  suited  to  the  plant,  the  soil,  and  the 
climate. 

(5)  Cultivate  the  soil  intensively  during  the  grow- 
ing period  and  rotate  the  crops. 

(6)  Use  judiciously  barnyard  manure,  legumes,  and 
commercial  fertilizers. 

(7)  Produce  at  home  all  food  required  for  the  family 
and  the  stock. 

(8)  Use  more  horse-power  and  better  machinery. 

(9)  Raise  more  and  better  stock  to  the  extent  of  util- 
izing all  the  waste  products  and  idle  lands  of  the  farm. 

(10)  Keep  an  accurate  account  of  each  farm  pro- 
duct in  order  to  know  from  which  the  gain  or  loss 
arises. 

These  agricultural  agents  have  become  promoters 
of  a  better  country  life;  more  home  conveniences, 
attractions,  and  advantages;  a  more  adequate  educa- 
tional system  with  better  schoolhouses  and  surround- 
ings; and  a  higher  state  of  country  living.  The  pos- 
sibilities of  social  and  moral  service  through  these 
agricultural  agents  are  as  great  as  those  of  economic 
progress. 

Educating  the  Future  Farmer.  There  were  75,000 
boys  enrolled  in  the  Corn  Clubs  of  the  Southern  States 


44  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

in  1915.  Each  of  these  had  an  acre  in  corn,  or  such 
crops  as  Kaffir  or  Milo  which  are  substitutes  for  corn 
in  Oklahoma  and  Western  Texas.  Club  members  were 
expected  to  demonstrate  the  growing  of  pigs,  calves, 
lambs,  and  kids,  depending  upon  the  demand  conditions 
and  needs  in  the  various  sections  and  localities.  These 
boys'  Corn  Clubs  have  been  conducted  in  the  Southern 
States  since  1909  by  the  national  Department  of  Agri- 
culture, the  state  Agricultural  Colleges  and  cooperative 
agencies.  During  the  six  years  1,751  boys  produced 
more  than  100  bushels  to  the  acre,  26  went  above 
200  bushels,  and  one  from  Alabama  went  to  232.7 
bushels.  Each  member  of  the  club  receives  instructions 
from  the  Department  of  Agriculture  on  how  to  culti- 
vate the  soil  and  why,  how  to  care  for  his  live  stock 
and  why,  how  to  plant  the  acre  the  next  year  and  why. 
iWith  glowing  and  growing  interest  the  boy  receives  the 
instruction  and  makes  it  his  for  his  lifetime,  and  also 
for  his  community.  While  the  boys  are  receiving  their 
instruction  as  members  of  corn  clubs  and  other  farm 
clubs,  last  year  as  many  as  53,000  girls  in  the  Southern 
States  were  enrolled  in  Canning  Clubs,  under  the  super- 
vision of  387  women  agents.  They  have  tenth-acre 
gardens  in  which  to  grow  tomatoes  and  other  vegetables. 
They  can  vegetables,  berries,  and  fruits  of  all  kinds. 
They  are  instructed  in  the  preparation,  care,  and  culti- 
vation of  garden  plants  and  also  in  seed  sowing  and  pro- 
duction of  all  kinds  of  vegetables.  Girls'  Poultry 
Clubs  are  also  extensively  conducted.  Counties  have 
been  and  are  being  organized  so  that  all  the  farm  girls 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  45 

may  be  touched  by  the  new  enthusiasm  for,  and  intelli- 
gence of  farm  life.  The  woman  agent  as  she  visits  is 
expected  to  find  opportunities  for  suggesting  many 
inexpensive  but  convenient  and  serviceable  labor-sav- 
ing devices,  also  the  best  models  of  household  utensils 
and  simple  means  for  beautifying  the  house  and  the 
surroundings. 

An  Incident.  The  General  Education  Board  reports 
this  incident.  Two  strangers  in  Alabama  observed  an 
outstanding  patch  in  a  large  field  of  ordinary  corn. 
They  dismounted  to  interview  the  owner.  A  Negro 
boy  approached. 

"Is  this  your  corn  ?" 

"Yes,  sir." 

"How  did  you  come  to  grow  it?" 

"One  of  Dr.  Knapp's  men  showed  me,  sir." 

"Why  did  you  plant  it  so  far  apart  in  the  rows  ?" 

"Because,  sir,  most  all  that  grows  comes  from  the 
sunshine  and  the  air." 

"When  did  you  plow?" 

"Last  fall,  sir." 

"Why?" 

"To  make  plant  food  during  the  winter." 

"Where  did  you  get  your  fertilizer?" 

"From  the  bottom,  sir." 

"How  many  times  did  you  cultivate  ?" 

"Six  times,  sir." 

"Why?" 

"Because  there's  water  next  to  the  clay,  and  when 
I  do  not  plow  the  sun  draws  it  all  away." 


46  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

"When  did  you  put  in  the  cow-peas?" 

"After  the  last  plowing,  sir." 

"What  did  you  do  that  for?" 

"Because  the  cow-peas  get  out  of  the  air  nitrogen, 
and  put  back  in  the  ground  about  as  much  as  the  corn 
takes  out." 

He  had  learned  his  lesson,  and  three  years  later  he 
and  his  sister  were  students  at  Tuskegee  Institute,  pay- 
ing for  their  education  with  the  money  earned  as  club 
workers ! 

Other  Agencies.  The  agricultural  colleges  of  the 
South  were  never  so  well  conducted  nor  so  highly 
regarded  as  to-day.  In  each  state  in  connection  with 
the  agricultural  college  the  federal  government  con- 
ducts an  experiment  station  to  which  it  makes  a  yearly 
appropriation  of  $30,000.  Many  states  supplement  this 
amount  by  their  own  appropriations.  Each  station  con- 
ducts such  experiments  as  its  management  may  see  fit. 
In  this  way  soils,  seeds,  pests,  and  products  of  every 
section  become  scientifically  known.  The  leaders  in 
the  commercial  and  industrial  activities,  as  in  the  edu- 
cational movements  and  also  in  the  community  service 
of  the  church,  are  emphasizing  more  and  more  the 
importance  of  agricultural  instruction  in  the  public 
schools.  There  is  now  no  association  of  bankers, 
lawyers,  physicians,  teachers,  or  business  men  that  -does 
not  discuss  at  almost  every  meeting  some  phase  of 
farming  and  farm  life.  At  Nashville,  Tennessee,  was 
founded  in  1914  the  Knapp  School  of  Country  Life  in 
connection  with  the  George  Peabody  College  for 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  47 

Teachers  by  contributions  amounting  to  about  $500,- 
ooo.  This  institution  is  preparing  leaders  for  the 
farm  and  country  life  and  is  also  influencing  a  great 
body  of  teachers  who  are  going  out  from  this  institu- 
tion to  all  parts  of  the  South  to  train  men  and  women 
for  the  local  communities.  During  the  summer  spe- 
cial courses  are  given  for  ministers  of  the  gospel  who 
labor  in  the  country.  Three  of  the  state  universities 
of  the  South  last  summer  also  conducted  institutes  of 
two  weeks'  duration  for  country  ministers,  while  several 
Church  colleges  conducted  similar  institutes  for  the 
ministers  of  their  denominations.  The  economic,  edu- 
cational and  religious  forces  of  the  South  are  being 
enlisted  and  mobilized  in  the  interest  of  the  farming 
industry  and  the  mental,  moral,  and  religious  develop- 
ment of  the  country  people. 

Good  Roads.  Mr.  L.  W.  Page,  of  the  Federal  Office 
of  Public  Roads,  said  recently  in  an  article:  "Hopeful 
signs  of  rapid  progress  in  road  building  in  the  South 
are  becoming  abundant.  Ten  years  ago  the  work  of 
road  improvement  had  hardly  begun ;  to-day  the  activ- 
ity of  the  South  is  equal  to  that  of  the  North.  Com- 
munity after  community,  state  after  state,  is  taking  up 
the  work  and  pushing  it  along  with  enthusiasm.  Here 
and  there  mistakes  are  made,  but  in  general  the  move- 
ment is  steadily  tending  toward  a  county  unit  system, 
supplemented  by  a  state  Highway  Department.  Such 
a  system  when  wisely  organized  will  provide  for  a 
sustained  policy  and  make  efficiency  the  object  of  its 
work."  Fifteen  per  cent,  of  our  roads  carry  three 


f 


48  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

fourths  of  the  traffic.  Hence  the  problem  of  improv- 
ing our  roads  is  by  no  means  as  great  as  many  would 
have  us  believe.  It  is  more  a  question  of  wisely  locat- 
ing our  improvements  so  as  to  serve  the  greatest  num- 
ber. Highway  conditions  in  the  South  have  been  prac- 
tically revolutionized  during  the  last  fifteen  years 
through  local  bond  issues,  the  general  use  of  convicts 
for  road  work,  and  the  granting  of  state  aid  in  money 
and  supervision.  The  total  expenditure  for  roads  in 
1913  was  about  $50,000,000,  of  which  about  $20,000,- 
ooo  was  raised  by  local  bond  issues.  Because  of  the 
low  cost  of  labor,  extensive  use  of  sand-clay  and 
gravel  construction,  and  other  favorable  local  condi- 
tions, the  South  has  reaped  more  widely  distributed 
benefits  for  expenditure  than  any  other  large  section  of 
the  United  States.  In  1900  the  total  mileage  of  im- 
proved roads  in  the  South  was  only  15,500,  while  on 
January  i,  1914,  it  was  51,981.  But  when  it  is  remem- 
bered that  the  total  road  mileage  of  the  South  is 
855,559  miles,  it  will  be  seen  at  once  what  yet  remains 
to  be  done. 

Tenancy.  One  of  the  chief  perils  of  farming  and 
country  life  in  the  South  is  tenancy.  The  tenant  wears 
the  soil  out  with  his  one  crop,  his  one-year  lease,  for 
his  only  concern  is  to  secure  a  large  yield.  He  wears 
himself  and  his  family  out  with  his  inadequate  teams 
and  implements,  and  his  yearly  move.  He  wears  his 
community  out.  He  has  only  a  passing  interest  in  his 
neighborhood.  The  school  and  the  church  can  do  very 
little  for  him  and  his  family,  and  they  can  do  very  little 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  49 

for  the  church  and  school  Some  one  has  well  said  that 
there  is  no  more  fixed  basis  for  human  improvement 
than  private  ownership  of  land.  Resident  white  farm- 
ers who  own  their  lands  and  homes  are  the  hope  of  the 
community  and  the  Negro  farmers  who  own  their  lands 
are  the  hope  of  their  race,  while  a  large  percentage  of 
tenancy  of  either  or  both  is  a  menace  to  community 
growth.  The  average  length  of  tenancy  is  one  and  one 
half  years.  The  percentage  of  tenants  who  move  every 
year  is  52.  Of  the  farmers  in  the  South  48  per  cent, 
are  tenants,  while  the  percentage  in  the  nation  is  37. 
Table  III  will  show  the  tenancy  in  each  state  in  the 
South,  giving  the  number  of  tenants,  the  percentage  of 
tenants  and  the  percentage  of  the  land  in  cultivation 
that  is  actually  tilled  by  tenants.  In  some  states  tenancy 
is  growing.  Tenancy  is  much  greater  in  the  cotton  belt 
than  in  the  grain  belt.  A  larger  percentage  of  the 
farmers  are  white  in  the  grain  belt  than  in  the  cotton 
belt.  It  is  also  true  that  a  larger  percentage  of  the 
white  farmers  are  owners  in  the  grain  belt  than  in  the 
cotton  belt.  But  tenancy  in  all  sections  and  states  is 
rapidly  becoming  a  menace  to  economic,  social,  educa- 
tional, and  religious  progress. 

Absentee  Landlordism.  England  and  Ireland  should 
be  warnings  to  the  United  States  against  absentee  land- 
lordism. But  the  plantation  system  of  to-day  wherever 
it  is  found  in  the  South  is  a  system  of  tenancy  and 
absentee  landlordism  in  almost  every  case.  The  most 
alarming  condition  is  that  of  the  moving  to  town  and 
city  of  the  owners  of  farms  who  have  been  successful 


50  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

in  accumulating  a  competency  and  who  hence  seek  the 
towns  and  cities  because  of  the  advantages,  conven- 
iences, and  social  life  which  their  families  did  not  have 
in  the  country.  In  one  county-seat  in  Texas  a  resident 
remarked  recently,  that  fully  sixty  per  cent,  of  the  land- 
owners of  that  county  lived  in  that  town.  When  the 
landowner  leaves  his  farm,  there  will  be  much  soil 
deterioration  and  no  soil  building,  there  will  be  de- 
terioration in  the  farmhouses  and  barns,  the  schools 
and  churches  will  be  weakened,  and  community  life  will 
lose  its  leaders.  If  all  the  landowners  of  the  South 
were  now  on  their  farms,  and  would  give  themselves  to 
building  the  social,  intellectual,  recreational,  moral,  and 
religious  life  which  they  and  their  families  now  enjoy, 
while  their  tenants  are  without  them,  and  without  the 
means  of  securing  them,  the  problem  of  the  country 
life  would  be  nigh  solution.  If  the  absentee  land- 
owners will  not  return  to  the  soil  nor  employ  the  means 
which  they  can  command  for  restoring  or  establishing 
the  proper  conditions  for  a  beautiful  uplifting  and  satis- 
fying country  life,  why  may  they  not  dispose  of  their 
lands  to  those  who  will  give  their  lives  to  the  country? 
The  lands  should  be  in  the  hands  of  those  who  will 
live  on  them,  and  absentee  landlordism  should  be  dis- 
couraged, discredited,  and  discontinued.  This  can  be 
brought  about  only  by  an  increasing  and  ever-persistent 
emphasis  on  the  meaning,  purpose,  and  program  of  a 
genuine  country  life,  with  all  the  facilities  for  economic, 
intellectual,  moral,  and  religious  development. 
Remedies.  How  to  build  up  and  organize  country 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  51 

life  in  the  face  of  all  the  drawbacks  and  menacing 
perils  is  the  great  question  before  the  South.  One  thing 
seems  clear,  the  leadership  for  the  country  must  be  of 
the  country  and  in  the  countrymen.  In  the  old  South 
there  were  steps  leading  directly  from  the  soil  to  distinc- 
tion among  men,  and  that  should  be  true  in  the  new 
South.  But  then  the  college  graduate  was  on  the  soil, 
and  not  considered  "buried"  as  to-day.  The  choice 
young  men  have  been  educated  away  from  the  farm 
instead  of  for  the  farm.  The  call  to-day  is  for  the 
support  of  educational  and  religious  authorities  in  pre- 
paring leaders  for  the  country.  Dr.  A.  P.  Bourland  has 
summed  up  the  following  fundamental  principles :  "The 
organization  and  upbuilding  of  rural  life  must  be  the 
outgrowth  of  the  self-activity  of  rural  life  forces. 
Outside  forces  can  only  assist  in  this  work.  There  is 
a  need  of  raising  the  general  level  of  living  in  the 
country  in  order  to  keep  the  brightest  and  best  young 
people  from  leaving  in  great  numbers.  To  educate 
the  young  in  the  schools,  to  elevate  their  ideals,  to 
arouse  their  ambitions  without  raising  the  level  of  liv- 
ing and  offering  them  a  broader  field  for  the  exercise 
of  their  talents  may  do  as  much  harm  as  good.  There 
must  be  cooperation  among  the  rural  life  forces.  The 
farmer,  the  country  woman,  the  country  teacher,  the 
country  editor,  the  country  physician,  the  country  bus- 
iness man,  and  the  country  preacher  shall  and  must  join 
hands  for  a  long  hard  pull  for  better  living  along  every 
line  in  the  country.  The  community  must  learn  how 
to  educate,  to  organize,  and  to  develop  itself."  With 


52  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

these  principles  constantly  in  mind  the  leaders  .in  the  - 
country  life  movement  may  speedily  bring  in  a  new  era 
on  the  farm. 

The  Rural  School.  The  rural  school  in  the  South  has 
been  poor,  conducted  in  a  one-room  house  with  an 
average  value  of  about  $675,  with  inadequate  facilities, 
and  a  meagerly  trained  and  inexperienced  teacher  who 
in  most  cases  was  making  a  makeshift  of  teaching. 
Seventy-five  per  cent,  of  the  teachers  have  had  no  other 
training  than  that  given  in  the  common  schools.  The 
school  has  a  new  teacher  nearly  every  year.  Surveys 
have  shown  that  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  the  teachers 
are  in  new  positions  every  year,  sixteen  per  cent,  return 
for  the  second  year,  and  only  eight  per  cent,  for  the 
third  year  or  longer.  Three  fourths  of  the  teachers' 
board,  and  hence  come  from  other  sections.  One 
fourth  of  them  are  under  twenty  years  of  age.  From 
fifty  to  eighty  per  cent,  of  them  according  to  the  state 
are  young  women.  They  hear  from  twenty. to  forty 
recitations  a  day.  Is  it  any  surprise  that  one  has  said, 
"The  schools  with  their  present  course  of  study  have 
been  our  most  efficient  means  for  depopulating  the  rural 
districts"?  Each  year  about  one  fourth  of  the  school 
population  are  not  enrolled  in  any  school.  The  aver- 
age length  of  term  is  five  and  one  half  months  and 
only  about  twenty-three  per  cent,  of  the  school  popula- 
tion attend  for  the  full  term,  forty-four  per  cent,  one 
half  of  the  term,  and  thirty-three  per  cent,  for  one 
fourth.  These,  facts  are  alarming.  They  have  awak- 
fcned  the  state  and  national  school  authorities,  and 


COUNTRY   SCHOOLS 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  53 

they  have  inaugurated  vigorous  campaigns  in  behalf 
of  the  rural  school.  Rural  school  supervisors  have 
been  appointed  in  every  Southern  state,  and  they 
are  diligently  stirring  up  interest,  and  directing  county 
superintendents  in  the  best  plans  for  developing  a  com- 
petent school  system  for  which  the  teacher  shall  be  ade- 
quately qualified.  The  new  farm  school  calls  for  a  new 
kind  of  teacher,  professionally  trained,  who  shall  under- 
stand the  difficult  problems  of  the  present  day,  who  shall 
have  a  proper  conception  of  country  life  and  be  willing 
to  live  it  in  the  midst  of  the  country  community.  Such 
teachers  should  be  community  leaders,  and  competent 
for  modern  rural  school  organization  and  administra- 
tion. This  calls  for  the  training  of  the  untrained 
teachers  now  in  the  country  schools  by  institutes, 
summer  schools,  reading  circles,  and  demonstration 
schools. 

The  Farmer's  Church.  The  farmer's  church  in  all 
parts  of  the  nation  is  undergoing  inspection,  criticism, 
and  reappraisement.  It  is  yet  to  be  seen  whether  it  is 
as  badly  off  as  the  critics  claim,  or  even  as  the  survey 
makers  may  be  inclined  to  indicate.  The  country 
church  in  the  South  has  been  and  is  a  power  for  right- 
eousness. With  all  its  deficiencies  it  has  produced 
strong  moral  character  in  the  citizenship;  it  has  stood 
for  integrity  in  public  and  private  life,  carried  forward 
reforms  with  a  vigor  and  a  conscientiousness  unknown 
in  the  cities,  and  given  leaders  to  the  great  professions 
and  the  commanding  commercial  enterprises.  Such  a 
record  is  not  to  be  despised  or  even  lightly  regarded.  It 


54  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

is  not  to  be  accounted  for  in  any  other  way  than  that 
the  country  has  had  a  preaching  ministry  that  knew  pro- 
foundly certain  great  Christian  doctrines,  proclaimed 
them  with  conviction  and  frequently  with  vehemence, 
and  supported  them  by  an  undeniable  personal  Chris- 
tian experience.  There  has  been  in  the  South  very  little 
diluting  of  the  gospel  as  set  forth  by  orthodox  theo- 
logians. Sin  and  salvation  have  been  made  real  by  the 
pulpit.  The  field  of  the  preachers'  discourses  has  been 
limited,  but  the  country  people  were  brought  by  them 
to  see  very  clearly  the  line  between  the  godly  and  the 
ungodly,  the  worldly  and  the  heavenly.  While  this  has 
produced  a  strong  religious  individualism,  it  has  failed 
to  develop  the  social  aspects  of  Christianity  which  are 
essential  to  a  thoroughly  Christian  life.  It  is  also  true 
that  the  growth  of  the  towns  and  cities  has  drawn 
heavily  upon  the  country  for  the  kind  of  men  that  made 
the  former  country  church  vital.  The  denominations 
have  not  had  a  sufficient  ministerial  supply  to  take 
proper  care  of  the  country  after  meeting  the  more 
insistent  demands  of  the  towns  and  cities.  As  a  result, 
the  country  church  to-day  is  not  rendering  the  religious 
service  to  the  people  which  it  rendered  aforetime. 
Whether  in  reality  or  not,  in  comparison  with  the  town 
church,  the  country  church  shows  deterioration.  The 
church  house — too  frequently  unpretentious,  often 
unpainted,  shell-like  frame  and  rudely  seated — is  not 
inviting  and  by  no  means  elevating.  Such  is  not  gen- 
erally true  in  the  town.  At  least  ninety-five  per  cent, 
of  the  country  churches  do  not  have  weekly  preaching 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  55 

services.  The  preacher  generally  comes  on  Saturday, 
preaches  two  sermons  on  Sunday,  and  leaves  Monday 
to  return  two  weeks  or  a  month  later.  In  town  it  is 
different,  for  the  services  are  held  more  frequently, 
and  even  the  country  preacher  resides  there.  While 
eighty-five  per  cent,  of  the  churches  have  Sunday- 
schools,  yet  seventy-five  per  cent,  of  the  school  popula- 
tion is  never  in  them.  Young  people's  societies, 
women's  societies,  and  men's  organizations  are  few  and 
not  highly  efficient.  The  churches  are  practically  with- 
out social  activities.  But  the  leaders  of  all  the  religious 
denominations  are  awake  to  the  meaning  of  these  facts 
and  they  are  putting  forth  worthy  efforts  to  reinvigor- 
ate  and  reempower  the  country  church,  not  only  for  the 
old  service,  but  for  that  which  is  now  demanded  by  the 
new  program  of  rural  reconstruction.  Excessive  rural 
migration,  increased  exodus  of  bright  young  men  and 
women  and  retired  farmers  to  the  towns  and  cities,  the 
growth  of  tenantry,  and  the  abandonment  of  many 
country  churches  have  awakened  our  public  economic, 
philanthropic,  educational,  and  ecclesiastical  leaders  to 
the  necessity  of  a  campaign  for  rural  progress  and  an 
effort  to  effectualize  rural  society.  The  most  frequently 
discussed  topic  at  commercial  congresses,  bankers'  con- 
ventions, and  educational  associations  is  agriculture  or 
country  life.  Scientific  farming,  demonstration  farms, 
good  roads,  consolidated  or  centralized  country  schools, 
social  and  intellectual  centers  in  the  country,  and  invit- 
ing and  satisfying  country  life  are  being  not  only  seri- 
ously discussed  but  attempted  by  leaders  in  many  sec- 


56  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

tions.  It  is  all  but  universally  believed  that  the  church 
is  an  essential  instrument  and  agent  in  solving  the  rural 
problem. 

SOME  QUESTIONS  TO  BE  SERIOUSLY  CONSIDERED 

(1)  The  country  Church  faces  a  crisis.    Has  it  the 
power  for  the  new  demand? 

(2)  A  clear  and  high  ideal  for  rural  community  life 
must  be  developed  and  maintained.     Can  the  Church 
perform  that  task? 

(3)  Has  it  a  program  of  work  for  its  neighborhood 
that  presents  a  really  live  attack  on  the  essential  prob- 
lems of  rural  civilization? 

(4)  What  can  the  Church  and  its  ministry  do  to  min- 
ister to  the  social  and  economic  needs  of  all  the  country 
people  ? 

(5)  Do  the  churches  of  the  United  States,  and  can 
they  under  their  present  methods,  give  adequate  relig- 
ious instruction  and  inspiration  to  the  forty  million 
Americans  who  live  on  the  farm  ? 

(6)  Is  the  present  country  ministry  equipped  for 
leadership  in  the  country  life  and  thought,  to  bring  the 
rural  school  out  of  its  incompetency  and  chaos,  and  to 
make  the  country  church  a  genuine  social,  intellectual, 
and  religious  center? 

SOME  URGENT  NEEDS 

( i )  A  study  of  the  country  Church  problem  by  the 
seminaries  and  Church  organizations. 


NEW  ERA  ON  THE  FARM  57 

(2)  A  movement   for  the   special  preparation  of 
young  men  for  lifelong  service  in  a  country  parish. 

(3)  A  more  useful  country  Church,  a  Church  that 
takes  part  in  the  activities  of  the  community. 

(4)  More    cooperation    among    denominations    in 
country  communities. 

(5)The  development  of  lay  leadership.  A  group  of 
laymen  who  know  the  large  rural  problem,  who  under- 
stand the  elements  of  its  solution,  who  appreciate  the 
real  place  of  the  Church  and  love  its  altars,  and  who 
will  assist  in  developing  the  economic,  social,  and  relig- 
ious life  of  the  community. 

(6)  The  Church  needs  in  its  leadership,  according  to 
Professor  Butterfield,  men  of  vision,  practical  men, 
original  men,  aggressive  men,  trained  men,  men  with 
enthusiasm,  persistent  men,  constructive  men,  heroic 
men. 

SOME  FIRST  THINGS 

1 I )  A  living  wage  or  minimum  salary  for  the  min- 
ister.    Local  church  boards  should  be  informed  by 
conferences,  synods,  associations,  and  conventions  what 
is  expected  as  a  minimum  support  for  a  country  min- 
ister.   The  men  who  can  do  what  the  country  Church 
now  requires  must  have  a  competent  support. 

(2)  The  organization  and  reorganization  of  circuits 
and  pastorates  so  as  to  insure  an  adequate  financial  sup- 
port of  the  preacher  in  charge. 

(3)  The  use  of  junior  preachers  in  large  circuits  and 


58  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

pastorates  where  they  may  have  the  direction  of  trained 
and  experienced  senior  preachers. 

(4)  The  use  of  an  unpaid  ministry,  as  that  of  local 
preachers  and  lay  helpers,  to  insure  public  worship 
wherever  needed.     These  are  to  serve  without  pay, 
except  for  expenses,  under  the  direction  of  the  preacher 
in  charge. 

(5)  The  adoption  and  use  of  an  adequate  financial 
system  in  the  country. 


CHAPTER  III 
INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT 

I.  Introduction 

Place  of  Manufacture.  The  South  will  always  be  a 
great  agricultural  country  because  of  its  natural  re- 
sources, climate,  and  location.  Agriculture  is  the  real 
wealth-producing  occupation  of  the  human  race  and 
can  never  be  discontinued  or  even  slightly  neglected, 
for  without  it  the  race  can  be  neither  fed  nor  clothed. 
But  agriculture  alone  will  leave  man  bound  in  narrow 
confines,  helpless  before  the  great  tasks  of  civilization, 
and  hindered  in  the  accomplishment  of  the  highest 
ambitions  of  his  mind  and  spirit.  The  rude  raw  mate- 
rials, fresh  from  the  lap  of  nature,  must  be  fashioned 
by  the  ingenuity  and  skill  of  man  before  they  come  to 
their  highest  value  and  usefulness.  The  ore  from  the 
mines  is  worthless  until  passed  through  the  required 
processes  which  shall  change  it  into  an  adjustable  and 
dependable  and  useful  metal.  The  stones  in  the  quarry 
must  be  chiseled  into  shape  by  man's  designs  before 
they  can  go  into  palaces  and  cathedrals.  The  wool 
from  the  sheep's  back,  the  thread  from  the  cocoon,  the 
lint  from  the  cotton  boll,  the  raw  hides  from  the 
slaughter-pen,  and  whatever  comes  fresh  from  the 

59 


6o  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

fields  would  be  of  little  value  to  man  without  that  work- 
ing over  which  is  called  manufacture.  Such  an  occu- 
pation is  the  complement  and  companion  of  agriculture, 
it  should  always  be  considered  as  such,  and  whenever 
possible  the  two  may  well  be  carried  on  side  by  side. 

Facilities.  There  is  no  section  of  the  United  States 
that  offers  greater  inducements  to  manufacture,  espe- 
cially of  certain  products,  than  the  South.  Its  raw 
materials  of  cotton,  iron,  zinc,  lead,  wood,  wool, 
leather,  in  abundance,  with  coal,  petroleum,  lubricating 
oils,  in  unlimited  quantities,  and  fine  and  strong-flowing 
streams,  to  produce  all  needed  power  at  the  minimum 
cost,  constitute  favorable  conditions  found  nowhere  else 
in  America  or  even  in  the  world.  It  is  true  that  ship- 
ping facilities  and  large*  markets  in  the  South  are  not 
equal  to  those  which  have  been  built  up  in  the  North 
and  East,  but  with  the  demand  which  large  manu- 
factures would  make  they  would  readily  be  provided. 
While  shipping  and  markets  encourage  manufacture, 
it  is  just  as  true  that  manufacture,  vigorous,  strong, 
and  voluminous,  will  bring  the  markets  and  develop  the 
shipping,  especially  as  the  natural  provisions  for  great 
harbors  on  the  southeastern  coast  and  the  Mexican  gulf 
are  abundant. 

Developing  Manufactures.  Manufacture  became  a 
necessity  in  the  New  England  colonies  because  of  the 
unfriendliness  of  the  climate  and  the  niggardliness  of 
the  soil  toward  agriculture.  Short  seasons  and  poor 
crops  became  a  physical  embarrassment,  and  the  laws 
of  self  preservation  soon  set  human  ingenuity  to  devis- 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  61 

ing  new  means  of  a  livelihood.  The  necessity  for 
indoor  employment  opened  the  way  for  attention  to 
manufacture.  In  the  Southern  colonies  it  was  alto- 
gether different.  The  seasons  were  long,  the  crops 
were  luxuriant,  the  climate  made  the  outdoors  a  delight 
and  the  in'side  employment  during  much  of  the  year  a 
burden.  The  foreign  markets  for  the  South's  staples 
brought  wealth  to  the  planters,  and  gave  them  ready 
and  cheap  access  to  food,  household  supplies,  and  to 
all  needed  manufactured  articles.  Man  usually  finds 
and  follows  the  channel  which  necessity  and  conditions 
make  for  him.  The  New  England  region  became  neces- 
sarily a  great  manufacturing  section,  while  the  South 
with  its  limitless  domain,  superb  fertility,  and  gratify- 
ing harvests,  became  very  naturally  an  agricultural 
section.  In  the  South  the  Negro  soon  became  the  chief 
laborer  for  the  man  of  wealth.  He  was  utterly  incap- 
able of  handling  any  machinery,  at  least  any  but  the 
simplest  implements.  This  is  true  even  to-day. 
Labor  for  manufactures  must  be  white  labor.  But 
colonial  conditions  have  passed  away.  Steam,  elec- 
tricity, and  the  new  machinery  have  made  indoor  labor 
in  the  South  as  comfortable  as  in  the  North.  White 
labor  is  now  plentiful  and  as  easily  obtained  in  the 
South  as  elsewhere.  The  sentiment  is  no  longer  wholly 
for  agriculture;  on  the  other  hand,  it  is  fast  develop- 
ing in  favor  of  putting  manufacture  on  a  par  with 
agriculture,  that  the  country  may  meet  all  its  own  needs 
and  aid  in  supplying  the  needs  of  other  sections  and 
nations. 


62  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

Factory  Community.  The  factory  builds  about 
itself  a  community  with  its  own  peculiar  characteristics, 
manner  of  life,  and  social  needs.  Educationally,  mor- 
ally, and  religiously  it  must  receive  treatment  suited  to 
those  needs.  The  factory  develops  an  altogether  differ- 
ent state  of  society  to  that  found  on  the  farm.  Indi- 
vidualism has  always  been  the  outstanding  character- 
istic of  farm  life,  but  in  the  factory  the  social  and 
cooperative  element  is  essential  to  achievement.  The 
school  and  the  Church  to  accomplish  their  righteous 
purposes  are  compelled  to  carry  out  a  social  program  in 
all  factory  districts.  The  factory  community  must  be 
inspired  to  community  service,  if  morals  and  religion 
are  to  become  significant  and  vital  to  the  factory  people. 
The  development  of  manufacture  throughout  the  South 
with  its  multiplied  industries  will  produce  communities 
in  towns  and  cities  which  will  be  revolutionary  in  the 
life  of  the  South,  because  of  the  spirit  which  they  will 
introduce,  the  new  economic  attitude  which  they  will 
create,  and  the  requirements  which  they  will  make  upon 
the  political,  educational,  social,  and  religious  leaders. 
Already  the  factory  community  wherever  it  has  been 
found  is  being  discussed  as  a  problem,  social  and  relig- 
ious. The  Church  must  make  full  preparations  for 
meeting  the  issues  which  manufacturing  will  inevi- 
tably very  soon  bring. 

Mining  Community.  All  that  has  been  said  in  regard 
to  the  characteristics  and  needs  of  the  factory  com- 
munity may  be  repeated  for  the  mining  community, 
except  that  the  difficulties  are  more  numerous  and  more 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  63 

obstinate.  The  coal-fields  and  the  oil-well  districts  now 
open  in  the  South  are  perplexing  the  missionary  leaders 
of  the  churches.  When  the  mining  operations  are  mul- 
tiplied many  fold,  as  they  are  sure  to  be,  there  will  be 
cause  for  alarm  if  the  churches  and  their  allies  do 
not  mobilize  their  forces  and  enter  upon  a  great  cooper- 
ative campaign  in  the  name  of  common  humanity  and 
genuine  Christianity.  Any  excuse  or  claim  that  the 
Church  is  not  called  to  any  service  except  the  preaching 
of  the  gospel  theologically  interpreted,  may  be  satis- 
factory to  some  good  people,  but  the  world  of  to-day 
which  the  gospel  of  Jesus  Christ  is  given  to  save,  will 
not  hear  such  a  claim.  An  increase  in  mining  activities 
which  is  now  evident  will  call  louder  and  louder  to  the 
Church  for  a  regime,  a  message,  and  a  service  which 
will  be  testing,  reconstructing,  and  eventually  glorify- 
ing. 

2.  Mines  and  Mining 

Mineral  Products.  The  value  of  the  mineral  pro- 
ducts of  the  South  in  1911  was  $371,372,876,  or  one_ 
fifth  of  that  produced  by  the  United  States,  notwith- 
standing the  large  production  of  gold,  silver,  and  copper 
in  the  Western  States.  Of  the  fifty-seven  useful  min- 
erals mined  in  the  United  States,  all  except  borax  and 
platinum,  are  produced  in  the  South,  while  nine,  includ- 
ing phosphate  rock,  tin,  sulphur,  fuller's  earth,  man- 
ganese, pyrite,  and  nearly  all  the  mica,  are  produced 
nowhere  else.  As  a  general  rule  the  South  produced 
more  of  each  commodity  than  was  required  for  home 


64  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

consumption  in  its  crude  state,  but  its  folly  came  in 
exporting  the  raw  materials  to  be  fashioned  by  manu- 
facturing industries  and  then  returned.  The  South 
has  produced  22  per  cent,  of  the  bituminous  coal  of  the 
United  States,  28.  i  per  cent,  of  the  petroleum,  74.  i  per 
cent,  of  the  lead  and  zinc  and  12.6  per  cent,  of  the  pig 
iron  output.  Appendix  B  shows  the  value  of  the  mineral 
output  in  the  various  states  in  1911  and  the  increase  in 
these  products  from  1880  to  1910. 

Will  Mining  Continue?  Mr.  Edwin  C.  Eckel,  the 
Mining  Geologist  of  the  federal  government,  estimates 
that  the  total  iron  ore  deposits  in  the  Southern  States 
are  about  2,600,000,000  tons,  of  which  at  least  one 
third  are  now  available.  The  increased  and  increasing 
importance  of  the  .steel  industry  will  insure  the  contin- 
uation of  the  mining  of  iron  until  the  large  proportion 
of  these  great  deposits  shall  have  been  exhausted.  Mr. 
M.  R.  Campbell  of  the  United  States  Geological  Survey 
published  in  1908  a  map  of  the  coal  areas  of  the  United 
States  which  shows  that  the  known  coal  fields  of  the 
Southern  States  aggregate  about  88,000  square  miles, 
with  an  additional  10,000  to  12,000  square  miles  about 
which  little  is  known  but  which  are  believed  to  contain 
workable  coal.  These  estimates  do  not  include  over 
80,000  square  miles  of  territory,  in  Alabama,  Mis- 
sissippi, Louisiana,  Texas,  and  Arkansas,  supposed  to 
contain  workable  lignite,  whose  potentialities  for  the 
future  are  considered  enormous,  but  which  will  prob- 
ably lie  dormant  as  long  as  cheap  true  coals  are  largely 
undeveloped.  The  total  coal  areas  of  all  Europe  are 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT     65 

about  44,000  square  miles.  Europe  has  reduced  her 
supplies  in  the  last  ten  years  four  per  cent.,  while  the 
Southern  States  have  reduced  theirs  two  tenths  of  one 
per  cent.  How  long  before  the  European  fields  will  be 
exhausted  and  the  European  countries  be  compelled  to 
draw  on  the  stored-up  resources  of  the  United  States 
and  China?  Coal  mining  then  in  the  South  will  be  a 
more  extensive  industry  than  it  is  to-day.  Will  the 
South  learn  the  lesson,  before  that  time,  of  using  her 
own  coal  in  developing  the  industries  by  which  her  great 
population  may  be  supported  ? 

The  Miners.  There  were  in  1909,  1,065,283  wage- 
earners  who  labored  in  the  mining  industries  of  the 
United  States,  and  of  these  256,252  were  in  the  South. 
About  ten  per  cent,  are  engaged  in  quarries  and  with 
oil  wells,  leaving  almost  one  million  actual  miners  who 
toil  in  the  depths  of  the  earth,  and  of  these  225,000 
labor  in  the  mines  of  the  South.  They  live  with  their 
families  in  the  little  mining  towns  and  villages  located 
in  many  instances  in  unattractive  portions  of  the  coal 
and  iron  fields,  having  as  a  rule  very  humble  homes 
with  poor  household  furniture  and  conveniences. 
Schools  and  churches  do  not  always  exist  in  the  com- 
munities, but  when  they  do,  the  equipment  and  the  ser- 
vice which  they  render  are  small  in  comparison  with 
.what  the  general  population  of  the  country  demand  and 
get.  The  quarrymen  and  the  oil-well  laborers  are  for 
the  most  part  Americans,  but  the  miners  are  more 
largely  ioreign-born  than  American-born.  The  miners 
are  more  or  less  illiterate ;  they  are  subject  to  the  liquor 


66  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

habit;  they  indulge  frequently  in  rowdyism;  they  are 
usually  migratory.  To  the  managers  they  are  usually 
simply  "hands,"  and  are  valued  by  their  net  income  to 
the  company.  The  people  in  the  community  who  are 
most  capable  of  helping  them  socially,  intellectually, 
morally,  and  religiously  usually  estimate  themselves 
so  high  socially  as  to  make  an  unbridgeable  chasm  be- 
tween themselves  and  the  miners  and  their  families. 
The  miner  has  to  get  his  help  usually  from  his  own 
kind,  or  from  one  sent  in  by  some  humanitarian  or 
religious  organization.  The  million  miners  and  their 
families  in  the  United  States,  with  one  fifth  in  the 
South,  should  cause  Christian  men  and  women  to  stop, 
think,  pray,  and  prepare  to  act. 

j.  Manufactures 

A  New  Era.  The  South,  as  has  been  emphasized, 
was  prior  to  1860  preeminently  an  agricultural  section. 
The  capital  invested  in  manufactures  in  1860  by  the 
Southern  States  was  $159,496,592,  or  15.8  per  cent, 
of  the  total  investment  by  the  United  States.  The  total 
value  of  their  manufactured  products  was  $277,280,409, 
which  was  14.9  per  cent,  of  the  total  amount  produced 
by  the  entire  country.  Tables  IV  and  V,  compiled  from 
the  census  reports  of  1860  and  1910,  will  show  the 
extent  of  manufacturing  in  the  South  fifty  years  ago 
and  at  the  present  time.  Then  the  employees  numbered 
only  180,063  and  could  not  be  said  to  make  up  a  factory 
population,  but  with  1,143,355  persons  now  engaged  as 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  67 

wage  earners  it  is  very  evident  that  factory  commu- 
nities are  being  formed  in  many  places. 

The  amount  of  capital  invested  in  manufactures  in 
1912  according  to  the  Manufacturers'  Record  was  three 
and  a  half  billion  dollars — no  inconsiderable  sum.  The 
value  of  the  manufactured  products  of  the  South  for 
that  year  was  estimated  at  three  billions  nine  hundred 
million  dollars — a  rather  large  amount.  The  South 
in  1909  produced  11.9  per  cent,  of  the  boots  and  shoes 
made  in  this  country,  18.1  per  cent,  of  the  carriages,  21 
per  cent,  of  the  bricks  and  tiles,  14.9  per  cent,  of  the 
pottery,  terra  cotta,  and  clay  products,  84  per  cent,  of 
the  hosiery  and  knit  goods,  37.7  per  cent,  of  the  manu- 
factured ice,  20.2  per  cent,  of  the  coke,  8.8  per  cent, 
of  the  paints  and  varnishes,  64.8  per  cent,  of  the  arti- 
ficial fertilizers,  did  22.6  per  cent  of  the  milling,  14.5 
per  cent,  of  the  canning  and  preserving,  13.4  per 
cent,  of  the  slaughtering  and  meat  packing,  cut  from 
its  own  forests  39  per  cent,  of  the  lumber,  and  pro- 
duced all  the  turpentine  and  rosin  of  the  United  States. 
These  facts  will  show  that  the  Southern  States  have 
entered  upon  the  work  of  manufacturing  with  vigor  and 
with  a  clear  knowledge  of  what  they  may  eventually 
accomplish  in  manufacturing  industries. 

Cotton-mills.  The  South  spins  twice  as  much  cotton 
to-day  as  the  nation  spun  in  1880.  She  had  11,859,000 
spindles  in  1912  and  has  been 'increasing  the  number 
continuously,  having  added  454,804  in  1915.  In  1909 
the  South's  capital  invested  in  cotton-mills  was  about 
nine  hundred  million  dollars.  In  1915  the  new  capital 


68  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

put  into  these  cotton-mills  in  the  cotton-growing  section 
was  $11,370,110,  of  which  $9,101,100  was  for  extend- 
ing the  manufacturing  facilities  of  the  existing  enter- 
prises while  the  remainder  was  for  new  establishments. 
Massachusetts  leads  all  the  states  in  the  number  of 
spindles,  having  in  1910,  7,391,671,  but  South  Caro- 
lina comes  second  with  3,760,891,  North  Carolina 
third  with  2,958,235,  and  Georgia  fourth  with  1,774,- 
'967.  The  South  uses  in  her  mills  more  cotton  than 
all  the  remaining  states.  Massachusetts  in  1910  used 
1,244,614  bales,  North  Carolina  754,483,  South  Caro- 
lina 690,834,  Georgia  529,726.  The  United  States 
consumed  in  the  cotton-mills  about  five  million  bales 
annually.  The  South's  cotton  crop  in  1914  was 
seventeen  million  bales  of  about  five  hundred  pounds 
each.  But  why  should  the  Southern  States,  with 
this  enormous  supply  of  cotton,  with  unlimited  re- 
sources of  water-power,  with  ample  natural  provi- 
sions for  shipping,  continue  to  export  such  a  large 
proportion  of  this  cotton  when  they  can  reap  the  profits 
of  the  manufactured  articles?  This  is  the  question 
which  the  economists  of  the  South  are  asking  them- 
selves, and  the  inevitable  answer  to  the  question  will 
soon  be  such  an  increase  of  cotton-mills,  manufactur- 
ing all  classes  and  grades  of  cotton  fabrics,  as  to  com- 
mand the  attention  of  the  world.  Already  forty-seven 
per  cent,  of  the  nation's  exports  go  from  the  South. 
This  percentage  may  be  greatly  increased  if  the  present 
aggressive  spirit  among  the  various  economic  and  indus- 
trial organizations  continues. 


TYPICAL    COTTON     MILL    VILLAGE 
INTERIOR  OF   COTTON    MILL     ' 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  69 

Factory  Communities.  Forty  per  cent,  of  the  cotton- 
mill  operatives  of  the  United  States  are  employed  in  the 
six  hundred  cotton-mills  of  the  South.  These  one  hun- 
dred and  forty-five  thousand  wage-earners  represent 
six  to  seven  hundred  thousand  persons,  who  live  for  the 
most  part  in  factory  communities.  The  houses  in 
which  they  li\  :  have  been,  as  a  rule,  built  by  the  company 
that  owns  the  mill  in  which  they  labor.  They  are  plain, 
with  the  same  pattern  and  color  as  those  in  which  their 
neighbors  live.  The  same  may  be  said  of  the  tobacco 
factories  and  their  employees,  who  with  their  families 
number  about  two  hundred  thousand  persons.  The 
factory  population  of  the  South  who  live  in  the  segre- 
gated factory  communities  of  the  towns  and  cities  can- 
not be  less  than  one  million  to  a  million  and  a  half  per- 
sons, and  the  number  is  rapidly  increasing  because  of 
the  fact  that  the  growing  manufactures  are  those  that 
create  factory  communities. 

Factory  People.  The  cotton-mill  operatives  are 
almost  entirely  native-born  white  people,  the  most  of 
whom  were  reared  in  the  hill  and  mountain  sections  of 
the  states  in  which  the  mills  are  located.  They  come 
with  the  poverty,  the  illiteracy,  and  the  generally  belated 
condition  of  life  which  characterize  the  inhabitants  of 
the  hidden  recesses  of  the  Southern  mountains.  They 
are  transferring  to  the  factory  communities  the  moral, 
educational,  and  religious  problems  which  the  churches 
have  heretofore  had  in  the  hills,  except  here  there  are 
added  the  obstacles  which  social  relations  in  such  com- 
munities usually  produce.  There  is  a  possibility  that 


70  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

the  coming  of  the  hill  people  to  the  light  of  social  civil- 
ization may  open  the  way  for  the  going  into  the  hills  of 
the  influences  which  will  greatly  illuminate  and  stimu- 
late the  people  who  remain  there.  Where  the  mills  are 
located  in  the  plains  the  operatives  come  largely  from 
the  populations  of  the  respective  communities  and  are 
not  greatly  different  from  those  coming  from  the  hills. 
The  factory  community  thus  constituted  will  require 
numerous  and  effective  means  of  mental,  moral,  social, 
and  religious  uplift,  which  the  church  and  her  allies 
should  diligently,  sympathetically,  and  vigorously  pro- 
mote. The  school  and  the  church  are  the  primary 
forces  for  these  communities,  but  they  will  be  called 
upon  for  community  service  as  a  part  of  their  work. 

'The  recreational  instinct  needs  direction,  the  cultural 
life  needs  stimulation,  the  moral  nature  needs  awaken- 
ing and  sensitizing,  the  religious  faith  needs  clarifica- 
tion, cultivation,  and  stabilization.  There  are  many 
valuable  things  which  social  workers  may  do  in  build- 
ing up  home  life  by  the  domestic  arts  and  economics, 
in  purifying  and  strengthening  physical  life  by  sanita- 
tion, exercise,  and  health  preservatives,  and  in  enlarg- 
ing the  community  life  by  joy-giving  recreations,  cul- 
tural entertainments,  and  in  cooperative  endeavors ;  but 
the  two  great  citadels  of  the  human  being  are  the  mind 
and  heart.  They  must  be  taken  for  intelligence  and 
righteousness  or  all  else  will  have  only  a  passing  value ; 
but  with  this  achieved  the  rest  will  become  the  golden 
I  fruitage.  The  schoolhouse  and  the  church  must  be 
central  in  thought  and  effort  for  the  factory  people,  but 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT     71 

the  success  of  these  may  depend  upon,  or  if  not,  will  call 
for,  the  expressional  forces  of  humanity  and  Chris- 
tianity. These  may  require  adequate  institutions  as 
well  as  trained  workers  in  order  to  accomplish  the  high 
purposes  of  the  Church.  Deaconesses,  Bible  visitors, 
community  nurses,  public  dispensaries  and  clinics, 
recreational  and  social  halls  may  be  necessities  in  cer- 
tain communities.  If  so,  they  should  be  provided 
through  the  cooperation  of  the  church  and  its  allies  with 
the  factory  proprietors  and  the  people  who  are  benefited 
by  the  factory.  But  it  should  always  be  true  that  the 
school-teacher  and  the  preacher  are  the  two  outstanding 
leaders  and  directors  in  all  the  work  of  the  factory  com- 
munity. If  they  are  competent,  stalwart,  vigorous,  and 
aflame  with  the  Christ-passion,  their  leadership  will 
be  readily  acknowledged  and  followed.  The  great  need 
in  such  communities  is  the  preacher  who  knows  what 
to  do  and  is  able  and  willing  to  do  it. 

Outdoor  Industries.  There  is  a  large  number  of 
laborers  engaged  in  industries  which  allow  them  to 
live  for  the  greater  part  of  the  year  under  normal  con- 
ditions and  in  places  of  their  own  choosing.  Such  for 
instance  are  the  forty  thousand  persons  engaged  in 
the  production  of  turpentine  and  rosin,  the  several 
thousand  who  are  employed  in  the  petroleum  and 
natural  gas  industry,  the  ten  to  twelve  thousand  who 
labor  in  quarries  for  granite  building-stone  and  phos- 
phate rock.  The  South  however  has  360,000  laborers 
in  lumber  camps,  or  more  than  one  half  of  all  such 
laborers  in  the  United  States.  Many  of  these  men 


72  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

and  their  families  have  ample  opportunities  for  mental 
and  religious  cultivation,  but  there  are  large  numbers 
who  are  denied  these  privileges.  The  logging-camp  and 
the  sawmill  station  are  usually  looked  upon  as  tempo- 
rary affairs,  but  it  is  frequently  forgotten  that  these 
same  laborers  move  to  the  next  camp  and  mill,  where 
similar  conditions  prevail.  The  missionary  labors  of 
the  church  for  this  great  company  of  able-bodied 
lumbermen  have  not  been  commensurate  with  the  im- 
portance of  the  industry  nor  the  social,  intellectual, 
moral,  or  religious,  needs  of  those  employed.  For  such 
social  and  religious  service  strong  manhood,  high 
motives,  good  common  sense,  and  an  attractive  and 
commanding  personality  are  essential. 

Foreign  Laborers.  The  cigarmakers  in  the  South 
are  largely  Italians  and  Cubans.  In  Florida  alone 
about  13,000  of  these  Latins  rre  engaged,  and  they 
have  formed  large  colonies,  especially  in  Tampa  and 
Key  West.  They  speak  their  native  tongue  almost 
exclusively  and  make  very  little  effort  to  learn  the  Eng- 
lish language.  In  the  factories  they  have  readers 
employed  who  read  such  books  and  periodicals  as  they 
through  a  committee  may  choose.  Through  these  books 
frequently  their  minds  are  poisoned  against  the  church 
and  state  and  the  noble  things  of  life.  They  present 
great  difficulties  for  Christian  workers  who  endeavor 
to  reach  them  with  the  gospel ;  but  their  moral  and  relig- 
ious needs,  consequent  upon  their  skepticism,  agnos- 
ticism, and  immorality,  will  allow  no  hesitation,  but 
demand  increased  effort  to  accomplish  the  purpose  of 


IN   THE   COTTON    FIELDS 
TYPICAL    COTTON    MILL 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  73 

Christianity.  The  packing-house  communities  in  Texas 
and  Missouri  present  something  of  the  same  difficulties, 
as  many  of  the  laborers  are  foreigners,  but  mostly  of 
the  Slavic  and  Teutonic  type.  The  sponge  fishers  of 
Florida  are  Greeks.  The  laborers  in  the  oyster  indus- 
tries along  the  Gulf  coast  are  of  various  nationalities, 
but  mostly  Latins.  None  of  these  foreign-speaking 
peoples  engaged  in  disconnected  industries  are  receiv- 
ing any  adequate  attention,  and  those  in  the  factory 
communities  give  evidence  of  moral  and  religious 
neglect. 

A  Puzzling  Question.  During  a  decade  from  1899 
to  1909  eleven  of  the  sixteen  Southern  States  increased 
the  value  of  their  manufactured  products  over  that  of 
the  preceding  decade  by  more  than  one  hundred  per 
cent,  and  three  went  far  above  one  hundred  and  fifty 
per  cent.,  while  only  two  Northern  States  went  to  one 
hundred  per  cent.  The  industries  of  the  South  will 
continue  to  multiply,  the  capital  invested  will  probably 
grow  at  an  enormous  rate.  The  call  for  labor  will 
become  more  insistent.  What  will  be  its  source  ?  Shall 
the  farms  be  more  and  more  depopulated  in  order  to 
meet  the  industrial  demands?  The  purpose  of  the 
country  life  movement  is  to  forestall  that  possibility. 
Shall  the  laborers  be  brought  from  the  Northern  States, 
or  shall  increased  efforts  be  made  to  depopulate  Europe 
and  thereby  fill  the  industries  of  the  South  with  foreign 
immigrants  as  has  been  done  in  the  North  ?  The  former 
is  more  desirable  but  the  latter  is  the  more  probable. 
The  Southern  Settlement  and  Development  Organiza- 


74  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

tion  of  which  mention  has  been  made1  was  formed  for 
the  avowed  purpose  of  attracting  desirable  immigration 
o  the  South  in  order  to  meet  the  possible  demands  of 
manufacture  as  well  as  agriculture,  and  prior  to  the 
European  war  had  arranged  for  three  lines  of  steam- 
ships from  the  Mediterranean  to  Southern  ports  in 
order  to  deliver  immigrants  directly  to  the  Southern 
States.  The  moral  and  social  responsibility  involved 
in  such  a  procedure  is  tremendous,  and  perhaps  has  not 
received  the  consideration  which  its  gravity  warrants. 
The  South  has  been  a  keen  observer  of  the  social,  eco- 
nomic, and  religious  conditions  which  exist  in  the  indus- 
trial districts  of  the  North,  and  especially  those  which 
have  been  developed  in  connection  with  the  lives  and 
labors  of  the  immigrants.  Industrial  friction,  conflict, 
and  disaster  are  too  often  the  rule,  while  disintegrat- 
ing socialism  and  assertive  anarchy  not  infrequently 
become  the  outspoken  doctrines  of  the  industrial 
workers.  Shall  the  South  invite  that  condition  to  its 
harmonious  industrial  life?  The  leaders  in  almost 
all  the  industrial  uprisings  are  imported,  and  most  of 
the  promulgators  of  seditious  doctrines  are  of  foreign 
growth.  Shall  the  South' s  new  industrialism  be  thus 
led  and  dominated?  If  so,  to  be  industrial  or  not  to 
be  industrial  is  a  puzzling  question. 

The  Religious  Side.  Are  not  the  religious  forces  of 
the  North  bewildered  and  helpless  before  these  unchris- 
tianized  and  un-Americanized  hosts  of  foreign-speak- 
ing industrial  workers?  It  certainly  seems  so.  The 

'Page  20. 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT     75 

task  that  is  now  pressing  upon  the  Northern  Churches 
by  these  new  unrelated  and  unchurched  masses  that 
throng  the  industrial  centers  is  overwhelming.  There 
is  no  task  in  any  other  part  of  the  country  to  be  com- 
pared to  it  in  proportion,  difficulties,  urgency,  and 
extreme  importance  to  the  very  life  of  the  nation.  The 
masses  have  accumulated  so  rapidly,  and  the  assimila- 
tion by  native  Americans  has  been  so  slow  that  the 
immigrants  have  become  in  reality  a  strong  foreign 
element  inimical  to  the  established  Church  life  of  the 
country.  What  can  be  done  in  both  the  North  and  the 
South  to  give  the  people  a  profound  religious  conscious- 
ness which  will  recognize  the  supernatural  in  their  lives 
and  sustain  a  constant  devotion  to  the  holy  things  of 
the  Christian  faith?  They  need  to  be  entertained  and 
instructed  in  various  ways,  forums  should  be  estab- 
lished for  the  unrestricted  discussion  of  religious  and 
social  doctrines,  but  that  is  not  enough.  The  gospel 
must  be  made  to  them  the  power  of  God  unto  their 
salvation,  or  else  the  rest  will  be  of  little  worth.  The 
Saviorhood  of  Jesus  Christ  must  become  to  them  a  per- 
sonal reality.  How  can  this  be  accomplished?  This 
is  the  question  which  the  churches  and  society  face 
when  the  foreign-born  population  becomes  large  enough 
to  form  colonies. 

How  to  Do  It.  Shall  the  work  be  done  in  segregated 
congregations  with  preachers  of  their  own  nationality, 
speaking  their  mother  tongue?  Would  this  not  con- 
tinue the  state  of  hyphenation  which  is  inimical  to  the 
highest  devotion  to  this  country  and  to  the  altruistic 


76  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

efforts  of  a  genuine  evangelization?  The  preacher  of 
their  nationality  speaking  their  mother  tongue  cannot 
interpret  to  them  the  spirit,  purpose,  and  force  of 
American  Christianity.  He  perpetuates  in  their  life 
and  thought  the  Church  and  its  relations  in  the  old 
country,  but  for  the  most  part  that  is  not  sufficient  for 
our  own  land.  The  author  recognizes  and  appreciates 
the  splendid  service  of  many  pastors  thoroughly  Amer- 
ican in  spirit  but  speaking  foreign  languages.  Thor- 
oughgoing patriotism  is  dependent  for  its  purification 
and  support  upon  the  religious  altars  of  a  country, 
and  if  those  altars  be  foreign,  the  patriotism  will  be 
restrained.  How  can  the  gospel  be  preached  in 
America  to  the  immigrant  masses  of  varied  nationality? 
The  day  has  come  when  the  American  churches  with 
their  American  pastors  must  undertake  to  assimilate 
the  foreigners  in  their  communities.  The  social  antip- 
athies and  antagonisms  must  be  removed.  A  band  of 
missionaries  of  the  church-membership,  including  some 
of  its  leading  business  and  professional  people,  must 
prepare  themselves  by  study  and  prayer  for  reaching 
the  foreigners  and  bringing  them  into  the  church.  The 
adult  Bible  classes,  the  Sunday-school,  the  young 
people's  societies,  the  boy  scouts,  and  the  camp  fire  girls, 
by  being  missionary  in  their  activities,  may  become 
most  effective  agencies  for  introducing  the  foreigner 
to  the  Church  life.  The  Church  may  send  out  mission- 
aries to  the  foreigners,  but  little  will  ever  be  done  until 
the  Church  itself  goes  out  to  them  and  bids  them 
come  to  their  Father's  house.  It  is  a  wise  church 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT     77 

that  gives  the  matter  serious  consideration  and  form- 
ulates plans  for  bringing  the  strangers  into  its  fold. 

Racial  Complications.  If  increased  industrialism  in 
the  South  is  to  mean  a  great  body  of  immigrants  in 
all  the  centers  then  numerous  questions  will  come  up 
for  consideration  and  one  is  that  of  racial  relations. 
The  Negro  has  suffered  in  the  North  at  the  hands  of 
labor  organizations  which  have  been  largely  directed 
by  foreign  workmen.  Will  the  increase  of  industrial- 
ism in  the  South  with  the  accompanying  increase  of 
trade  unionism  bring  on  new  conflicts  between  the  white 
and  black  races?  What  may  happen  if  volatile,  ex- 
plosive immigrants  or  stolid,  inconsiderate,  and 
unsympathetic  foreigners  come  in  large  numbers  ?  The 
possible  harassing  racial  complications  have  to  be  con- 
sidered in  any  effort  to  promote  the  building  of  great 
industries  in  the  South  at  the  hands  of  immigrant  labor. 
This  possibility  calls  for  strong  moral  and  religious 
preparedness  in  the  churches  and  in  the  life  of  the 
Southern  people. 

4.  Industrialism  and  the  City 

The  City.  Manufacturers  are  city  builders.  They 
bring  together  large  bodies  of  people  and  create  con- 
gested districts.  The  cities  in  the  North  that  have  had 
large  and  increasing  industries  have  grown  like  magic. 
During  the  last  ten  years  the  Southern  towns  and  cities 
that  have  shown  phenomenal  growth  are  those  where 
large  capital  has  been  invested  in  manufactures.  When 
towns  have  doubled  and  trebled  their  populations,  the 


78  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

census  shows  that  new  industries  have  been  established 
and  old  ones  enlarged  by  the  expenditure  of  large  sums 
of  money.  The  South  has  not  been  a  section  of  large 
cities,  but,  since  cities  are  the  centers  of  wealth  in  this 
new  age,  the  desire  for  big  cities  has  possessed  the 
Southern  States. 

The  city  of  the  old  South  was  not  specially  influen- 
tial in  the  life  of  the  state,  because  the  wealth  of  the 
country  was  on  the  farms  or  plantations.  After  the 
Civil  War  the  city  became  more  and  more  the  assem- 
bling-place of  wealth  and  fine  society.  The  growth  of 
the  Southern  cities  has  been  due  largely  to  the  coming 
in  of  people  from  the  farms  to  engage  in  trade,  in 
the  professions,  and  in  the  vocations  which  a  central- 
ized population  would  require.  With  the  rapid  mate- 
rial development  of  recent  years,  the  city  of  the  South, 
like  the  city  of  the  North,  has  become  a  center  of 
wealth,  commercial  power,  intellectual  potentiality,  and 
social  influence.  The  city  now  sets  the  standards  of 
value,  the  examples  of  fashions,  the  demarcations  of 
social  gradations,  and  the  general  trend  of  economic, 
social,  intellectual,  and  political  life.  The  railroads, 
electric  as  well  as  steam,  are  built  to  aggrandize  a  city 
rather  than  to  develop  the  country.  There  are  many 
"interurban"  but  no  "rural"  electric  lines  and  the  finan- 
cial advantages  of  these  lines  are  greatest  to  the  city. 
In  the  city  vice  is  entrenched,  the  slums  are  most  allur- 
ing and  destructive,  divorce  is  common,  modesty  is  little 
cultivated,  virtue  is  least  protected,  human  wreckage 
is  greatest,  moral  reforms  are  slowest,  political  de- 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  79 

bauchery  is  most  practised,  and  Satan  rules  with  great- 
est power.  The  city  to-day  in  all  the  world  is  the  cita- 
del of  iniquity,  the  watch-tower  of  wealth,  the  fortress 
of  human  power  and  earthly  destiny.  Humanity,  civil- 
ization, and  Christianity  must  win  the  city — and  in  the 
city — if  the  human  race  is  to  be  triumphant  amid  the 
material  and  spiritual  forces  which  are  dominant  in 
this  earthly  life.  The  task  may  be  postponed  but  it  can- 
not be  dismissed. 

Present  Conditions.  The  city  to-day  is  a  perplexity 
to  all  missionary  leaders.  Half  of  the  city  population 
seldom  if  ever  enter  a  church.  Individualism  has  so 
long  characterized  the  spirit  and  activity  of  Protestant 
Christianity  that  unity  of  effort  is  almost  impossible. 
The  denominations  are  self-centered  and  self-assertive 
and  the  congregations  are  largely  independent  and 
mostly  concerned  with  self-promotion  and  self-preser- 
vation. The  minister  is  too  frequently  simply  the  shep- 
herd of  a  flock  and  not  a  commissioned  officer  in  a 
well-trained  Christian  army  that  moves  in  solid  ranks 
for  the  overthrow  of  iniquity  and  the  establishment  of 
righteousness.  There  has  been  little  or  no  unity  of 
effort  in  Christian  propagandist!!.  Even  the  denomina- 
tions are  divided  into  unrelated  squads  and  seldom  act 
in  unison  except  perhaps  occasionally  for  the  support 
of  a  soup  kitchen  or  a  dispensary.  Federated  move- 
ments in  most  cities  have  not  yet  gotten  far  beyond  the 
"survey"  stage.  Surveys  are  valuable  and  necessary 
if  one  would  know  his  bearings,  but  crops  are  the 
desired  results  of  real  work.  The  city  needs  the  gospel 


8o  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

but  only  a  small  part  of  it  is  getting  it.  Much  of  the 
preaching  is  simply  preaching  the  age  rather  than 
preaching  to  the  age.  The  gospel  of  the  first  century 
is  the  gospel  to  save  a  world.  Some  men  do  not  know 
that  God  has  spoken,  or  is  speaking  now.  They  should 
be  told  about  it.  They  ought  to  hear  him.  But  instead 
they  are  listening  to  every  siren's  voice,  chasing  every 
worldly  phantom,  surfeiting  themselves  upon  every 
petty  pleasure,  while  the  morally  and  religiously  desti- 
tute are  multiplying  alarmingly.  If  the  churches  in  our 
cities  are  baffled,  what  can  the  missionaries  hope  to 
accomplish  in  the  cities  of  the  Orient?  The  battle  of 
the  kingdom  of  God  must  be  fought  out  and  won  in 
the  American  city,  and  evangelical  Christianity  is  called 
upon  to  plan  and  enter  upon  a  great,  vigorous,  com- 
prehensive campaign  for  the  achievement  of  this  high- 
est of  all  religious  results. 

The  City  of  the  South.  The  South  has  forty-eight 
cities  with  populations  above  25,000.  Of  these,  thirteen 
I  have  more  than  100,000  and  six  above  250,000.  There 
are  seventy  small  cities  having  10,000  to  25,000  inhab- 
itants. With  the  marvelous  material  growth  it  is  evident 
that  the  South  is  rapidly  developing  the  city  problem, 
and  its  religious  forces  should  at  once  plan  to  give  the 
gospel  to  all  the  people  of  whatever  race  or  nationality. 
The  enormity  of  the  task  and  the  absolute  necessity  of 
cooperative  effort  among  the  denominations  as  far  as 
practicable,  and  especially  among  the  churches  of  the 
same  denomination,  will  appear  to  all.  The  plan  for 
such  a  cooperative  effort  has  not  been  wrought  out  in 


INDUSTRIAL  DEVELOPMENT  81 

any  city,  although  valuable  suggestions  have  been  made 
in  various  quarters.  Des  Moines  has  a  city  board  of 
religious  education  which  employs  a  city  superintendent 
of  religious  education.  If  that  work  is  prosecuted  to  the 
fullest  it  would  mean  the  standardization  of  Sunday- 
schools,  the  production  of  competent  Bible  teachers, 
and  an  enrolment  of  the  children  of  the  city  in  the  Sun- 
day schools.  Atlanta  has  an  interchurch  organization 
of  men  that  rendered  splendid  service  in  eliminating  cer- 
tain evils  and  establishing  homes  for  the  friendless  and 
for  the  unemployed.  Wichita  formed  gospel  teams  that 
went  out  to  near-by  towns  and  held  services.  These 
three  features  of  cooperative  service  and  others  also  are 
needed  in  every  city.  If  the  South  is  to  have  great  cities, 
and  that  is  certain,  the  religious  leaders  must  assume 
with  great  seriousness  the  responsibility  of  making 
them  and  all  the  people  Christian.  That  will  call  for 
hearty  cooperation  through  allied  activities  in  religious 
education,  in  evangelistic  campaigns,  in  social  service 
movements,  and  in  missionary  occupation  of  neglected 
fields.  This  will  be  altogether  possible  under  conse- 
crated, judicious  leadership,  with  an  intelligent  recog- 
nition of  the  real  need  and  a  genuine  heart-passion 
to  do  God's  will  by  the  unevangelized  masses.  If 
the  South  is  to  be  made  Christian  and  kept  Christian, 
the  cities  must  become  great  moral  and  religious  centers 
which  shall  do  for  the  spiritual  world  what  they  are 
doing  for  the  economic  world. 

Summary.     The  present  industrial  development  of 
the  Southern  States  is  almost  without  parallel  in  the 


82  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

history  of  the  world.  The  growth  of  mining  and  manu- 
facturing is  phenomenal,  and  it  is  not  at  the  expense  of 
agriculture  but  is  rather  complementary  to  agriculture. 
The  industrial  era  has  introduced  new  elements  into 
Southern  life  and  will  necessarily  bring  about  gradual 
changes  in  political  views,  mental  attitudes,  social  rela- 
tions, and  moral  and  religious  responsibilities.  The 
homogeneity  of  the  people  which  has  characterized  the 
South  through  the  last  fifty  years  will  be  necessarily 
broken  by  migration  from  the  North  and  immigration 
from  Europe.  The  outstanding  question  is,  Will  the 
dominant  ideals  of  the  South,  brought  down  through 
the  years  from  colonial  days,  be  preserved  in  their 
integrity  and  force,  and  the  South  continue  to  make  its 
distinctive  contribution  to  the  life  and  thought  of  the 
nation,  or  will  these  be  lost  in  the  melting-pot  of  the 
new  population?  The  answer  to  this  question  will 
depend  largely  upon  the  energy,  the  intelligence,  and 
the  force  fulness  with  which  the  moral  and  religious 
factors  act  upon  the  incoming  elements.  If  the  new 
industrialism  and  the  social  conditions  which  it  pro- 
duces be  brought  under  the  direction  of  spiritual  forces, 
not  only  will  the  South  preserve  the  integrity  of  its 
best  civilization  but  it  will  be  able  to  make  an  invalu- 
able contribution  to  the  nation  and  to  the  life  of  the 
world.  Standing  at  the  opening  of  this  new  era,  with 
a  full  consciousness  of  what  will  probably  take  place, 
the  South  is  in  position  to  grip  the  situation  and  to  com- 
mand and  control  it  in  the  interest  of  the  highest  ends 
of  economic,  social,  intellectual,  and  religious  life. 


CHAPTER  IV 

EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  AND 
ACHIEVEMENTS 

I.  Education  before  1861 

The  Southern  Colonists.  The  scattered  condition  of 
the  Southern  colonists  made  public  schools  practically 
impossible.  Education  became  a  private  matter.  The 
planters,  like  their  English  progenitors,  employed  pri- 
vate tutors  or  governesses,  and  when  their  sons  were 
ready  for  college  they  were  usually  sent  to  Europe. 
The  Church  and  the  parish  were  expected  to  look  after 
the  interest  of  the  poor  children,  and  societies  were 
organized  and  small  schools  were  endowed  to  give 
training  to  the  children  whose  parents  were  unable  to 
provide  it.  The  famous  English  preacher,  Rev.  George 
Whitefield,  founded  and  supported  such  a  school  in 
Georgia  which  for  sixty  years  was  a  valuable  agency 
in  the  intellectual  and  moral  advancement  of  that  state. 
Two  of  its  pupils  became  governors.  The  Scotch-Irish 
Presbyterians  brought  with  them  the  educational  inter- 
est and  activity  of  their  mother  country,  and  before  the 
founding  of  Jamestown  had  provided  by  law  for  the 
maintenance  of  a  school  in  every  parish  in  order  that 
every  child  might  have  an  education.  Many  of  the 

83 


84  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

best  schools  of  the  colonial  times  were  established  and 
maintained  by  Scotch-Irish  Presbyterian  ministers  and 
teachers.  In  later  colonial  days  public  interest  brought 
about  the  founding  of  many  academies  in  which  many 
young  men  were  trained  in  classical  learning.  There 
was  no  lack  of  interest  in  education,  as  is  shown  in  the 
fact  that  from  the  earliest  settlement  efforts  were  made 
to  found  schools  and  colleges  in  the  coast  colonies. 

Early  Efforts.  The  Virginia  settlement  as  early  as 
1609  made  plans  for  a  university  at  Henrico,  but  a 
massacre  in  1622  brought  them  to  nought.  In  1660  the 
General  Assembly  took  steps  looking  to  the  founding 
of  a  college  and  passed  a  bill  "that  for  the  advancement 
of  learning,  education  of  youth,  supply  of  the  ministry, 
and  the  promotion  of  piety,  there  be  land  taken  upon 
purchases  for  a  college  and  a  free  school."  In  1693 
the  Rev.  James  Blair  with  a  subscription  in  hand  of 
$12,500  from  the  colonists  secured  the  charter  of 
William  and  Mary's  College  from  the  sovereigns  of 
those  names,  who  gave  $10,000  and  made  a  grant  of 
2,000  acres.  The  school,  which  was  largely  under  the 
control  of  Episcopalians,  supplied  their  most  worthy 
ministry  for  a  long  time  and  was  the  chief  influence  for 
'  culture  for  a  hundred  years.  This  institution  like  all 
others  founded  in  those  early  years  had  for  its  primary 
purpose  the  training  of  ministers,  and  for  its  second 
consideration  the  fitting  of  young  men  for  positions  in 
the  civil  government.  In  North  Carolina  the  first 
settlers,  largely  Scotch-Irish,  built  schools  and  acad- 
emies along  with  their  churches  which  afforded  excel- 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  85 

lent  opportunities  for  classical  training.  In  South 
Carolina,  the  white  settlers,  generally  well-to-do 
planters,  sent  their  sons  to  English  universities.  In 
1785  the  published  list  of  Americans  who  had  been 
admitted  to  the  London  bar  showed  a  total  of  114,  of 
whom  forty-four  were  from  South  Carolina.  During 
the  colonial  period  no  college  was  founded  in  South 
Carolina  but  through  private  schools  the  means  of  edu- 
cation were  within  reach  of  the  large  body  of  the  people. 
But  one  thing  is  true  of  the  schools  in  the  colonies, 
they  developed  men  and  women  who  exhibited  large 
attainments  in  polite  literature  and  a  standard  of  gen- 
eral scholarship  the  equal  of  any  in  the  land.  They 
prepared  brilliant  leaders  for  the  social  and  political 
life  of  the  South  whose  fame  has  not  yet  gone  from 
history. 

Religious  Efforts.  The  first  colleges  were  estab- 
lished largely  through  the  individual  efforts  of  cultured 
ministers,  and  while  not  always  under  definite  ecclesi- 
astical control  they  were  in  very  positive  relationship 
to  the  Church,  and  emphasized  religious  as  well  as  intel- 
lectual training.  Washington  and  Lee  University 
began  as  Augusta  Academy  in  1749  under  the  care  of 
Hanover  Presbytery,  was  changed  in  1779  to  Liberty 
Hall,  to  Washington  Academy  in  1 796,  to  Washington 
College  in  1813,  and  to  its  present  name  in  1871.^ 
Hampden-Sidney,  chartered  in  1783,  still  maintains  its 
historic  connection  with  the  Synod  of  Virginia.  Pres- 
byterian ministers  founded  the  following  schools:  at 
Maryville,  Tennessee  (1819),  which  is  still  active;  near 


86  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

Nashville  the  Davidson  College  (1785),  which  became 
the  Peabody  College  for  Teachers;  at  Knoxville  the 
Blount  College  (1794),  which  was  developed  into  the 
East  Tennessee  College  and  is  now  the  University  of 
Tennessee.  The  religious  aim  and  motive  has  given 
the  chief  impulse  to  educational  effort  at  all  stages  of 
Southern  history.  As  the  denominations  grew 
stronger,  they  were  able  to  assume  the  support  as  well 
as  the  control  of  new  enterprises.  As  the  state  univer- 
sities began  to  appear,  the  Churches,  fearing  their  indif- 
ference to  religion,  began  to  found  institutions  of  equal 
grade.  Appendix  C  lists  the  schools  founded  by  the 
various  denominations. 

State  Institutions.  The  University  of  Georgia, 
chartered  in  1785  and  opened  in  1800,  was  the  first 
State-supported  university  in  the  United  States.  The 
University  of  North  Carolina,  chartered  in  1789  and 
opened  in  1795,  has  always  done  fine  work  and  main- 
tained high  standards.  More  than  a  hundred  of  its 
graduates  have  held  the  highest  positions  in  Church  and 
state.  South  Carolina  chartered  the  College  of  Charles- 
ton in  1785  and  the  State  College  at  Columbus  in  1801. 
In  1862  the  requirements  of  the  latter  institutions  were 
as  high  as  those  of  Harvard  and  Yale.  Thomas  Jeffer- 
son chose  it  for  his  grandsons.  Twenty-two  of  the 
1,740  graduates  from  1806  to  1861  became  governors, 
fourteen  United  States  senators,  thirty-nine  represen- 
tatives in  Congress,  thirty-three  judges,  fifteen  college 
presidents,  thirty-nine  college  professors,  and  many 
others  held  prominent  positions  in  Church  and  state. 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  87 

The  University  of  Virginia  from  its  foundation  in  1825 
to  this  day  has  ranked  among  the  foremost  institutions 
in  America  in  scholarship  and  influence.  It  was  the 
embodiment  of  the  ideals  and  efforts  of  Thomas  Jef- 
ferson who  in  1800  outlined  clearly  his  idea  of  a 
modern  university.  This  school  has  stood  for  high 
scholarship  in  the  teaching  force,  severe  standards 
required  for  degrees,  the  grouping  of  subjects  into  inde- 
pendent "schools,"  the  elective  system,  and  the  honor 
system  of  student  government.  The  University  of 
Alabama  opened  in  1831,  the  University  of  Mississippi 
in  1848,  and  the  University  of  Missouri  in  1848,  were 
and  are  strong  influential  institutions.  The  idea  of  the 
state  university,  free  from  all  ecclesiastical  bias,  yet  not 
in  opposition,  but  supplemental  to  the  denominational 
college,  was  a  Southern  contribution  to  the  American 
school  system.  In  no  part  of  the  South  before  1861  was 
higher  education  neglected  by  the  Church  or  state.  The 
census  of  1860  shows  that  the  Southern  States,  in  pro- 
portion to  .population,  had  more  than  twice  as  many 
students  in  college  as  New  England,  and  their  colleges 
had  nearly  twice  the  income  of  the  New  England 
colleges.  The  average  amount  spent  in  the  South  annu- 
ally for  educational  purposes,  in  proportion  to  free 
population,  was  one  tenth  more  than  was  spent  in  New 
England  and  nearly  one  third  more  than  the  rest  of  the 
country  spent  for  all  educational  purposes. 

Public  Schools.  As  soon  as  the  Southern  colonies 
became  states,  they  began  to  provide  for  state  systems 
of  public  education.  The  constitution  of  North  Caro- 


88  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

lina  of  1776  provided  for  primary  education.  Gov- 
ernor James  Turner  of  that  state  said  in  his  message  to 
the  legislature  in  1804,  "I  am  desirous  of  seeing  a  plan 
of  education  introduced  which  shall  extend  itself  into 
every  corner  of  the  state."  Governor  Hawkins  in  181 1 
said,  "A  certain  degree  of  education  should  be  placed 
within  the  reach  of  every  child  of  the  state."  It  was 
not  till  1839  that  the  state  system  of  public  education 
was  put  into  operation  by  the  legislature.  In  no  state 
in  the  union  was  the  interest  in  public  education  deeper 
or  wider  than  in  North  Carolina.  Virginia  in  1820 
inaugurated  a  state  system  of  free  schools  for  the  poor. 
A  free  school  was  established  in  Maryland  in  a  majority 
of  the  counties  before  1790,  and  a  state  system  of 
public  schools  was  adopted  in  1825.  The  free  schools 
of  Charleston,  South  Carolina,  date  from  1811,  when 
the  state  established  a  system  of  free  common  schools 
open  to  all  white  children  of  school  age. 

Character  of  the  Schools.  The  state  system  of  free 
schools  with  a  state  fund  originated  in  the  South.  The 
idea  of  local  public  schools  and  compulsory  education 
originated  in  New  England.  The  Southern  States,  like 
the  New  England  States,  met  with  various  degrees  of 
success  in  working  out  the  problems  of  public  educa- 
tion. The  rural  neighborhood  schools  in  the  South 
under  the  conditions  could  not  be  efficient.  The  school- 
houses  were  primitive  and  the  teachers  were  crude, 
while  the  discipline  was  severe.  But  the  majority  of 
the  children  of  school  age  had  some  opportunities  for 
securing  the  rudiments  of  an  education.  In  the  light 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  89 

of  to-day  no  educational  provisions  in  any  of  the  states 
in  that  era  were  adequate,  and  public  free  education  was 
not  an  extended  opportunity  to  be  found  in  any  country. 
Before  1860  the  educational  facilities  of  the  South, 
it  must  be  admitted,  were  for  the  most  part  adapted  to 
the  needs  and  ideals  of  the  planters,  the  merchants,  and 
the  professional  guilds.  This  fact  appears  in  the  system 
of  home  instruction,  the  superb  private  academy,  and 
the  colonial  university.  These  helped  to  develop  in 
the  dominant  class  a  culture  of  a  high  and  exclusive 
type.  The  colleges  of  the  North  had  many  students 
from  the  South.  The  colleges  and  universities  differed 
really  only  in  name.  The  oldest  colleges  in  the  South 
as  in  the  North  were  no  more  than  high  schools.  The 
teachers  were  in  many  cases  few,  and  tuition  fees  were 
the  only  source  of  revenue.  Some  institutions  perished. 
Endowments  grew  slowly.  The  self-denial  of  the 
teachers  was  as  beautiful  as  it  was  necessary.  The 
standards  of  admission  were  neither  high  nor  rigid. 
English  instruction  was  confined  to  rhetoric.  Much 
attention  was  given  to  public  speaking.  Logic  and 
philosophy  were  required  along  with  Greek,  Latin,  and 
mathematics.  Instruction  in  history  was  meager. 
Christian  evidences  formed  a  part  of  the  course.  Only 
slight  attention  was  given  to  the  sciences.  But  what- 
ever may  be  said  of  the  schools  and  colleges  of  the 
Southern  States,  and  the  provisions  made  for  educa- 
tion before  the  Civil  War,  it  cannot  be  denied  that  they 
produced  social,  political,  and  religious  leaders  with 
gallantry,  heroism,  endurance,  brilliancy,  and  force- 


90  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

fulness  that  brought  not  only  distinction  to  their  section 
but  reflected  great  honor  upon  the  nation.  The  value 
of  education  must  be  estimated  in  no  small  degree  by 
the  character  of  the  men  and  women  which  it  produces. 

2.  Education  Since  the  Civil  War 

Post  Bellum.  The  days  of  the  South's  resuscitation 
after  the  frightful  disaster  of  the  sixties  were  times  of 
biting  poverty  and  necessary  educational  barrenness. 
This  poverty  has  continued  almost  to  this  present  time 
and  has  limited  all  growth  and  development.  While 
in  the  North  and  East  private  and  Church  colleges  and 
universities  have  acquired  large  endowments  and  the 
state  schools  in  the  West  have  received  splendid  grants, 
the  institutions  of  the  South  have  had  to  struggle,  work 
under  serious  limitations,  and  cherish  ideals  which  were 
never  realized.  Not  only  so,  but  the  curricula  of  the 
Southern  schools  have  been  contracted.  Provisions  for 
such  subjects  as  modern  languages,  English  literature, 
sociology,  economics,  education,  philosophy,  and  even 
history  in  many  institutions  have  been  meager.  The 
scientific  equipment  has  been  pitiably  limited,  while 
libraries  have  been  so  small  and  so  poor  in  contents  and 
so  badly  administered  that  they  have  been  almost  use- 
less. These  institutions  having  to  depend  on  student 
fees  for  support  had  to  make  provision  for  all  who 
came.  This  kept  standards  for  admission  to  college 
low  and  also  made  preparatory  classes  a  necessity. 
There  was  no  place  for  the  private  academy,  and  public 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  91 

high  schools,  except  in  the  cities,  were  almost  unknown. 
Many  colleges  did  only  high  school  work,  and  as  a 
result  many  inferior  institutions  arose  calling  them- 
selves colleges  and  universities  which  were  far  from 
either.  Such  schools  have  hindered  educational  prog- 
ress. Such  was  the  inevitable  result  of  the  struggle 
against  poverty  incident  upon  war's  destruction.  It 
must  be  remembered  that  the  doors  of  the  Southern 
universities  and  colleges  were  closed  during  that  war, 
with  professors  and  students  enlisted  in  the  army,  the 
school  buildings  were  occupied  by  the  soldiers,  all 
movable  property  was  destroyed  and  all  endowments 
were  lost.  To  open  the  old  institutions  was  to  begin 
anew,  having  nothing  but  the  traditions,  which  were  by 
no  means  without  value.  But  through  the  long  struggle 
some  brave  hearts  and  clear  minds  have  kept  the  cause 
of  higher  education  at  the  center  of  the  South's  best 
interests. 

Church  Schools.  The  religious  denominations  of  the 
South  have  wrought  heroically  and  with  supreme  sacri- 
fice to  maintain  and  develop  their  schools,  from  which 
have  gone  out  not  only  strong  leaders  for  their  own 
work  but  for  the  state  and  society  as  well.  The  Meth- 
odists have  not  only  brought  the  colleges  founded 
before  1860  to  a  state  of  efficiency  but  other  schools, 
like  Kentucky  Wesleyan,  Southwestern,  Hendrix,  have 
been  founded  and  put  on  a  safe  footing.  The  Lutherans 
have  brought  Roanoke  College  to  a  registered  standard 
institution.  The  Baptists  have  added  John  B.  Stetson 
University  and  Ouachita  College  and  many  smaller 


92  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

colleges.  The  Presbyterians  have  brought  their  schools 
to  be  institutions  of  recognized  merit.  All  the  Protes- 
tant denominations  have  built  new  schools  and  reorgan- 
ized and  reestablished  the  old  ones.  The  Methodist 
Episcopal  Church,  South,  in  1872  founded  the  Central 
University,  to  which  the  Vanderbilt  family  gave  nearly 
:  two  millions;  because  of  which  fact  the  name  of  the 
institution  was  changed  to  Vanderbilt  University.  The 
University  of  the  South  was  projected  by  a  conference 
of  bishops  and  clerical  and  lay  representatives  of  the 
Episcopal  Church  in  1857,  but  it  was  not  opened  until 
after  the  war.  It  is  located  at  Sewanee,  Tennessee,  on 
a  mountain.  Its  growth  has  been  steady  and  its  influ- 
ence has  been  greatly  extended.  An  entire  volume 
might  be  written  of  the  valorous  deeds  of  the  Southern 
Churches  in  their  efforts  to  give  Christian  education  to 
the  Southern  States.  It  is  easy  to  criticize  their  short- 
comings but  not  so  easy  to  duplicate  their  heroism, 
devotion,  and  the  self-denial  of  preachers,  teachers,  and 
loyal  laymen  who  gave  largely  of  their  little  in  order 
that  ignorance  might  be  put  away  and  the  leadership 
of  the  Church  and  state  might  be  intelligent  and 
supremely  Christian.  They  have  saved  education  from 
secularization  by  the  moral  force  which  they  have  put 
into  the  leaders  of  society.  Education  has  stood  out  as 
the  one  task  of  the  Churches  in  their  effort  to  develop 
the  South. 

What  the  Churches  are  Doing.  Appendix  C  shows 
the  very  great  interest  which  the  Churches  of  the  South 
have  taken  in  education.  Many  of  these  schools  have 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  93 

not  the  equipment  to  give  to  students  all  that  they  have 
in  a  college  course,  but  they  stand  for  Christian  charac- 
ter, the  Christian  religion,  the  Holy  Bible,  and 
that  gives  them  a  power  for  the  development  of  the 
people  which  schools  that  fail  to  stress  them  cannot 
furnish. 

State  Universities.  The  sixteen  state  universities  of 
the  South  had  in  1914-15,  13,584  pupils,  the  state  agri- 
cultural colleges  5,760,  the  sixty-six  state  normals 
25,540,  and  other  state  literary  schools  2,373,  making 
a  grand  total  of  47,257  pupils.  Of  the  20,876  students 
in  the  thirty-six  vocational  and  technological  schools 
5,805  were  Methodists,  4,075  Baptists,  3,185  Presby- 
terians, 1,589  Disciples,  and  1,639  Episcopalians.  In- 
vestigations have  shown  that  all  the  churches  have  as 
many  college  students  in  the  state  universities  through- 
out the  country  as  they  have  in  their  own  colleges,  and 
that  with  some  denominations  the  number  at  state  insti- 
tutions is  considerably  larger.  These  figures  indicate 
two  things :  first,  the  states  of  the  South  have  made 
large  provision  for  the  higher  vocational  and  profes- 
sional education  of  their  citizens;  and,  second,  the 
Churches  have  great  companies  of  students  in  those 
institutions  which  they  dare  not  neglect.  The  state 
educational  institutions  of  the  South  are  not  antago- 
nistic to  religion  or  the  Church,  on  the  contrary  they  are 
quite  friendly  and  even  desirous  of  religious  cultiva- 
tion. Some  of  the  state  schools  have  shown  a  marked 
interest  and  activity  in  religious  matters.  However,  the 
authorities  of  the  state  schools  recognize  that  as  state 


94  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

institutions  they  are  not  in  position  to  give  to  their 
students  the  positive  religious  instruction  and  care 
which  they  need.  They  have  expressed  perfect  willing- 
ness to  cooperate  with  the  various  churches  in  providing 
this  religious  education.  The  churches  must  not  fail 
to  enter  this  open  door.  Four  ways  of  doing  this 
are  now  being  pursued  at  different  universities:  first, 
employing  university  pastors  to  give  their  time  pri- 
marily to  the  students  of  their  respective  churches; 
second,  maintaining  Bible  chairs  in  the  universities,  the 
occupants  to  be  the  pastors  of  the  students  also ;  third, 
erecting  and  maintaining  denominational  buildings  or 
dormitories;  fourth,  establishing  affiliating  denomina- 
tional colleges  in  connection  with  the  universities.  All 
these  methods  are  excellent  if  diligently  and  intelli- 
gently carried  out.  It  would  be  well  for  the  denomina- 
tions not  to  use  identical  methods  at  any  one  place.  By 
agreement  the  four  plans  might  be  operated  by  four 
denominations  and  thus  save  the  duplication  which  is 
frequently  a  hindrance  in  religious  work.  There  is  no 
more  important  task  before  the  churches  than  this  of 
looking  after  the  religious  development  of  students  in 
state  schools. 

The  Churches  must  recognize  their  responsibility  for, 
and  their  opportunity  in,  the  state  institutions  of  higher 
vocational  and  professional  learning,  and  make  ample 
provisions  to  hold  them  in  line  with  the  Christian  revela- 
tion and  to  enable  them  to  serve  the  highest  ends  of  the 
State  in  the  preparation  of  religious  and  church  workers 
as  well  as  civic  and  professional  leaders.  This  can  be 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  95 

done  without  any  neglect  of  the  denominational  schools 
which  are  necessary  to  the  Church  and  no  less  so  to  the 
state. 

Non-sectarian.  There  are  more  than  thirty  institu- 
tions in  the  South  that  are  classified  in  the  report  of  the 
United  States  Commissioner  of  Education  as  non-sec- 
tarian. Among  them  are  some  of  the  largest  andj 
strongest  institutions  of  the  South,  namely :  Washing- 
ton and  Lee  University,  Lexington,  Virginia;  Johns 
Hopkins  University,  Baltimore ;  Vanderbilt  University, 
Nashville;  Washington  University,  St.  Louis;  Rice 
Institute,  Houston,  Texas;  Tulane  University,  New 
Orleans.  Their  student  body  numbered  in  1914,  5,443. 
The  five  last-named  have  $29,186,700  in  endowment 
and  $13,019,000  in  grounds,  buildings,  and  libraries. 
These  five  great  educational  institutions  founded  and 
endowed  (excepting  Vanderbilt's  endowment)  by 
Southern  men,  are  leading  in  the  educational  work  of 
the  South.  By  them  scholarship  will  be  promoted  and 
higher  education  be  given  prominence.  The  George 
Peabody  College  for  Teachers,  Nashville,  Tennessee, 
will  in  its  own  line  aid  in  maintaining  high  standards 
and  in  giving  new  impetus  to  the  best  methods  of  ener- 
gizing the  intellectual  life  of  the  South. 

Public  Schools.  In  1913  the  total  population  of  the 
United  States  of  school  age  (5  to  17  inclusive)  was 
25,587,733,  of  whom  10,277,136  were  in  the  South. 
The  total  number  of  buildings  used  as  schoolhouses  was 
277,148,  of  which  107,690  were  in  the  South.  The 
estimated  value  of  all  public  buildings  used  for  school 


96  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

purposes  was  $1,347,066,909,  and  the  value  of  those 
in  the  South  was  $221,320,017.  The  total  number  of 
teachers  in  the  public  schools  of  the  United  States  was 
565,483,  of  whom  452,270  were  women.  In  the  South 
the  total  number  of  public  school-teachers  was  170,428, 
of  whom  119,844  were  women.  The  total  revenues 
for  the  public  schools  of  the  United  States  (exclusive 
of  bond  sales)  were  $507,227,455,  of  which  $375,582, 
354  was  from  local  tax,  $78,375,000  from  state  tax, 
$18,155,653  from  permanent  school  funds  and  rent  of 
school  lands,  and  $35,113,618  was  from  other  sources. 
The  total  revenues  for  the  public  schools  of  the  South 
were  $94,676,482,  of  which  $59,877,416  was  from 
local  tax,  $4,012,000  from  permanent  school  funds, 
$23,793,741  from  state  tax,  and  $6,993,325  from  other 
sources.  The  average  length  of  the  public  school  year 
in  the  United  States  was  158.1  days,  in  the  North 
Atlantic  States  181  days,  and  in  the  South  134.1  days. 
Of  the  total  school  population  of  the  United  States  72.7 
per  cent,  were  enrolled  in  public  schools,  in  the  South 
71.9  per  cent.  On  every  school  day  of  the  South  52 
per  cent,  of  the  school  population  are  out  of  school, 
while  of  those  actually  enrolled  34.6  per  cent,  are  absent 
each  day.  The  average  time  yearly  spent  in  the  public 
school  by  the  enrolled  pupils  is  81.6  days,  while  that 
for  the  entire  school  population  is  only  66.9  days.  The 
figures  for  the  United  States  are  115.6  and  84.1  days. 
These  figures  are  so  startling,  so  alarming,  as  to  make 
us  ask  ourselves  what  can  be  done  to  change  these  con- 
ditions. There  is  the  double  problem  of  getting  the 


lilt 


HIGH    SCHOOL,    OKLAHOMA    CITY 
HIGH    SCHOOL,    SAVANNAH       ', 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  97 

children  to  school  and  then  of  keeping  them  in  regular 
attendance  until  they  have  been  sufficiently  trained  to 
meet  the  ordinary  requirements  of  life.  It  is  a  national 
problem  as  well  as  a  Southern  problem.  Practically  all 
the  Southern  States  have  recently  passed  compulsory 
school  laws,  but  in  some  states  the  compulsion  is  for 
only  a  part  of  the  school  year.  The  time  has  come 
when  a  law  requiring  attendance  for  the  entire  school 
year  should  be  enforced  in  every  state.  The  Negro 
population  is  responsible  in  large  measure  for  these 
low  percentages.  Who  will  be  responsible  for  the  edu- 
cation of  the  Negro? 

"Illiteracy  in  the  United  States.  Illiteracy  is  now 
regarded  everywhere  the  country  over  as  a  blot  upon 
any  state  or  nation.  Ability  to  read  and  write  is  essen- 
tial to  general  intelligence.  According  to  the  census 
of  1910  there  were  5,516,163  persons  in  the  United 
States  ten  years  of  age  and  over  who  were  unable  to 
read  and  write,  or  7.7  per  cent,  of  the  population  above 
ten  years  of  age.  Of  these,  2,227,731  were  Negroes 
and  3,184,633  were  white  persons.  Of  the  white 
illiterates  1,534,272  were  native-born,  and  1,650,361 
were  foreign-born.  Of  the  total  number  of  illiterates 
1,768,132  lived  in  urban  communities  of  more  than 
2,500  people,  and  3,748,031  in  small  towns,  villages, 
and  the  open  country.  Of  the  total  rural  population 
4.8  per  cent,  of  the  native  white  population  and  40  per 
cent,  of  the  Negroes  were  illiterate,  while  of  the  urban 
population  the  figures  were  0.8  per  cent,  and  17.6  per 
cent,  respectively.  However,  the  illiteracy  among 


98  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

foreign-born  whites  of  the  urban  population  was  greater 
than  that  of  the  native  white  population.  In  1910  there 
were  2,273,603  illiterate  males  of  voting  age,  of  whom 
617,733  were  native-born  whites,  788,631  foreign-born 
whites  and  819,135  Negroes.  The  per  cent,  of  illiter- 
acy of  the  total  male  population  of  voting  age  was  8.4 ; 
of  the  native-born  white  4.1 ;  of  the  foreign-born  white 
11.9;  of  the  Negroes  33.7.  The  problem  of  adult  illit- 
eracy is  no  longer  one  of  race  or  section.  The  total 
number  of  white  illiterates  in  1910  was  956,902  greater 
than  the  total  Negro  illiterates  and  the  illiterate  white 
voters  outnumbered  the  illiterate  Negro  voters  by  585,- 
229.  Massachusetts  had  7,469  more  illiterate  men  of 
voting  age  than  Arkansas ;  Michigan,  2,663  more  than 
West  Virginia;  Maryland,  2,352  more  than  Florida; 
Pennsylvania,  5,689  more  than  Tennessee  and  Ken- 
tucky combined.  Boston  had  24,468  illiterates;  Balti- 
more, 20,325;  Pittsburgh,  26,627;  New  Orleans,  18,- 
987;  Fall  River,  12,276;  Birmingham,  11,026;  Provi- 
dence, 14,236;  Nashville,  7,947;  Washington  City, 
13,812 ;  Memphis,  8,855.  No  section  can  claim  freedom 
from  adult  illiteracy.  This  illiteracy  of  so  great  a  num- 
ber is  not  wholly  nor  chiefly  their  own  fault.  It  is 
due  to  a  large  extent  to  the  poverty  or  negligence,  or 
both,  of  the  states  or  communities  in  which  they  spent 
their  childhood.  But  illiteracy  means  ignorance,  weak- 
ness, helplessness,  and  often  hopelessness  and  also  a 
menace  to  democratic  institutions,  a  hindrance  to  mate- 
rial prosperity,  and  a  peril  to  the  highest  good  of 
society.  Its  removal  is  a  duty  which  no  state,  church, 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  99 

nor  community  can  evade  and  remain  in  safety  or  in 
the  enjoyment  of  a  good  conscience. 

Illiteracy  in  the  South.  The  sixteen  Southern  States 
in  1910  had  3,430,455  illiterates  of  ten  years  of  age 
and  over,  or  62.2  per  cent,  of  all  in  the  United  States. 
Of  these,  2,141,864  are  Negroes,  1,140,440  are  native- 
born  white  persons,  and  148,131  foreign-born  white 
persons.  While  New  York  has  the  largest  number  of 
illiterates  with  406,020,  Georgia  comes  next  with  389,- 
775,  of  whom  308,639  are  Negroes.  Alabama  has 
352,710,  of  whom  265,628  are  Negroes;  Louisiana 
352,179  with  254,148  Negroes;  Mississippi  290,235 
with  259,438  Negroes;  South  Carolina  276,980  with 
226,242  Negroes ;  Kentucky  has  the  largest  number  of 
native-born  white  illiterates,  146,796;  North  Carolina 
has  the  next  largest  with  132,189;  Tennessee  third  with 
120,966.  These  figures  indicate  the  location  of  the 
large  body  of  Negroes  and  also  of  the  mountain  people. 
Table  VI  which  should  be  carefully  studied  will  tell 
its  own  sad  story. 

A  Joyful  Experiment.  War  on  illiteracy  has  been 
in  progress  in  all  Southern  States  with  commendable 
vigor  for  a  half  dozen  years.  How  to  reach  and  teach 
the  adult  illiterates  was  a  serious  question,  not  only 
because  it  concerned  the  grown-ups  themselves  but  be- 
cause their  illiteracy  produced  indifference  to  education 
for  their  children.  Mrs.  Cora  Wilson  Stewart,  Super- 
intendent of  Rowan  County,  Kentucky,  saw  the  very 
great  importance  of  teaching  the  adults,  and  in  Septem- 
ber, 1911,  she  opened  "moonlight  schools"  for  such  as 


ioo    ,  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

would  come.  Beforehand  she  studied  carefully  the 
conditions  of  the  county,  outlined  her  plan  to  all  the 
teachers  of  the  county,  called  for  volunteers,  and 
all  the  teachers  responded.  On  Labor  Day  the  teachers 
visited  the  people  in  their  homes  in  their  respective  dis- 
tricts, explained  the  plan  of  the  schools  to  be  held  on 
moonlight  nights  and  announced  that  they  would  be 
opened  on  the  next  night.  To  the  surprise  and  delight 
of  all,  the  enrolment  on  the  first  night  was  more  than 
1,200  men  and  women  from  18  to  86  years  of  age. 
Almost  one  third  of  the  population  of  that  mountain 
country  district  enrolled.  Not  only  were  these  illit- 
erate farmers,  and  their  wives  and  their  sons  and 
daughters,  but  illiterate  merchants,  storekeepers, 
lumbermen,  and  even  ministers.  Mrs.  Stewart  says : 
"They  had  all  the  excuses  and  all  the  barriers  which 
any  people  might  offer — high  hills,  bridgeless  streams, 
rugged  roads,  weariness  from  the  day's  toil,  the  shame 
of  beginning  study  late  in  life,  and  all  the  others;  but 
they  were  not  seeking  excuses,  they  were  sincerely  and 
earnestly  seeking  knowledge.  Their  interest,  their  zeal, 
and  their  enthusiasm  were  wonderful  to  witness.  It 
was  truly  an  inspiring  sight  to  see  these  aged  pupils 
bending  over  the  desks  which  their  children  and  grand- 
children had  occupied  during  the  day.  Their  delight 
in  learning  and  their  pride  in  their  achievements 
exceeded  any  joy  that  I  have  ever  witnessed."  That 
experiment  was  repeated  the  next  fall,  when  1,600  were 
enrolled.  The  movement  spread  to  eight  or  ten  other 
mountain  counties. 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  101 

The  Effect.  It  is  now  a  demonstrated  fact  that  illit- 
eracy among  adults  can  be  wiped  out.  Grown  men  and 
women — and  even  old  men  and  women — can  learn  to 
read  and  to  write  and  to  make  the  small  calculations 
necessary  in  rural  life.  One  man,  aged  30,  after  four 
lessons,  wrote  the  superintendent  a  legible  letter.  An- 
other man,  aged  50,  wrote  a  legible  letter  after  seven 
nights'  attendance,  and  a  woman,  aged  70,  did  the  same 
in  eight  nights  of  study.  With  such  a  superintendent 
and  such  a  loyal  self-sacrificing  corps  of  teachers  this 
experiment  can  be  repeated  again  and  again  in  every 
community,  among  Negroes  as  well  as  whites,  until 
illiteracy  will  be  a  very  small  quantity.  Not  only  so, 
but  the  night  school  for  adults  changes  the  attitude  of 
the  community  toward  the  school  and  community  life. 
A  school  trustee  said :  "I  have  lived  in  this  district  for 
55  years  and  I  never  saw  any  such  interest  as  we  have 
now.  The  school  used  to  just  drag  along,  and  nobody 
seemed  interested.  We  never  had  a  gathering  at  the 
school,  nobody  thought  of  visiting  the  school.  We  had 
not  had  night  school  but  three  weeks  until  we  got  to- 
gether right.  We  papered  the  house,  put  in  new  win- 
dows, purchased  a  new  stovepipe,  made  new  steps,  con- 
tributed money  and  bought  the  winter's  fuel.  Now  we 
have  a  live  Sunday-school,  a  singing-school,  prayer- 
meeting  once  a  week,  and  preaching  twice  a  month. 
People  of  all  denominations  in  the  district  meet  and 
worship  together  in  perfect  unity  and  harmony,  aged 
people  come  regularly,  and  even  people  from  the  adjoin- 
ing county  are  beginning  to  come  over  to  our  little 


102  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

schoolhouse."  This  experiment  has  become  a  habit 
which  is  heartily  endorsed  by  all  public-spirited 
people  and  has  led  to  the  formation  of  an  Illiteracy 
Commission  which  is  waging  a  successful  war  against 
this  great  enemy  of  the  commonwealth  and  the 
South. 

Reducing  the  Illiteracy.  The  Hon.  P.  P.  Claxton, 
United  States  Commissioner  of  Education,  in  a  recent 
address  gave  the  following  valuable  statement  of  the 
progress  of  education  in  the  South  in  the  first  fifteen 
years  of  this  century : 

"Tables  of  statistics  are  sometimes  said  to  be  dry  and 
uninteresting,  but  for  all  students  of  education  and  for 
those  who  believe  in  the  education  of  the  people  as  the 
most  important  factor  in  the  progress  of  the  country, 
the  figures  given  below  will  have  interest  enough.  To 
those  not  acquainted  with  recent  progress  in  public 
education  in  the  Southern  States,  they  may  appear 
incredible.  In  the  order  given  they  indicate  for  the 
several  Southern  States  the  percentage  of  illiteracy 
among  the  white  children  between  the  ages  of  ten  and 
twenty  for  the  years  1900,  1910,  and  1914.  The  figures 
for  the  decennial  years  are  taken  from  the  report  of  the 
Census  Bureau.  Those  for  the  present  year  are  esti- 
mated, but  are,  I  believe,  reasonably  accurate. 

"The  percentage  of  illiteracy  among  white  children  of 
these  states  between  the  ages  of  ten  and  twenty  is  less 
than  half  that  of  fourteen  years  ago.  The  figures  are 
eloquent  of  earnest,  persistent,  effective  endeavor  and 
of  hope  for  the  future.  The  figures  for  the  reduction 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  103 

of  illiteracy  among  the  colored  children  between  these 
ages  would  be  still  more  astounding." 

PER    CENT.    OF    ILLITERACY   AMONG    WHITE    CHILDREN    OF   THE 

SOUTHERN  STATES  BETWEEN  THE  AGES  OF  TEN  AND  TWENTY 

1900  1910  1914 

Virginia  8.9  5.6           4.5 

West  Virginia  6.8  3.8           3.0 

North  Carolina  15.6  7.1            4.2 

South  Carolina  13.6  8.6           6.6 

Georgia    9-5  5-3           3-8 

Florida 6.5  4.3           3.5 

Alabama    13.3  7-1           4-8 

Mississippi    6.7  3.6           2.6 

Louisiana    17.2  12.0  10.0 

Texas  6.8  5.5           4.9 

Arkansas    ,     9.6  4.4  2.7 

Oklahoma   9.4  2.1            1.5 

Tennessee  10.8  6.0           4.5 

Kentucky 8.2  6.5           5.3 

Average  for  Southern  States 9.5  5.5  4.0 

Features  of  Progress.  Commissioner  Claxton  gives 
other  encouraging  facts. 

"The  number  of  days  in  the  annual  school  term  in 
these  states  is  still  small  enough,  but  the  increase  for  all 
the  states  from  1900  to  1912  was  from  105  to  130,  a 
gain  of  twenty-five  days. 

"Within  the  fourteen  years  from  1900  till  now,  the 
expenditure  for  public  schools  in  these  states  has  in- 
creased  from  $23,000,000  to  $82,000,000,  an  increase 
of  256  per  cent.  The  value  of  public  school  property 
has  increased  from  $40,000,000  to  approximately 
$175,000,000,  an  increase  of  337  per  cent.  The  char- 
acter of  schoolhouses  has  been  improved  more  than  in 
any  hundred  years  before.  Women's  clubs,  school 
improvement  leagues,  and  civic  societies  have  cooper- 


104  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

ated  with  school  officials  to  make  schoolhouses  and 
grounds  more  beautiful,  comfortable,  sanitary,  and 
attractive. 

"Probably  the  most  remarkable  progress  in  public 
education  in  these  states  in  the  last  dozen  years  has 
been  in  the  high  schools.  The  number  of  these  schools 
has  increased  beyond  all  precedent.  Their  attendance 
has  doubled,  and  doubled  again.  Their  standards  have 
been  raised  and  they  are  rapidly  taking  their  rightful 
place  as  the  heart  and  center  of  the  public  school  sys- 
tem. The  high  schools  of  cities  and  towns  have  ex- 
tended their  course  from  two  or  three  years  to  the 
standard  of  four  years,  and  hundreds  of  good  high 
schools  have  been  opened  free  to  the  boys  and  girls  of 
the  small  villages  and  open  country.  The  influence  of 
these  schools  has  already  been  felt  throughout  the  entire 
system  of  the  elementary  and  higher  education  and  in 
the  life  of  the  communities  to  which  they  minister. 

"Since  the  people  have  begun  to  spend  more  money 
on  their  schools  they  have  become  more  concerned  about 
the  preparation  of  teachers.  In  all  these  states  they 
are  beginning  now  to  understand  at  least  something 
of  the  principle  which  Dr.  J.  L.  M.  Curry  never  tired 
of  reiterating,  to  wit :  That  any  state  which  undertakes 
to  educate  the  children  of  the  people  at  public  expense 
must  also  assume  the  accompanying  responsibility  of 
preparing  at  public  expense  the  teachers  for  the  schools, 
in  order  that  the  time  and  money  of  the  children  may 
not  be  frittered  away  and  that  they  may  not,  through 
the  inefficiency  of  their  teachers,  finally  be  cheated 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  105 

out  of  the  opportunity  which  the  state  should  provide 
for  their  education.  All  these  states  now  have  normal 
schools,  some  of  them  four  or  five  each,  and  many  of 
the  schools  are  well  supported.  Several  of  these  states, 
as  Kentucky,  Tennessee,  Mississippi,  and  Arkansas, 
have  established  their  first  normal  schools  within  the 
last  five  or  six  years,  and  all  have  largely  increased 
their  appropriations  for  the  better  support  and  equip- 
ment of  these  schools. 

"Beginning  with  the  first  session  of  the  Summer 
School  of  the  South  at  Knoxville,  in  1902,  there  has 
been  a  remarkable  increase  in  the  number  and  size  of 
high-grade  summer  schools  for  teachers,  until  now 
nearly  half  the  teachers  of  these  states  attended  some 
good  summer  school  from  four  to  ten  weeks  each  year. 

"Only  less  remarkable  than  the  progress  in  second- 
ary education  has  been  the  progress  in  higher  educa- 
tion. Colleges,  universities,  technical  and  professional 
schools  have  increased  largely  in  equipment,  support, 
efficiency,  and  attendance.  Standards  have  been  raised 
and  made  more  definite  both  for  admission  and  grad- 
uation. 

"Schools  of  all  grades  and  kinds  have  modified  and 
differentiated  their  curricula  and  courses  of  study  to 
meet  the  demands  of  modern  life  and  the  varying  needs 
of  their  students.  They  are  now  seeking  the  means  of 
serving  their  communities,  large  or  small,  beyond  their 
walls  by  various  forms  of  extension  work. 

"Clearly  a  new  era  in  education  has  begun  for  this 
section  which  wandered  so  long  in  its  wilderness  of 


106  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

poverty  and  uncertainty  in  the  years  following  the 
destruction  of  war  and  reconstruction.  An  era  of 
and  for  democracy  in  education  is  upon  us.  A 
people  in  want  and  uncertain  of  the  means  of  relief 
have  begun  to  realize  that  the  only  help  for  any  people 
is  to  help  them  to  help  themselves,  and  that  this  help 
can  come  only  through  right  education.  Men  and 
women  indifferent  and  antagonistic  to  public  educa- 
tion at  public  expense,  have  come  to  look  upon  the  edu- 
cation of  all  the  people  as  the  highest  function  and  first 
duty  of  the  democratic  state  and  to  regard  provision 
for  the  support  of  the  schools  of  the  people,  the  most 
important  task  of  the  statesman." 

Meeting  the  Deficiencies.  Notwithstanding  the  fact 
that  a  new  educational  era  has  opened  in  the  South, 
no  one  can  disguise  the  fact  that  the  educational  defi- 
ciencies are  still  quite  glaring,  especially  among  the 
Negro  population  and  the  white  people  who  live  in  the 
mountain  recesses  or  in  the  economically  neglected  sec- 
tions of  the  various  states.  These  constitute  a  real 
problem  which  will  be  discussed  in  another  chapter. 

Some  Helpful  Agencies.  The  Carnegie  Foundation 
lias  rendered  eminent  service  to  the  cause  of  education 
in  the  South  by  its  surveys  and  its  definition  of  a  col- 
lege. It  has  lifted  the  requirements  for  admission  to 
college  and  in  doing  so  affected  the  secondary  schools 
and  the  college  curricula.  The  Association  of  Colleges 
•and  Preparatory  Schools,  formed  in  1894  for  the  pur- 
pose of  elevating  standards  and  adjusting  relations  be- 
tween colleges  and  preparatory  schools,  fixed  certain 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  107 

minimum  requirements  for  admission  to  college  which 
were  binding  on  all  institutions  holding  membership  in 
the  association.  The  fourteen  units  have  become  the 
minimum  requirement  for  admission  into  all  recognized 
colleges.  The  religious  denominations  through  their 
organized  educational  boards  and  commissions  have 
also  brought  about  the  adoption  of  similar  standards. 
The  benefactions  of  the  General  Education  Board  have 
not  only  been  blessings  in  themselves  but  they  have 
given  the  institutions  hope,  and  stimulated  them  to 
campaigns  for  funds  among  their  constituencies.  Up 
to  1915  the  Board  had  appropriated  to  Southern  col- 
leges $3,632,615,  while  those  institutions  secured  as  a 
result  of  this  stimulus  $10,672,052,  making  a  total  of 
$14,304,677,  which  was  added  to  the  resources  of  the 
colleges  in  twelve  years.  The  Board  has  rendered  valu- 
able help  in  pointing  out  to  the  colleges  their  deficiencies 
and  indicating  what  experience  has  shown  to  be  neces- 
sary to  success  in  college  work.  The  assistance  given 
by  churches,  boards,  and  foundations  in  education 
will  be  mentioned  in  another  chapter.  The  service  and 
gifts  from  these  outside  agencies  as  well  as  those  of  the 
home  territory  are  greatly  appreciated  by  the  Southern 
people.  They  have  come  at  a  time  when  they  were 
greatly  needed  and  when  their  use  will  bring  large 
and  beneficent  results. 

The  Outlook.  With  the  public  school  systems  of  all 
the  states  now  well  organized,  well  directed  and  in  great 
favor  with  all  classes ;  with  a  vigorous,  clear-visioned, 
enthusiastic  leadership  in  the  supervisory  positions 


io8  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

of  the  public  schools;  with  all  the  legislatures  ready 
to  make  such  appropriations  to  the  state  colleges  and 
universities  as  their  growth,  prospects,  and  importance 
will  warrant;  with  a  large  body  of  teachers  who  are 
devoted  to  their  work  and  are  using  their  summer  vaca- 
tions for  study  in  order  to  secure  better  equipment,  the 
outlook  for  state,  county,  city,  town,  and  community 
education  is  exceedingly  bright.  A  new  day  is  close 
at  hand.  The  church  colleges  have  never  known  such 
prosperity  nor  ever  done  such  commendable  work. 
Many  of  them,  if  not  the  most  of  them,  are  still  in  dire 
need  of  funds.  To  persons  of  wealth  who  want  to 
help  the  Southern  people,  they  offer  magnificent  op- 
portunities for  Christian  service.  The  ministers  and 
religious  workers  are  coming  through  these  Church 
schools.  The  schools  need  libraries  and  laboratories,  as 
well  as  endowments  to  maintain  a  proper  teaching  force. 
Even  the  theological  schools  are  not  well  equipped  and 
the  ministry  of  the  churches  suffers  because  theological 
education  is  not  to  be  had  by  all  who  desire  it.  But 
with  the  new  economic  era,  when  fortunes  will  be  ac- 
cumulated, benefactors  will  appear.  The  present  is  so 
far  in  advance  of  the  past  that  all  hearts  are  grateful 
and  full  of  hope.  The  South  needs  perhaps  beyond 
anything  else  educationally  the  real  bona  fide  university, 
with  the  graduate  school  as  its  center,  which  will  be  the 
meeting-place  of  graduate  students  in  large  numbers, 
the  promoter  of  original  scientific  investigations,  the 
possessor  of  great  laboratories  and  immense  libraries, 
the  center  of  a  group  of  high  professional  schools.  The 


EDUCATIONAL  EFFORTS  109 

South  has  institutions  that  use  the  name  of  university 
but  they  lack  the  essential  elements  of  being  such.  In 
Johns  Hopkins  University  in  the  far  eastern  section  the 
South  has  one  such  institution,  but  that  is  not  sufficient. 
One  is  needed  in  the  central  South,  one  in  the  South- 
west, and  one  other  near  the  border  beyond  the  river. 
The  nuclei  for  these  already  exist.  But  they  will  cost 
as  much  as  Harvard,  Yale,  and  Columbia.  When  will 
they  be  possible  ?  Such  centers  dominated  by  the  spirit 
of  the  Christian  religion  are  essential  to  the  full  expres- 
sion of  the  best  life  of  this  republic. 


^ 

CHAPTER  V 
THE  SOUTH'S  HUMAN  PROBLEMS 

J.  Introduction 

The  human  problems  of  the  South  are  not  more 
numerous  nor  more  difficult  than  those  of  the  North,  \ 
but  some  of  them  are  peculiar  to  the  South  in  that  some 
classes  of  the  people  to  be  ITFted  to  a  higher  power  of 
intellectual  excellence,  moral  integrity,  and  spiritual 
insight  and  outlook  are  found  largely  in  the  South. 
Nine  tenths  of  the  Negroes  of  the  nation  live  in  the 
Southern  States,  one  third  of  the  Indians,  and  almost 
all  the  belated  people  of  the  hill  country.  The  Negro 
and  the  mountain  resident  have  had  large  part  in  the 
missionary  appeal  which  all  the  denominations  have 
made  in  behalf  of  home  mission  funds  and  they  have 
received  as  much  attention,  if  not  more,  than  any  other 
classes  for  whom  missionary  efforts  have  been  put 
forth.  The  Negro  has  been  the  occasion  of  what  too 
many  have  been  free  to  call  the  race  problem.  Were 
more  attention  given  to  the  problems  of  the  Negro  race 
less  reference  to  the  race  problem  would  be  the  rule. 
The  problems  of  racial  relations  will  diminish  and 
slowly  disappear  as  the  intellectual,  moral,  and  religious 
problems  peculiar  to  each  race  shall  be  worked  out. 

in 


ii2  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

When  men  meet  as  members  of  the  animal  kingdom 
they  display  animal  instincts  with  the  jungle  in  the  fore- 
ground, but  when  they  meet  as  members  of  the  spiritual 
kingdom  they  meet  as  sons  of  God  with  conscience 
enthroned  and  heavenly  destiny  determining  earthly 
relations. 

2.  The  Negro 

Numbers.  The  Negroes  in  the  United  States  number 
9,827,763,  of  whom  8,781,213  are  in  the  South,  form- 
ing 27.4  per  cent,  of  the  population.  The  Negro  ele- 
1  ment  in  Missouri  is  only  4.8  per  cent.,  in  West  Virginia 
5.3,  in  Oklahoma  8.3,  in  Kentucky  11.4,  in  Texas  17.7, 
in  Maryland  17.9,  in  Tennessee  21.7,  and  in  Arkansas 
28  per  cent.  In  the  other  eight  states  the  percentage 
is  so  great  as  to  create  for  the  white  people  an  over- 
whelming responsibility,  whether  viewed  from  the 
standpoint  of  their  own  race,  the  Negro,  the  section, 
or  the  nation.  North  Carolina  has  697,843  Negroes 
or  3'i.6  per  cent,  of  its  population,  Virginia  has  671,- 
096  or  32.6  per  cent.,  Florida  308,669  or  41  per  cent, 
Alabama  908,283  or  42.5  per  cent.,  Louisiana  713,874 
or  43.1  per  cent,  Georgia  1,176,987  or  45.1  per  cent 
Two  states  have  more  Negroes  than  white  people; 
South  Carolina  with  835,843  or  66.2  per  cent.,  and 
Mississippi  with  1,009,487  or  56.2  per  cent,  of  the 
total  population.  These  figures  will  indicate  not  only 
the  location  of  the  large  masses  of  Negroes  but  also 
point  out  the  places  where  the  Negro  problem  must  be 
worked  out. 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  113 

Interesting  Facts.  The  increase  in  the  native-born 
Negro  population  in  the  decade  closing  in  1910  was 
1 1. 2  per  cent.,  while  that  for  the  native-born  white 
population  was  14.5*  per  cent.  For  one  hundred  years 
there  has  been  a  continuous  decrease  in  the  proportion 
which  Negroes  have  formed  to  the  total  population, 
due,  at  least  in  part,  to  the  fact  that  the  white  popula- 
tion has  been  continuously  augmented  by  immigration, 
while  there  has  been  very  little  incoming  of  Negroes. 
The  last  census  showed  only  40,339  foreign-born  Ne- 
groes in  the  United  States,  of  whom  24,426  came  from 
Cuba  and  the  West  Indies,  only  473  were  born  in 
Africa.  The  center  of  Negro  population  is  5.4  miles 
from  Fort  Payne,  DeKalb  County,  in  northeastern 
Alabama.  Its  movement  has  been  continually  in  a 
southwesterly  direction,  but  during  the  decade  it  moved 
only  5.8  miles  to  the  west-southwest,  while  that  for  the 
total  population  of  the  country  moved  thirty-nine  miles 
westward.  The  movement  to  the  city  is  evident.  The 
percentage  in  rural  communities  in  1890  was  80.2,  in 
1900,  77.3,  and  in  1910,  72.6.  The  percentages  of  the 
total  population  for  those  periods  were  63.9,  59.5,  and 
53.7  respectively.  There  were  forty-three  cities  in  1910 
each  having  more  than  10,000  Negro  inhabitants  and 
thirty-three  of  these  were  in  the  South.  The  total  Negro 
population  of  the  forty-three  cities  was  1,341,468. 
There  were  1,227,402  in  the  ci'ties  of  the  South  having 
5,000  or  more  Negro  inhabitants.  Birmingham  made 
the  largest  gain  in  Negro  population,  35,730.  Of  the 

1  The  best  estimate  that  can  be  made. 


114  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

9,827,763  Negroes  in  the  United  States  79.1  per  cent. 

iwere  reported  as  of  pure  blood,  while  the  mulattoes,  or 
those  having  white  blood  in  any  proportion,  were  20.9 
per  cent.,  or  2,050,686.  The  figures  indicate  a  con- 
tinuous increase  in  the  percentage  of  mulattoes  during 
the  past  forty  years. 

Occupations.  Some  false  notions  of  Negro  idleness 
will  be  dispelled  by  an  examination  of  authentic  sta- 
tistics which  may  be  found  in  Bulletin  129  of  the 
Bureau  of  the  Census.  Of  the  total  Negro  population 
ten  years  old  and  over,  7,317,922,  71  per  cent.,  or 
5,192,535,  were  reported  as  gainfully  employed,  of 
whom  3,178,554  were  men  and  boys  and  2,031,981 
were  women  and  girls,  being  87.4  of  the  males  and  54.7 
of  the  females.  The  corresponding  percentages  for  the 
native  whites  were  77.9  and  19.2  per  cent,  respectively. 
Tables  VII  and  VIII  will  show  how  the  Negroes  are 
employed.  The  professions,  like  the  trades,  are  being 
entered  more  and  more  as  men  and  women  become  pre- 
pared for  them.  Race  loyalty  will  give  some  aid  to  pro- 
fessional men  but  the  service  rendered  must  be  adequate 
and  competent  or  else  patrons  will  turn  aside  to  well- 
known  men  of  the  white  race.  In  many  instances  the 
white  professional  men  in  law  and  medicine  are  turning 
much  of  the  Negro  patronage  to  the  professional  men 
of  the  Negro  race.  In  the  case  of  the  ministry  there  is 
;  no  competition,  as  each  race  requires  its  own.  A  study 
of  these  Tables  will  prove  quite  interesting. 

Economic  Progress.  The  economic  progress  of  the 
Negro  in  the  last  twenty  years  has  been  nothing  less 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS 

than  phenomenal.  In  the  South  the  trades  and  profes-  \ 
sions  are  open  to  him,  and  the  attitude  of  the  Southern 
people,  as  a  rule,  is  to  give  him  a  chance.  He  is  encour- 
aged to  save  his  earnings,  acquire  property,  build  a  good 
home,  and  become  a  substantial  citizen.  The  Negra 
who  does  this  is  not  only  self-respecting  but  he  is. 
respected  by  his  white  neighbor.  The  Negro  who  gives 
trouble  to  the  white  man  and  to  the  Negro  race  and 
who  brings  on  practically  all  the  race  friction,  is  the 
idler,  the  homeless,  the  shiftless.  The  great  majority  of 
the  people  are  poor,  and  often  very  poor,  but  the  num- 
ber of  the  comfortable  is  growing  at  a  good  rate.  The 
leaders  of  the  race  are  constantly  and  properly  empha- 
sizing the  facts  of  their  material  progress,  and  this  has 
given  inspiration  and  aspiration  to  the  Negroes  as  a 
whole,  and  the  number  acquiring  farms,  houses, 
small  shops  and  stores  rs  increasing  at  a  very  rapid 
and  gratifying  rate.  There  are  now  57  Negro  banks, 
capitalized  at  about  $1,600,000  and  doing  an  annual 
business  of  about  $20,000,000.  In  1,910  Negroes  owned 
211,087  farms  in  the  South,  or  20  per  cent,  more  than 
in  1900.  The  total  value  of  farm  property  owned  by- 
Negro  farmers  of  the  South  increased  from  $177,404,- 
688  to  $492,892,218  from  1900  to  1910.  Some  of 
these  farmers  have  large  estates.  Deal  Jackson  of- 
Albany,  Georgia,  who  died  in  191 3,  owned  and  worked. 
2,000  acres  of  land  and  had  forty  tenant  families  on 
his  plantation.  In  the  Southern  States  in  1910  there, 
were  1,917,391  Negro  homes  of  which  430,449  or  22.4 
per  cent,  were  owned,  and  314,340  of  these  were  free 


n6  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

of  incumb ranee.  There  are  forty  towns  in  the  South 
populated  and  governed  entirely  or  almost  entirely  by 
Negroes.  The  figures  and  facts  are  indicative  of  the 
new  race  consciousness  that  has  come  with  the  economic 
progress.  But  the  day  is  only  at  the  dawning.  Another 
quarter  of  a  century  will  show  a  greater  advance  over 
1910  than  1910  shows  over  1870. 

The  Finer  Emphasis.  There  is  a  steadily  increasing 
group  of  educated,  cultured,  and  refined  Negroes,  many 
of  whom  are  of  mixed  blood.  This  group  has  given 
the  race  its  leaders  and  furnished  its  professional  men, 
written  its  books,  edited  its  magazines,  and  is  molding 
Negro  thought  and  working  toward  the  creation  of 
Negro  public  opinion.  What  influences  shall  be  brought 
to  bear  in  the  production  of  this  group  of  race  leaders  ? 
Economic  progress  alone,  however  substantial  and 
widespread,  never  did  and  never  can  produce  a  great 
people.  Genuine  greatness  is  the  outgrowth  of  ideals. 
Ideals  are  born  of  the  heart  and  fashioned  by  the  mind. 
Minds  must  be  prepared  for  the  reliable  and  adequate 
thought  processes  of  life,  while  the  heart  must  be  made 
a  foundation  of  sweetness,  righteousness,  justice,  and 
blessedness.  Economic  fulness  is  seldom  a  common 
possession,  and  in  the  present  case  of  the  Negroes  it 
is  far  from  such.  Even  too  great  emphasis  on  material 
progress  might  become  a  peril  to  racial  advancement. 
The  higher  things  must  be  kept  in  the  foreground.  High 
thinking  is  possible,  and  usually  more  probable,  with 
plain  living.  The  economic  condition  to  be  desired  is 
really  that  which  will  insure  the  conditions  making  pos- 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  117 

sible  high  thinking.  Poverty  is  an  enemy  to  all  high 
and  noble  things  of  mind  and  heart  and  as  such  it  must 
be  wiped  out.  To  that  end  must  all  efforts  tend.  But 
with  the  restraints  of  poverty  lifted,  the  supreme  effort 
should  'be  directed  not  to  economic  enlargement  so  much 
as  to  intellectual  equipment  and  moral  development  and 
fortification.  For  these  the  school  and  the  church  must 
take  first  place.  The  Negro  must  be  educated  as  any 
other  man  and  in  the  same  kinds  of  schools.  The 
emphasis  on  economic  progress  must  be  continued  and 
even  increased,  but  the  finer  stress  on  education  and 
moral  development  must  characterize  all  efforts  to  uplift 
and  ennoble  the  race.  Fortunately  the  leaders  of  the 
Negroes  have  recognized  this  fact  and  made  it  prom- 
inent in  all  their  teachings  and  activities. 

What  Is  Being  Done.  The  total  amount  expended 
annually  for  Negro  education  is  $13,630,430,  of  which 
$9,220,430  is  expended  by  the  Southern  States  for 
public  schools,  $250,000  by  the  United  States  govern- 
ment, $760,000  by  states  and  municipalities  for  private 
and  high  schools,  and  $3,400,000  is  received  from 
other  sources.  The  amount  invested  in  public  school 
property  is  $14,685,590.  The  amount  'invested  in 
Negro  colleges  and  normal  and  industrial  schools  is 
$20,000,000.  The  total  investment  in  all  school  plants 
and  equipment  in  the  United  States  is  about  $940,000,- 
ooo,  and  the  amount  expended  annually  is  about  $745,- 
000,000.  When  it  is  remembered  that  one  tenth  of  the 
total  population  is  Negro  it  is  easily  seen  that  a  great 
disparity  exists.  But  in  this  connection  other  facts 


n8  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

must  be  considered.  What  other  Negro  population  in 
all  the  world  has  such  educational  advantages  as  these  ? 
Could  a  poor  people,  just  fifty  years  from  bondage,  be 
expected  to  be  prepared  to  use  such  provisions  as  those 
made  for  the  white  population?  Only  47.3  per  cent, 
of  the  Negro  children  of  school  age  in  1910  were  in 
school,  not  because  they  were  kept  away  but  because 
poverty  and  home  surroundings  had  kept  down  any 
desire  for  an  education.  The  creation  of  the  desire 
for  knowledge,  for  intelligence,  is  the  great  task  with 
a  belated  people.  That  this  desire  is  being  created  and 
being  met  is  evidenced  by  the  fact  that  illiteracy  among 
the  Negroes  in  1890  was  57.1  per  cent.,  in  1900  it  was 
44.5  and  in  1910,  30.4.  The  attendance  at  the  public 
schools  has  greatly  increased  in  the  last  ten  years,  the 
teachers  are  better  equipped,  and  are  more  active  in 
creating  respect  and  regard  for  the  school,  and  the  gen- 
eral white  public  has  taken  a  keener  interest  in  the 
education  of  the  Negro  children,  as  well  as  of  the  white 
children.  This  explains  the  favor  which  compulsory 
school  laws  have  met  in  recent  years. 

Some  Stimulating  Agencies.  No  more  beneficent 
and  stimulating  agencies  have  been  provided  than  those 
supported  by  the  John  F.  Slater  Fund,  founded  in  1882, 
the  Anna  T.  Jeanes  Fund,  created  in  1907,  and  the 
General  Education  Board,  organized  in  1902.  The 
Slater  Fund  consisted  of  an  original  $1,000,000,  which 
has  increased  to  $1,500,000.  The  income  from  this 
fund  is  expended  principally  in  preparing  teachers, 
especially  for  manual  training,  agricultural,  and 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  119 

mechanical  schools.  Recently  it  has  been  used  in  the 
interest  of  Negro  rural  schools.  It  is  a  potential  agency 
in  working  out  the  problem  of  the  education  of  the 
Negro.  Its  appropriation  for  1916  amounts  to  about 
$70,000  and  is  applied  to  sixty-eight  schools.  Last  year 
$500  was  appropriated  to  aid  each  of  seventeen  county 
training  schools  and  the  number  for  1916  has  been 
increased  to  thirty.  Many  of  the  higher  institutions 
assisted  were  founded  and  are  conducted  by  religious 
denominations.  The  Jeanes  Fund  of  $1,000,000  was 
created  to  assist  community,  county,  and  rural  schools 
for  the  great  class  of  Negroes  to  whom  the  small  rural 
and  community  schools  are  alone  available.  This  fund 
in  1914  supported  128  supervising  teachers  working 
in  as  many  counties  in  thirteen  Southern  States  at  an 
outlay  of  $33,042,  which  was  supplemented  by  the 
counties  to  the  amount  of  $6,255.  The  supervisors  are 
appointed  to  supervise  especially  the  industrial  work, 
but  they  aid  the  teachers  in  other  ways.  They  are  for 
the  most  part  graduates  of  Hampton,  Tuskegee,  Fisk, 
Atlanta,  Petersburg.  The  states  have  seen  the  value  of 
this  supervision  and  have  appointed,  for  the  most  part, 
state  supervisors  of  Negro  schools  who  are  being  sup- 
ported by  the  General  Education  Board.  The  Slater 
Fund  is  interesting  itself  more  and  more  in  the  train- 
ing of  teachers  and  in  the  county  training  schools. 
Heretofore  and  even  yet  many  of  the  teachers  are  little 
better  educated  than  the  pupils  they  teach,  and  these 
county  teacher-training  schools  are  necessary,  and 
being  inexpensive  they  are  well  patronized.  By  train- 


120  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

ing  the  teachers  at  home  more  are  reached  and  better 
prepared  for  their  immediate  tasks.  In  1914  in  Ar- 
kansas five  summer  normals  were  held,  in  Texas  eight. 
In  Kentucky  each  county  having  a  considerable  num- 
ber of  Negro  teachers  is  required  to  hold  annually  a 
teachers'  institute  lasting  a  week.  Eighteen  summer 
schools  were  held  in  various  parts  of  the  South.  The 
promotion  of  a  practical  education,  the  betterment 
of  present  school  facilities,  and  the  improvement  of 
teachers  are  being  gratifyingly  accomplished  by  the 
states  through  the  aid  so  splendidly  bestowed  by  these 
two  great  Funds.  The  Phelps-Stokes  Fund  of  $900,- 
ooo  created  in  1909  gives  assistance  to  the  Jeanes  Fund 
in  providing  supervisors.  It  makes  small  contributions 
toward  the  cost  of  erecting  Negro  rural  schools.  It 
provides  for  a  comprehensive  investigation  of  Negro 
education  in  cooperation  with  the  United  States  Bureau 
of  Education.  It  has  endowed  fellowships  in  sociology 
;  for  the  study  of  the  Negro  at  the  University  of  Virginia 
l  and  the  University  of  Georgia,  with  the  provision  that 
each  fellow  shall  prepare  a  thesis  giving  the  results  of 
investigations  which  shall  be  published  by  the  university 
with  the  assistance  of  the  fund.  It  has  also  a  fund  at 
the  George  Peabody  College  for  Teachers,  at  Nashville, 
"to  enable  the  teachers,  administrative  officers,  and 
students  of  Peabody  College  to  come  into  direct  and 
helpful  contact  with  the  actual  work  of  representative 
institutions  of  Negro  education." 

The  General  Education  Board.    Since  its  beginning 
in  1902  the  General  Education  Board  has  had  as  one 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  121 

of  its  primary  objects  the  improvement  of  the  facilities 
for  the  education  of  the  Negro.  Its  benefactions  have 
been  munificent  and  most  helpful.  Its  inquiries  made 
for  the  purpose  of  learning  the  details  of  the  existing 
status — social  and  economic  as  well  as  educational — 
have  quickened  interest  and  obtained  important  infor- 
mation, while  its  tentative  and  conditional  gifts  have 
secured  cooperation  on  the  part  of  the  schools,  the  com- 
munities, and  the  forces  behind  the  schools,  whether 
Church,  state,  or  the  Negro  people.  Since  eighty  per 
cent,  of  the  Negroes  in  the  Southern  States  live  on  the 
farm,  the  General  Board,  like  the  Slater  and  Jeanes 
Funds,  recognize  that  their  educational  problem  is 
rural.  The  Board  recognized  at  once  the  importance 
of  supervision  for  the  rural  schools,  and  offered  to 
cooperate  with  the  state  departments  of  education  by 
furnishing  funds  adequate  to  pay  the  salaries  and  ex- 
penses of  state  agents  for  Negro  rural  schools,  and 
seven  Southern  States  have  supervising  white  men  who 
have  had  large  and  successful  experience  in  school 
management.  The  intimate  association  with  the  ac- 
tivities of  the  supervising  teachers  supported  by  the 
Jeanes  Fund  has  made  this  work  exceedingly  effective. 
In  1915,  $25,000  was  appropriated  for  teachers'  homes 
to  be  built  in  connection  with  consolidated  rural 
schools.  The  Board  has  recognized  the  value  of  the 
great  industrial  institutes  like  Hampton,  Tuskegee,  and 
Spelman,  and  up  to  1915  had  assisted  these  and  others 
to  the  extent  of  about  $670,000.  In  the  same  period 
the  Board  contributed  $140,000  to  the  colleges  which 


122  THE  SOtTFM  TO-DAY 

tire  endeavoring  to  furnish  higher  education.  In  its 
recent  report  is  this  statement :  "It  is  clear  that  under 
existing  conditions  only  a  few  efficient  colleges  for 
Negroes  can  or  ought  to  be  maintained."  These  bene- 
factions from  the  several  Funds  have  stimulated  self- 
help  in  all  directions  and  have  opened  a  new  era  for  all 
Negro  education.  More  adequate  public  school  build- 
ings are  being  constructed,  private  schools  are  being 
greatly  enlarged,  and  libraries  are  being  installed.  Co- 
operation of  white  people  with  Negroes  for  school 
improvement,  cooperation  of  denominational  boards  to 
prevent  overlapping  and  overlooking,  and  the  coopera- 
tion of  these  large  agencies  are  bringing  most  gratify- 
ing results. 

Appreciation.  Whatever  may  have  been  the  beliefs 
and  sentiments  of  the  past,  most  thoughtful  people  of 
the  South  are  now  agreed  that  the  Negro  must  be  edu- 
cated for  morality,  citizenship,  and  industry.  That  the 
problem  of  the  races  is  difficult  cannot  be  gainsaid,  but 
ignorance,  inefficiency,  and  helplessness  of  either  race 
can  make  no  contribution  to  its  solution,  but  rather  add 
to  its  perplexity.  School  officers  and  professional  edu- 
cators are  studying  dispassionately  the  problem  of 
adaptation  of  education  to  the  racial  characteristics  and 
to  the  social  and  industrial  conditions  and  needs  of  the 
Negro.  But  even  the  present  state  of  progress  would 
hot  have  been  possible  without  that  magnanimous  assis- 
tance that  has  come  from  the  North,  and  the  people  of 
the  South  are  profoundly  grateful  to  the  men  and 
women  of  other  sections  who  by  their  gifts  of  money 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  123 

and  personal  self-sacrifice  have  helped  the  South  to  edu- 
cate this  backward  and  dependent  people.  The  late 
munificence  of  the  great  foundations  can  never  be 
lightly  regarded,  but  the  constant,  unfailing,  and  sacri- 
ficial gifts  from  Northern  Church  bodies  for  the  last 
fifty  years  stand  out  to-day  as  love's  and  religion's 
regard  for  a  cast-off  and  neglected  people.  The  South 
to-day,  and  especially  the  moral  and  religious  people, 
would  make  grateful  acknowledgment  of  this  sublime 
service.  Its  value  can  never  be  reckoned  in  human  cal- 
culations. As  a  Southern  man  the  author  presents  this 
testimonial.  This  is  not  to  say  that  the  acts  of  all  the 
Northern  missionaries  and  teachers  were  and  are  ap- 
proved. Many  of  these  zealous  souls  were  not  discreet 
in  the  conditions  in  which  they  labored,  but  their  integ- 
rity and  high  purposes  no  one  questions.  To-day  the 
unpleasantness  is  in  the  past  and  the  South  rejoices  in 
the  labors  of  those  who  gave  themselves  that  those  in 
darkness  might  have  the  light.  Into  these  labors  the 
Southern  people  are  entering  more  and  more  by  their 
Church  agencies  and  public  appropriations,  that  they 
may  give  strength,  wisdom,  virtue,  and  truth  to  their 
Negro  neighbors  and  fellow  citizens.  The  white  man 
of  the  South  and  the  Negro  of  the  South  are  setting 
themselves  with  great  determination  and  mutual  appre- 
ciation to  the  working  out  of  the  problems  incident  to 
their  relations  in  a  common  country.  During  the  last 
forty  years  about  $200,000,000  has  been  expended  for 
the  education  of  the  Negro.  Through  the  work  of 
Northern  and  Southern  people  the  Negro  has  come  into 


124  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

a  new  day.  In  Appendix  D  will  be  found  a  brief 
account  of  what  the  Churches  are  doing  through  these 
schools  for  Negroes. 

Summation.  When  a  complete  summation  is  made 
of  the  superb  work  that  is  being  carried  on  in  the 
Negro's  behalf  by  the  state  and  the  Church,  North  and 
South,  and  when  his  marvelous  progress  of  the  last 
fifty  years  is  duly  considered,  one  is  inclined  to  become 
jubilant  and  at  the  same  time  somewhat  complacent. 
But  there  is  another  side.  More  than  one  third  of  the 
Negroes  over  ten  years  of  age  cannot  read  or  write; 
half  of  the  children  of  school  age  never  enter  a  school ; 
the  material  progress  resulting  in  some  accumulation  of 
wealth  is  a  matter  of  a  small  minority,  while  the  vast 
majority  are  poor,  very  poor;  disease  finds  them  first 
and  takes  them  first ;  the  housing  in  many  instances  is 
nothing  less  than  miserable,  and  only  with  a  small  min- 
ority really  comfortable;  the  Church  ministry  is  fre- 
quently if  not  generally  wanting  in  the  highest  ideals. 
These  conditions  must  be  seriously  considered.  The 
Negroes  have  not  the  educational,  social,  and  religious 
facilities  which  their  white  neighbors  enjoy,  and  they 
are  not  capable,  in  most  cases,  of  using  them  if  they  had 
them.  They  are  still  a  child  race  and  must  be  so  consid- 
ered in  the  larger  planning  for  them.  Many  individuals 
among  them  have  risen  to  commendable  strength,  intel- 
lectual and  moral.  Many  of  these  are  mulattoes  and  fre- 
quently chafe  under  the  restraints  incident  to  the  race. 
Many  white  people  lack  patience,  sympathy,  and  con- 
sideration in  dealing  with  them.  Some  would  give  them 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  125 

only  such  education  as  would  fit  them  for  manual 
service  and  decry  all  cultural  courses.  That  the  educa- 
tion given  them  should  be  largely  vocational  is  readily 
admitted  by  all,  but  the  doors  to  all  knowledge  should 
be  open  to  any  who  can  enter.  The  higher  schools  for 
Negroes  have  been  lacking  in  too  large  a  degree  in  the 
vocational  courses.  These  defects  are  now  being  grad- 
ually remedied.  The  religious  denominations  that  are 
supporting  the  higher  schools  need  to  come  to  a  better 
understanding  of  what  their  various  schools  should  do, 
or  undertake  to  do.  This  would  save  duplication  and 
furnish  the  institutions  of  the  various  kinds  needed. 
That  the  Negro  should  be  educated,  yea,  must  be  edu- 
cated, is  no  longer  a  question.  The  question  is,  How 
and  in  what  shall  he  be  educated  ?  The  states  and  the 
Foundations  are  settling  what  the  elementary  and 
secondary  education  shall  be.  The  religious  denomi- 
nations have  yet  the  determining  of  the  kind,  quality, 
and  value  of  the  higher  education.  The  Negro  must 
be  delivered  from  deadly  poverty  by  the  remedial  phil- 
anthropy of  economic  justice  and  enlightened  living. 
He  must  be  lifted  to  a  higher  level  of  human  living  by 
forces  beyond  his  power. 

Human  Problem.  Is  there  really  a  race  problem? 
There  is  a  human  problem.  Is  there  one  in  Europe, 
in  Asia,  in  Africa?  Slav,  Teuton,  Japanese,  Malay, 
Latin,  Turk,  Sikh-^human  problems  all  when  facing 
each  other.  How  avoid  such,  when  two  races  like  those 
with  their  past  history,  who  face  each  other  in  the 
Southern  States?  There  are  some  things,  like  moving 


126  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

glaciers,  that  require  time  to  finish  their  course.  Shak- 
ing the  hour-glass  never  helps.  Criticism  may  be  an 
easy  indulgence  but  a  doubtful  exercise.  What  will  be 
the  basis  of  the  solution  of  human  problems?  Love, 
justice,  knowledge,  and  religion  are  corner-stones. 
Race  problems  never  get  up  out  of  dank  darkness  till 
these  are  put  under  them.  Give  the  Negro  these  and 
he  will  grow  like  crops  in  June  time,  and  become  a  new 
creature.  If  he  does  not,  then  hope  dies  with  him, 
but  if  he  does,  new  relations  come  like  harvests  in 
autumn.  Race  feeling  and  discrimination  are  not 
Southern  but  human  characteristics.  Ray  Stannard 
Baker  in  his  book  on  Following  the  Color  Line  says 
of  the  North:  "In  every  city  both  white  and  colored 
people  told  me  that  race  feeling  and  discrimination  were 
rapidly  increasing;  that  new  and  more  difficult  prob- 
lems were  constantly  arising.  Generally  speaking,  the 
more  Negroes  the  sharper  the  expression  of  prejudice." 
Trade  unions  in  the  North  have  shown  an  unfriend- 
liness to  Negroes.  Northern  people  coming  South  to 
live  frequently  show  a  harsher  attitude  toward  the 
Negro  than  Southerners.  The  race  feeling  in  South 
America  is  sharper  to-day  than  ten  years  ago.  Here  is 
a  human  problem,  not  sectional,  but  universal.  How 
shall  it  be  solved?  There  are  four  phases  of  any  peo- 
ple's life  that  determine  their  position  and  power  in  the 
world — the  economic,  the  intellectual,  the  social,  and  the 
religious.  A  deficiency  in  any  will  depreciate  and  some- 
times nullify  the  rest.  Economic  resources  are  essen- 
tial in  procuring  a  full  life,  and  without  mental  acumen 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  127 

and  cultivation  the  values  and  issues  of  life  are  little 
understood  and  appreciated.  Human  relations  must 
bear  evidence  of  constancy,  fidelity,  and  refinement 
before  they  can  be  considered  reliable.  Character  only 
can  be  the  basis  of  justifiable  confidence;  and  character 
is  social  as  well  as  individual.  Religious  faith  is  the 
great  stabilizer  of  human  life.  It  must  be  more  than 
some  effusive  emotion  or  sentiment  highly  demonstra- 
tive under  certain  stimulus  and  utterly  lacking  when  the 
issues  of  life  are  in  the  testing.  And  in  these  four 
phases  will  the  human  problem  be  solved.  The  slogan 
of  the  Church  and  religious  people  must  be  "Love, 
justice,  knowledge,  and  religion  to  all,  from  all,  and  in 
all."  Such  must  be  the  gospel  of  education,  social  ser- 
vice, and  unalloyed  Christianity. 

j.  The  Mountain  Man 

The  Man.  The  undeveloped  Mountain  man  is  not  a 
problem ;  he  is  a  victim  of  circumstances.  He  is  usually 
a  man  of  good  blood  and  good  brains.  He  is  not  always 
ignorant  when  he  is  illiterate.  He  has  much  wisdom 
frequently  when  his  knowledge  is  limited.  He  is  the 
pure  Scotch-Irishman,  for  the  most  part,  and  in  man- 
ner, beliefs,  and  speech  his  lineage  can  usually  be  traced. 
His  dialect  is  old  English  with  its  peculiarities  of  pro- 
nunciation and  forms  of  expression.  His  life  philos- 
ophy is  determinism,  or  fatalism,  permeating  all  his 
beliefs,  religious,  social,  and  domestic.  He  has  no  far 
sweep  of  vision,  but  his  upward  look  between  the 
narrow  mountain  walls  has  served  to  sharpen  his  wits 


128  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

and  intensify  his  convictions.  He  is  ever  on  the  look- 
out of  self-defense  and  keen  in  his  detection  of  intru- 
sion. Suspicion  is  native  to  him  as  to  his  wild  com- 
panions of  the  mountain  forests.  He  is  not  a  weakling 
except  by  the  limitations  of  his  untutored  mind  and 
unrelated  life.  Like  the  trees  with  which  he  has  grown 
he  has  the  timber  of  civilization.  He  comes  to  himself 
when  he  gets  to  civilization  or  when  civilization  gets  to 
him.  But  that  does  not  mean  that  all  his  tribe  have 
innate  possibilities  of  unquestioned  richness.  Where  is 
there  a  society  without  "trash"  and  "culls"  ?  Into  the 
mountain  coves  some  incapables  have  been  thrust  by  the 
force  of  ongoing  humanity,  but  these  form  only  a  minor 
part  of  the  mountain  people.  Of  the  more  than  three 
million  Southern  hill  people,  less  than  300,000  are  lack- 
ing in  civil  facilities  and  refinements.  Unfortunately 
the  delinquencies  of  the  incapables  have  been  made  by 
zealous  story-tellers  to  characterize  a  great  mountain 
population.  The  peculiarities  of  an  individualistic 
people  have  been  interpreted  by  undiscerning  observers 
as  hideous  deficiencies.  Many  good  people  in  all  sec- 
tions of  the  country  have  been  led  into  an  unjust  and 
uncharitable  view  of  the  inhabitants  of  the  Southern 
hills  who  are  natively  endowed  in  equal  proportion  to 
the  citizens  of  any  other  section. 

The  Conditions.  Illiteracy  has  been  inevitable  with 
a  people  of  meager  economic  resources.  Teachers  have 
not  gone  in  among  the  300,000  living  in  the  hidden 
recesses.  The  hills  were  barriers,  but  not  so  great  as 
the  attitude  of  the  natives  toward  outsiders.  Their 


I-.*' I 


NUCLEUS    OF    A    MOUNTAIN    CHURCH 
MOUNTAIN    HOME    AND    FAMILY,    FATHER    ABSENT 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  129 

ministry  was  of  native  origin  and  divine  call,  and  had 
no  message  but  the  traditional  doctrines  based  upon 
crass  literalism  and  fatalistic  conceptions  of  God  and 
man.  Their  dogmatism  was  exceeded  only  by  their  lack 
of  knowledge  of  the  world  beyond  the  hills.  There  are 
to-day  in  the  unentered  regions  Calvinists,  immersion- 
ists,  individualists  in  church  government,  literalists  in 
observing  ordinances,  and  opponents  of  Sunday-schools, 
missions,  and  paying  preachers  for  their  service.  They 
are  able  to  maintain  their  positions  by  sharp  arguments. 
The  people  resent  the  imputation  that  they  are  subjects 
of  missionary  attention  however  bestowed.  They  have 
been  open  to  all  sorts  of  fanatical  doctrines.  But  the 
taste  of  knowledge  thrills  keen  minds,  and  the  coming 
of  the  schools  has  set  the  young  people  in  search  of 
higher  truths  and  life.  As  a  result  of  recent  activities 
of  Church,  state,  and  industry,  the  hill  country  of  the 
South  is  in  the  midst  of  a  great  intellectual,  social, 
economic,  and  even  religious,  revolution.  The  mining 
industry  has  brought  in  railroads  and  an  outside  popu- 
lation to  the  Kentucky,  Tennessee,  and  West  Virginia 
mountain  sections.  The  Ozarks  are  being  similarly 
invaded.  The  new  farming  has  become  missionary  in 
its  influence.  Post  routes  have  been  established  and  the 
seclusiveness  of  the  mountains  is  being  rapidly  broken 
up.  States  in  the  last  half  dozen  years  have  awakened 
to  their  responsibility  and  possible  service,  and  have 
passed  laws  requiring  county  high  schools  in  this  moun- 
tain section.  These  county  high  schools  are  becoming 
the  centers  of  a  county  system  of  schools.  The  public 


130  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

school-teachers  have  acquired  the  missionary  spirit,  and 
with  great  pride  and  joy  enter  upon  the  work  of  driving 
out  illiteracy.  The  substantial  men  and  women  who 
have  come  out  of  the  hills  to  the  neighboring  towns 
are  sending  back  into  the  fastnesses  teachers  and  ex- 
emplars of  domestic  betterment.  The  mountain  man 
and  his  family  are  beginning  to  get  a  chance. 

Church  Schools.  Many  of  the  religious  denomina- 
tions have  wrought  valiantly  for  the  hill  people.  The 
Southern  Baptists  have  thirty-four  schools  under  the 
superintendency  of  a  competent  school  man,  and  sup- 
ported at  an  annual  outlay  for  maintenance  of  $31,250, 
and  last  year  of  $11,500  for  improvements.  The 
Southern  Presbyterians  have  forty-five  schools,  under 
a  superintendent,  the  most  of  which  are  day-schools 
reaching  secluded  communities,  but  one  is  an  institu- 
tion of  ten  teachers,  another  of  nine,  three  of  seven, 
one  of  six,  and  two  of  five  teachers.  The  Methodist 
Episcopal  Church,  South,  has  fourteen  institutions  with 
a  student  body  of  2,702.  One  of  these,  eighteen  miles 
from  the  railroad  and  in  the  open  country,  with  475 
pupils,  gives  a  full  college  course,  and  four  others  do 
the  work  of  Junior  colleges,  and  all  do  high-school 
work.  From  these  schools  have  gone  out  a  large  per- 
centage of  the  teachers  in  the  counties  in  which  they  are 
located  and  even  in  the  adjoining  counties.  A  large 
number  have  gone  into  the  Methodist  ministry.  The 
Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States  of  America 
through  its  Woman's  Home  Missionary  Society  main- 
tains ten  boarding  secondary  schools  and  five  day- 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  131 

schools.  The  boarding-schools  last  year  had  889  pupils 
and  the  day-schools  542.  The  Normal  and  Collegiate 
Institute  at  Asheville,  North  Carolina,  with  the  Ashe- 
ville  Home  School  and  Pease  Memorial  House,  are 
rendering  a  very  valuable  service  in  preparing  teachers 
for  the  public  schools.  The  United  Presbyterian  Church 
has  under  its  Woman's  Board  a  fine  school  at  French- 
burg,  Kentucky,  which  is  maintained  at  an  expense  of 
$18,000  annually.  There  are  seven  other  schools  under 
this  Board  having  550  pupils  and  reaching  important 
communities.  The  Church  of  the  Disciples  through  its 
Woman's  Board  maintains  ten  strong  schools  with  150 
teachers.  The  one  at  Livingston,  Tennessee,  last  year 
had  473  pupils,  the  one  at  Hazel  Green,  Kentucky,  327, 
and  the  one  at  Morehead  257.  The  annual  outlay  for 
these  schools  is  more  than  $60,000.  The  Congrega- 
tional churches  through  the  American  Missionary 
Association  support  five  schools  with  1,242  pupils  at 
an  outlay  of  $41,125. 

Being  True  to  Them.  The  mountain  regions  owe 
very  much  to  the  well-directed  educational  and  religious 
service  which  the  Churches  have  bestowed.  The 
Church  schools  are  still  needed  and  will  be  for  several 
years  to  come,  but  the  class  that  now  exists  will  be  grad- 
ually replaced  by  public  schools  of  a  similar  grade. 
The  mountain  people  need  new  religious  instruction. 
They  must  not  be  looked  upon  as  heathen  or  mere  delin- 
quents. They  are  the  victims  of  neglect.  The  author 
was  in  a  county  town  in  eastern  Kentucky,  while  in- 
specting the  moral  conditions  of  the  county,  and  fell 


132  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

into  conversation  with  the  hotel  proprietor.  After 
finding  out  my  calling  and  mission  the  hill  man  said: 
"You  missionary  people  do  not  treat  us  right.  You 
come  with  your  cameras  and  photograph  our  worst 
houses  and  lowest  people  and  then  throw  them  on  the 
screens  to  be  seen.  You  tell  the  worst  stories  that  you 
can  make  up.  You  never  tell  of  our  good  people  nor 
of  the  substantial  things  of  the  community.  But  I 
reckon  you  have  to  do  that  in  order  to  get  money  out 
of  your  members.  I  think  you  ought  to  be  fair  with 
us."  I  think  so  too.  Too  many  people  have  spoken 
disrespectfully  and  unsympathetically  of  the  moun- 
tain people.  It  is  true  that  poverty  has  been  the  hill 
man's  portion.  His  home  in  the  hollow  is  sometimes 
crude  and  barren,  his  barn  is  rough  and  frequently 
dilapidated,  the  sloven  speech  and  sloven  living  are  too 
common,  and  the  domestic  needs  are  many;  but  his 
neighbor  may  have  a  good  house,  a  good  barn,  and 
live  in  comfortable  circumstances.  Primitive  customs 
may  prevail,  with  their  inconveniences  and  severe  re- 
strictions, but  up-to-date  customs  of  modern  cities  are 
not  without  them.  There  may  be  moral  obliquity  in 
occasional  cases,  but  what  of  the  cities  where  divorces 
are  disgracefully  common  and  white  slaves  are  victims 
of  all  grades  of  society?  Throwing  stones  never  helps 
the  stoned.  I  once  thought  horribly  of  feuds,  and  hor- 
rible they  are.  It  eventually  dawned  on  me  that  a  feud 
was  a  contention  among  feudalists  with  their  retainers. 
I  found  that  Scott  and  Stevenson  in  their  tales  of  the 
Campbells  and  McGregors  were  describing  the  parties 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  133 

that  were  appearing  in  the  later  roles  of  feudists  in 
Kentucky.  The  heads  of  feuds  were  no  ordinary  men 
in  Kentucky  any  more  than  in  Scotland. 

The  Call  to  the  Church.  The  mountain  people  need 
a  chance.  They  need  education,  economic  enlargement, 
and  a  new  religious  life.  The  states  will  provide  the 
educational  opportunities  more  and  more,  the  develop- 
ment of  natural  mineral  resources  and  forest  growths 
will  bring  the  new  economic  era,  but  the  Churches  must 
create  the  new  spirit,  the  new  attitude,  the  new  life, 
by  the  gospel  they  preach,  the  service  they  render,  and 
the  hopes  they  inspire.  Tongue-ism,  Russellism,  Mor- 
monism,  and  the  rest  may  supplant  Hardshellism,  but 
if  the  rational  ecclesiasticisms  and  the  gospel  mes- 
sengers with  their  social  message  and  program  as  well 
as  personal  gospel  do  not  meet  the  situation  the  last 
state  will  be  worse  than  the  first.  Individualism  in 
religion  must  not  be  set  aside  or  in  any  way  discounted 
but  it  must  be  reen forced  with  the  "works"  without 
which  "faith"  is  dead.  The  Church  teacher  must  be- 
come the  Church  preacher  and  the  promoter  of  com- 
munity interests  and  life  under  the  inspiration  and 
direction  of  a  genuine  personal  and  vital  Christian 
faith. 

4.  The  Indian 

The  Indian  is  not  a  Southern  problem,  but  national, 
and  has  been  since  the  days  of  Captain  John  Smith  and 
the  Jamestown  settlement.    This  problem  has  had  due  * 
consideration,   but   too   frequently  extermination  has 


I34  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

been  the  process  determined  upon,  rather  than  assim- 
ilation, education,  and  evangelization.  The  bad  blood 
has  had  ample  opportunities  to  be  stirred  by  the  misun- 
derstandings, mistreatments,  and  injustices  which  have 
characterized  the  Indians'  intercourse  with  the  white 
man.  They  are  still  preyed  upon  by  low-natured  white 
men  whenever  an  opportunity  can  be  found.  A  mis- 
sionary in  western  Oklahoma  told  the  author  that  he 
had  known  white  men  to  lend  a>n  Indian  $30,  take  a 
note  for  sixty  days  and  a  mortgage  on  a  good  horse 
for  the  amount,  and  at  the  end  of  the  sixty  days,  when 
the  Indian  was  unable  to  pay  the  note,  the  mortgage 
was  foreclosed  and  the  horse  was  taken  and  sold  for 
$150  and  not  one  dollar  was  returned  to  the  Indian. 
The  missionary  declared  that  this  was  not  an  unusual 
occurrence.  The  greatest  need  to-day  in  Indian  settle- 
ments is  protection  against  human  sharks.  They  take 
not  only  the  Indian's  stipend  awarded  by  the  govern- 
ment, but  watch  for  the  opportunity  to  secure  his  lands. 
These  fresh  causes  for  friction  keep  alive  the  sense  of 
injustice  done  them  by  white  men  and  rekindle  suspi- 
cion, forming  a  constant  barrier  to  any  altruistic  labors. 
The  white  man  helps  to  make  the  Indian  problem. 

Some  Statistics.  The  Office  of  Indian  Affairs  in  its 
latest  report  gave  the  number  of  Indians  in  the  United 
States  as  323,403,  exclusive  of  Alaska,  where  there  are 
about  26,000.  The  number  under  the  general  super- 
vision of  the  federal  Indian  service  is  296,000,  of  whom 
one  fourth  are  in  Oklahoma.  There  are  another  12,000 
in  the  South,  of  whom  7,900  are  in  North  Carolina, 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  135 

1,253  in  Mississippi,  and  nearly  1,000  in  Alabama. 
There  are  more  than  100,000  Indians  in  Southern 
states,  or  about  one  third  of  all  in  the  United  States, 
and  it  is  claimed  that  in  Oklahoma  alone  there  are 
110,000  to  115,000  persons  having  Indian  blood.  The 
government  recently  gathered  statistics  of  the  religious 
affiliations  of  a  large  number  of  Indians.  Of  the  177,- 
401  questioned,  69,529,  or  39  per  cent.,  have  professed 
Christianity.  Of  193,609  reported  on,  149,731  wear 
modern  attire;  90,341  speak  the  English  language,  and 
78,542  are  citizens  of  the  United  States.  There  are 
about  40,000  Indian  children  in  schools — government, 
mission,  and  public.  Of  42,000  Indians  examined  a 
few  years  ago  for  eye  disease  16  per  cent,  had  trachoma, 
and  of  40,000  others  examined  6,800  had  tuberculosis. 
There  are  not  less  than  50,000  pagan  Indians  in  the 
United  States,  according  to  conservative  estimates. 
These  figures  tell  their  own  story  and  stimulate  thought. 
Some  Customs.  Many  of  the  Indians  live  in  tepees 
or  tents,  but  the  majority  have  small  crude  houses  with 
few  and  small  windows.  The  Indian  church  is  of  the 
same  fashion.  About  the  churches  are  built  small 
houses  in  which  the  people  camp  when  they  come  to 
church  services,  where  they  usually  linger  two  or  three 
days.  When  these  houses  are  not  built,  the  tents  are 
brought  and  the  people  live  in  them.  The  Christmas 
festivities  last  from  four  to  six  days.  The  beeves  are 
butchered  on  the  ground  for  the  occasion  and  fre- 
quently there  are  ten  to  fifteen  of  them.  The  people 
remain  as  long  as  the  beef  lasts.  A  Methodist  District 


136  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

Conference  has  been  known  to  cost  as  much  as  $1,000. 
The  duties  at  home  are  never  pressing.  The  Indian 
seldom  cultivates  his  own  land  but  leases  it  to  white 
men.  Some  Indians  are  frugal,  industrious,  and  are 
desirous  of  building  up  some  wealth,  but  the  vast  ma- 
jority, and  especially  the  full  bloods,  look  to  the  govern- 
ment award  for  support.  They  are  usually  in  hard  cir- 
cumstances. Among  the  wild  tribes  the  ghost  dance  is 
still  practised.  This  dance  is  somewhat  like  the  dance 
of  the  whirling  dervishes  in  Egypt.  The  dancers  eat 
the  bean  of  a  certain  plant,  go  into  a  trance,  and  when 
they  come  out  they  speak  as  the  oracles  of  the  spirits 
and  are  marvelously  influential  through  their  revela- 
tions. Demonology  with  them,  as  with  the  majority 
of  non-Christian  peoples,  is  a  prevailing  and  deterring 
belief.  Their  healing  is  accomplished  through  it.  The 
Indian  of  to-day  is  not  far  removed  from  the  Indian 
of  colonial  times. 

Mission  Work.  Mission  work  is  being  carried  on 
among  191  Indian  tribes  in  the  United  States,  by  212 
white  missionaries  and  221  native  preachers,  assisted 
by  153  white  and  222  native  helpers.  The  communi- 
cants in  the  Protestant  Churches  reported  are  31,665, 
while  the  estimated  adherents  are  67,176.  The  enrol- 
ment in  the  Sunday-schools  is  18,000,  while  the  enrol- 
ment in  the  56  literary  schools  is  2,063.  The  author 
has  no  way  of  telling  what  per  cent,  of  these  are  in 
the  Southern  States,  but  at  least  one  third  and  probably 
more.  The  difficulties  in  the  way  of  mission  work  are 
numerous,  but  the  eagerness  with  which  these  simple 


HUMAN  PROBLEMS  137 

people  receive  the  gospel  is  a  great  encouragement.  In 
many  tribes  the  lack  of  the  white  home  life  interferes 
with  substantial  religious  work.  In  Oklahoma  there  is 
need  for  the  preparation  of  a  competent  native  ministry 
to  lead  and  teach  the  people.  Too  many  missionaries 
have  to  speak  through  an  interpreter.  The  people  need 
leadership  from  their  own  tribes  who  can  bring  to  them 
the  gospel  in  its  fulness  and  power.  A  school  for 
the  preparation  of  such  religious  leaders  jointly  sup- 
ported and  conducted  by  the  boards  operating  in  the 
state,  would  be  in  line  with  the  method  of  procedure  in 
some  foreign  fields.  Were  the  entire  mission  work 
planned  in  a  cooperative  way  so  as  to  prevent  overlap- 
ping and  the  neglect  of  any  by  the  boards,  it  would 
seem  to  be  the  part  of  wisdom. 

Commissioner  Sells.  The  Hon.  Cato  Sells,  Commis- 
sioner of  Indian  Affairs,  has  recently  made  the  follow- 
ing significant  statement:  "I  repudiate  the  suggestion 
that  the  Indian  is  a  Vanishing  race/  He  should  march 
side  by  side  with  white  men  during  all  the  years  to 
come.  It  is  our  chief  duty  to  protect  the  Indian's  health, 
and  to  save  him  from  premature  death.  Before  we 
educate  him,  before  we  conserve  his  property,  we  should 
save  his  life.  If  he  is  to  be  perpetuated,  we  must  care 
for  the  children.  We  must  stop  the  tendency  of  the 
Indian  to  diminish  in  number,  and  restore  a  condition 
that  will  insure  his  increase.  Every  Indian  hospital 
bed  not  necessarily  occupied  with  those  suffering  from 
disease  or  injury  should  be  available  for  the  mother 
in  childbirth.  It  is  of  first  importance  that  we  begin 


138  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

by  reestablishing  the  health  and  constitution  of  the 
Indian  children.  Education  and  protection  of  property 
are  highly  important,  but  everything  is  secondary  to  the 
basic  condition  which  makes  for  the  perpetuating  of  the 
race.  The  evil  result  of  the  liquor  traffic  among  Indians 
is  a  matter  of  grave  concern  to  the  white  citizens  of 
the  country,  both  for  the  reason  that  they  are  properly 
interested  in  the  uplift  of  the  red  man,  and  for  the 
further  reason  that  the  impoverishment  of  the  Indian 
means  that  he  will  ultimately  become  a  charge  upon 
the  taxpayers  of  the  several  states.  I  believe  that  the 
greatest  present  menace  to  the  American  Indian  is 
whisky.  It  does  more  to  destroy  his  constitution  and 
invite  the  ravages  of  disease  than  anything  else.  It 
does  more  to  demoralize  him  as  a  man.  It  does  more 
to  make  him  an  easy  prey  to  the  unscrupulous  than 
everything  else  combined.  Let  us  save  the  American 
Indian  from  the  curse  of  whisky." 


CHAPTER  VI 

SOCIAL  RESPONSIBILITY  AND 
ENDEAVOR 

I.  Industrial 

Economic  Trend.  As  indicated  in  the  preceding 
chapters  the  trend  of  life  in  the  South  to-day  is  toward 
the  economic  ideal.  The  spirit  of  American  industrial- 
ism and  capitalism  is  getting  a  very  strong  hold  on 
the  South  and  especially  upon  the  Southern  city. 
Wealth  is  becoming  more  and  more  a  determining 
factor  in  fixing  a  man's  place  in  society,  and  the  eco- 
nomic argument  is  all  but  irresistible  and  unanswerable, 
whatever  may  be  the  social,  moral,  or  political  interests 
involved.  In  fact,  economic  interests  have  become  the 
political  interests  and  statesmen  are  those  in  political 
position  who  can  secure  the  largest  economic  advantages 
to  their  constituency.  In  the  cities  to-day  the  interested 
political  parties  are  seeking  some  selfish  financial  ad- 
vantage. Many  men  in  their  voting  consider  only  the 
effect  on  their  business.  Great  moral  issues  are  usually 
very  annoying  to  such  persons.  In  recent  years  many 
business  men  in  the  South  have  been  in  almost  constant 
distress  because  of  the  agitation  over  the  prohibition 
of  the  liquor  traffic  or  the  prevention  of  race-track  , 

139 


140  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

gambling.  Commercialism  and  economic  interest  hold 
men  from  great  democratic  movements  that  seek  to 
promote  the  welfare  and  development  of  all  the  people. 
Great  men  and  virile  leaders  breathe  poorly  in  such  an 
atmosphere.  They  feel  a  contempt  for  "pork  barrel" 
statesmanship  and  dollar  diplomacy.  There  is  little 
wonder  that  men  of  such  temperament  and  capability 
are  agitating  the  creation  of  a  tariff  commission  and 
a  budget  system  of  government  expense.  Legislatures 
in  all  the  states  have  been  noted  for  the  lobbying  of  in- 
terests attending  them.  The  economic  ideal  stamps  all 
social  and  political  relations  with  the  dollar  mark  It 
creates  classes — capitalists,  managers,  foremen,  labor- 
ers— and  promotes  the  widening  divisions  among  them. 
These  social  divisions  were  not  so  marked,  and  very 
little  known,  in  the  old  agricultural  era  of  the  South. 
The  big  farmer  and  the  little  farmer  were  neighbors  in 
fact  and  spirit.  Antipathy  between  employer  and  em- 
ployee was  impossible.  As  a  rule  the  employee  ate  at 
the  employer's  table.  But  industrial  pursuits  create 
cities  and  colonies,  and  these  develop  social  grades  and 
economic  problems  which  estrange  and  divide  men. 
Into  these  conditions  the  South  is  being  rapidly  ushered. 
Industrial  Issues.  The  issue  of  industrial  adjust- 
ment has  not  become  acute  in  the  Southern  States  as  it 
has  been  in  the  North  and  West,  but  the  trend  of  things 
indicates  that  it  cannot  be  avoided  very  much  longer. 
Birmingham  is  rapidly  becoming  a  second  Pittsburgh, 
West  Virginia  is  rivaling  Pennsylvania  in  mineral 
output,  and  the  mills  of  the  Carolinas  and  Georgia  are 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  141 

rapidly  duplicating  those  of  New  England.  Manufac- 
tures make  wealth  and  make  it  rapidly.  The  Southern 
man  has  found  that  out.  He  has  the  economic  fever 
and  is  impelled  by  the  aspiration  for  wealth.  He 
knows  the  unrivaled  possibilities  for  his  section.  It 
would  be  nothing  less  than  miraculous  if  he  failed  to 
follow  the  human  bent  and  seek  a  portion  of  the  wealth 
which  is  certain.  But  that  means  industrial  classes, 
industrial  issues,  industrial  conflicts.  Unionism,  social- 
ism, even  anarchy  will  come.  The  foreign  accent  and 
the  foreign  tongue  will  characterize  the  new  conditions. 
What  has  happened  at  Lawrence  and  Bethlehem  and 
in  West  Virginia,  Colorado  and  the  great  Northwest 
may  happen,  yea,  will  happen  at  these  new  centers,  if 
there  is  not  found  another  and  better  way  of  disposing 
of  exorbitant  demands,  correcting  injustice,  and  estab- 
lishing right,  honesty,  and  human  brotherhood.  Why 
should  there  be  indifference  to  such  issues  until  they 
arise  ?  If  the  South  is  being  prepared  for  a  great  indus- 
trial era,  preparation  should  also  be  in  process  for 
handling  that  era  in  accordance  with  the  highest  inter- 
ests of  all  involved,  both  capitalist  and  laborer.  Those 
interests  are  not  economic  alone,  but  intellectual,  social, 
moral,  and  religious.  To  do  this  there  must  be  created 
an  attitude  of  mind,  a  fineness  of  spirit,  a  sense  of 
justice  and  right  which  will  be  determinative  when  the 
issues  arise.  Moral  integrity  is  essential  to  substantial 
relations,  moral  purpose  must  characterize  all  valuable 
service,  and  moral  responsibility  must  control  all  right 
actions.  What  shall  these  be  in  industrialism? 


142  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

The  Working  Man.  All  real  men  are  working  men. 
I  .Without  work  men  only  exist ;  they  do  not  live.  Work 
is  man's  expression  of  himself.  Charles  Kingsley  once 
said  that  man's  first  act  when  he  arises  each  morning 
should  be  to  thank  God  that  he  has  something  to  do 
that  day  that  is  worthy  of  him  and  his  Maker.  The 
idler,  man  or  woman,  high  or  low,  rich  or  poor,  married 
or  single,  is  a  burden  upon  society  and  an  obstruction 
to  the  progress  of  civilization.  Men  and  women  ought 
at  all  times  and  in  all  places  and  positions  to  work.  But 
the  term,  the  working  man,  has  become  technical  and 
refers  for  the  most  part  to  the  industrial  worker.  As 
a  rule,  the  laborer  of  the  farm  is  not  included — only 
the  industrial  worker  is  usually  meant.  What  should 
be  the  attitude  of  sbciety,  the  State  and  the  Church 
toward  the  economic  questions  which  industrialism  in 
the  cities,  in  the  mining  districts,  and  in  the  manufactur- 
ing centers  has  developed  ?  The  question  is  not,  Is 
unionism  right  or  wrong?  but,  Wherein  is  unionism 
right  and  commendable,  and  wherein  has  it  adopted 
harmful  methods  and  sought  unrighteous  ends?  In- 
dustrial issues  can  never  be  finally  settled  by  diplomatic 
sparring  for  advantage,  blockades,  boycotts,  and  strikes. 
These  are  the  methods  of  militarism  in  industry.  The 
truth  is  they  are  the  developments  of  persons  who  were 
trained  under  military  systems  and  know  only  the  phi- 
losophy of  force.  Industrial  issues  can  never  be  truly 
settled  except  in  the  temple  of  justice  and  at  the  altar 
of  right,  truth,  and  humanity.  There  must  be  the 
recognition  that  the  capitalist  is  a  working  man  and 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  143 

that  without  him  the  fabric  of  industrial  life  would  go 
to  shreds.  There  must  be  the  recognition  that  the 
laborer  is  a  capitalist  without  whose  investment  the 
bankruptcy  of  society  is  inevitable.  Fellow  laborers 
all  must  be  and  colaborers  with  the  great  Maker.  The 
Church  has  no  industrial  creed,  but  it  has  a  moral  code 
for  human  relations,  whether  economic,  social,  or  polit- 
ical. It  can  declare  for  "equal  rights  and  complete 
justice  for  all  men  in  all  stations  of  life,"  and  "for  the 
right  of  all  men  to  the  opportunity  of  self -maintenance, 
for  safeguarding  this  right  from  encroachments  of 
every  kind,  and  for  the  protection  of  workers  from  the 
hardships  of  enforced  unemployment"  and  "for  the 
right  of  employees  and  employers  alike  to  organize  for 
adequate  means  of  conciliation  and  arbitration  in  indus- 
trial disputes."  It  has  no  program  of  methods  to  be 
carried  out,  no  system  of  industrial  philosophy  to  be 
accepted,  but  it  does  have  standards  of  morals,  codes  of 
conduct,  and  high  and  holy  principles  of  brotherhood 
and  humanity  which  it  considers  essential  to  the  stability 
of  society,  however  constituted  or  employed,  and  these 
the  Church  must  constantly  promulgate  and  continu- 
ously promote.  Men  are  invited  to  live  as  becomes 
men.  Barbarism  and  the  jungle  spirit  should  have  no 
place  in  modern  life,  and  where  they  appear  they  must 
be  exorcised  through  the  Christ-spirit  that  cast  out  the 
demons  by  the  Sea  of  Galilee.  The  persistent  and 
unavoidable  business  of  the  Church  is  to  create,  edu- 
cate, refine,  and  empower  conscience  in  the  employer 
and  in  the  employee. 


144  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

Big  Business  Learning.  Corporations  are  beginning 
to  inquire  as  to  the  domestic  felicity  of  those  seeking 
employment.  A  big  coal  company  in  West  Virginia 
offers  a  prize  of  $1,000  to  the  employee  who  keeps  the 
most  beautiful  yard  and  best  garden.  The  estimated 
value  of  the  gardens  of  the  company's  employees  in 
that  one  mining  town  last  year  was  $40,000.  The  sys- 
tem insures  beautifully  kept  homes,  valuable  vegetables, 
healthful  and  pleasing  employment  in  leisure  hours, 
and  a  friendly  community  spirit  and  contented  people. 
Cigaret  smoking  and  dram-drinking  are  under  the  ban 
of  big  business,  for  they  diminish  efficiency.  Old  age 
pensions  sustained  by  the  company  insure  constant 
employment  and  interest  in  the  company's  welfare. 
The  division  of  the  profits  by  a  few  big  companies  has 
developed  a  sense  of  ownership  in  the  employee  and 
thereby  increased  the  value  of  his  service.  The  living 
wage,  the  release  from  employment  one  day  in  seven, 
the  reduction  of  the  hours  of  labor  to  a  practicable  min- 
imum, the  safety  devices  for  the  protection  of  the 
worker  from  dangerous  machinery,  have  all  been  as 
much  to  the  advantage  of  the  companies  that  adopted 
them,  as  to  their  employees.  Morality  and  sobriety  are 
becoming  industrial  assets.  The  industrialism  of  the 
future  will  have  more  and  more  regard  for  the  man. 
His  physical,  mental,  and  moral  condition  and  attitude 
will  become  important  elements  in  his  employment. 
When  the  man  and  not  money  becomes  the  primary 
consideration  industrial  strife  will  be  reduced  to  the 
vanishing-point.  But  conscience  must  point  the  way. 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  145 

The  Working  Woman.  In  1910  there  were  7,438,- 
686  women  in  the  United  States,  sixteen  years  old  and 
over,  that  were  engaged  in  some  gainful  occupation. 
In  the  Southern  States  there  were  742,873  between  six- 
teen and  twenty  inclusive,  1,582,828  between  twenty- 
one  and  forty-four  inclusive,  524,940  forty-five  years 
old  and  over,  a  total  of  2,850,641  women  sixteen  years 
old  and  over.  Many  of  these  women  are  engaged  in 
domestic  service  in  homes,  some  in  clerical  and  steno- 
graphic work,  some  in  stores,  some  in  textile  factories, 
tobacco  factories,  shoe  factories,  canneries,  steam 
laundries,  and  many  in  agriculture.  Work  is  honorable 
and  none  of  these  occupations  are  discreditable  to  any 
person  who  engages  in  them.  But  the  woman  in  gain- 
ful occupations  raises  questions  as  to  the  home,  its 
stability,  sweetness,  restfulness,  if  the  homemaker  is 
absent  almost  all  the  day.  What  effect  will  grinding 
toil,  extending  eight,  nine,  ten,  and  even  longer  hours, 
have  on  motherhood  ?  What  does  the  race  lose  socially 
by  woman  standing  or  sitting  all  day  directing  a 
machine,  or  breathing  gas  fumes,  or  living  in  extreme 
humidity  and  heat,  or  working  under  intense  nervous 
strain?  Overworked  women  mean  ill  health,  early 
breakdown,  home  endangered,  society  impoverished. 
Where  is  the  social  responsibility  to  see  that  the  hours 
are  not  too  long,  that  ventilation  is  abundant,  that  sani- 
tation is  provided,  that  nervous  exhaustion  is  not 
allowed,  that  the  conditions  under  which  women  work 
are  favorable  to  health,  vigor  of  body,  the  development 
of  the  mind  and  soul,  and  the  best  interests  of  the 


146  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

family?  The  evils  of  the  employment  of  women  are 
perhaps  not  so  great  nor  so  numerous  in  the  South  as 
in  the  North,  but  they  are  too  many  and  too  hurtful 
to  be  allowed  to  continue.  The  social  conscience  should 
be  kept  sensitive  to  these  high  interests  of  humanity. 

The  Working  Child.  Child  labor  is  employed  in  all 
the  states  of  the  nation.  It  is  regarded  as  especially 
injurious  in  the  tenements  of  New  York  and  in  the 
cotton-mills  of  a  few  Southern  States.  Children  are 
largely  employed  in  the  canneries  of  Maryland,  the 
I  glass,  factories  of  West  Virginia,  the  tobacco  factories 
of  Virginia  and  Kentucky,  the  hosiery  mills  of  Tennes- 
see, the  cigar  factories  of  Florida,  the  shrimp  and  oyster 
packing-houses  of  the  Gulf  coast  and  in  the  cotton- 
mills  of  the  Carolinas,  Georgia,  Alabama,  and  Missis- 
sippi. Severe  toil  and  long  hours  for  children  (espe- 
cially under  fourteen  years  of  age)  must  mean  in  many 
cases,  if  not  most,  undeveloped  and  ill-developed  bodies, 
dwarfed  and  stunted  minds,  starved  souls,  and  blasted 
lives.  Such  a  sacrifice  of  childhood  (and  condemnation 
for  life  to  the  ranks  of  the  illiterate,  ignorant,  unskilled, 
poorly  paid,  and  hopeless  workers)  is  too  high  a  price 
to  pay  for  dividends  in  any  business.  The  South 
suffers  from  an  unenviable  reputation  and  stinging 
reproach  because  the  cotton  manufacturers  of  the  Caro- 
linas, Georgia,  and  Alabama  have  vigorously  opposed 
proposed  legislation,  state  and  national,  that  looked  to 
•the  correction  of  the  evils  of  child  labor,  and  that  would 
make  impossible  the  employment  of  children  as  young 
as  twelve  years.  The  manufacturers  assign  plausible 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  147 

reasons  for  their  position  which  might  be  acceptable: 
if  only  the  present  were  to  be  considered.  Human 
beings,  however,  must  be  considered  in  the  light  of 
seventy  years  of  earthly  life  and  the  possibilities  of  a 
greater  future  for  which  this  life  is  but  the  introduc- 
tion. But  child  labor  will  be  restricted  when  its  evils, 
are  generally  known.  Already  the  public  is  being  thor- 
oughly convinced  that  the  worth  of  a  child  is  infinitely 
greater  than  the  value  of  its  labor.  The  Uniform 
Child  Labor  Law  will  inevitably  soon  become  a  stat- 
ute in  all  the  states.  Its  provisions  are :  a  twelve  year 
age  limit  for  newsboys  and  the  street  trade  generally ; 
a  fourteen  year  age  limit  for  factories,  stores,  and  other 
specified  occupations;  a  sixteen  year  age  limit  for 
dangerous  operations  and  processes  of  manufactures; 
an  eighteen  year  age  limit  for  extra  hazardous  occu- 
pations ;  and  a  twenty-one  year  age  limit  for  such  occu- 
pations as  employment  in  saloons  and  night  messenger 
service.  The  law  prescribes,  as  a  maximum,  an  eight 
hour  day  for  boys  under  sixteen  and  girls  under  eigh- 
teen, and  a  nine  hour  day  for  boys  between  sixteen  and 
eighteen  and  for  girls  between  eighteen  and  twenty-one., 
Humanitarian  sentiment  and  principles  are  supporting 
the  agitation  for  such  a  law.  The  reproach  for  inhu- 
manity to  children  and  indifference  to  the  mute  appeals, 
of  childhood  cannot  long  remain  upon  any  section  in 
this  day  when  man  is  coming  to  the  center  as  the  most 
valuable  factor  in  the  world. 

Factory    District.     The    wage-earner,    the    factory 
operative,  the  toiling  woman,  and  the  employed  child: 


148  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

are  claiming  new  and  larger  service  from  society  and 
especially  from  the  Church.  Jesus  looked  with  com- 
passion upon  a  hungry  multitude,  and  with  great  tender- 
ness spoke  of  a  large  company  as  being  sheep  without 
a  shepherd.  Industrialism  has  produced  handsome 
churches  for  the  well-to-do,  and  mission  chapels  for 
wage-earners  and  factory  people.  The  belief  has  gained 
currency  that  the  churches  are  not  for  poor  people. 
These  picture  the  churchgoers  as  made  up  of  good 
dressers  and  the  socially  elect.  The  manner  of  the 
church  to-day  is  embarrassing  to  the  artisan  and  his 
family.  The  message  of  the  pulpit  is  too  frequently 
framed  to  fit  the  circumstances  rather  than  the  hearts 
and  consciences  of  the  people.  The  church  has  to  con- 
vince anew  the  industrial  classes  of  its  interest  in  them, 
of  its  message  for  them,  and  its  service  to  them.  The 
non-churchgoing  masses  by  their  bigness  should  shock 
the  churches  into  the  adoption  of  additional  if  not  new 
methods  of  getting  the  pure  gospel,  social  as  well  as 
individual,  to  and  into  the  people.  The  moral  illiter- 
ates and  the  religious  delinquents  even  among  the  intel- 
lectual and  the  economically  competent  are  perils  to  our 
national  life.  Moral  and  religious  education  is  a  social 
responsibility,  if  not  a  national  necessity.  Religious 
neglect  produces  the  morally  destitute.  But  is  the 
Church  operating  a  sufficiently  broad  and  comprehen- 
sive program  to  meet  the  needs  of  factory  districts? 
What  do  labor  unions  do  for  their  members  which 
churches  should  do  for  theirs?  What  services  do 
laborers  think  the  Church  should  render  them?  Not 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  149 

the  eighteenth  century  should  furnish  the  type  of  church 
to-day,  but  the  demands  of  twentieth  century  condi- 
tions. 

2.  Political 

Social  responsibility  must  express  itself  in  the  laws 
of  the  land.  The  purpose  of  law  is  protection,  but  no 
less  redemption.  Every  people  will  be  judged  by  its 
law  as  well  as  its  lawlessness.  The  state  of  human 
development  in  any  country  can  be  usually  estimated 
from  the  statute-books.  A  serious,  profound  people 
does  not  express  itself  by  petty  trivialities.  A  state  is 
sometimes  made  ridiculous  by  the  childishness  of  its 
legislature.  The  political!  candidate  as  a  rule  fashions 
his  appeal  to  the  prejudices  of  his  constituency  rather 
than  to  the  high  interests  of  the  public.  Who  shall 
guard  society  from  the  intrigues  of  evil  men?  Who 
shall  protect  the  human  interests  from  ignorant  and 
pernicious  prejudice  ?  The  bad  citizenship  of  good  men 
opens  the  way  for  iniquitous  laws,  selfish  scheming 
and  crooked  office-holders.  Voting  has  too  long  been 
looked  upon  as  simply  a  privilege  when  in  reality  it  is 
a  fearful  responsibility.  There  is  no  duty  so  exacting 
and  so  imperative  as  voting.  The  day  of  compulsory 
voting  should  be  speedily  brought  in.  If  a  man  will 
not  vote  in  one  election,  primary  or  final,  he  should  not 
be  allowed  to  vote  in  the  next,  unless  he  can  show 
lawful  reason  for  his  failure.  Selecting  a  candidate 
for  governor  is  much  easier  than  choosing  a  constable, 
but  the  constable  is  dealing  daily  with  the  elements  of 


150  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

society  where  the  social  responsibility  is  delicate  and 
must  be  brought  into  action.  Conscience  at  the  ballot 
and  conscience  impelling  to  the  ballot  is  a  great  social 
need  to-day. 

The  Intellectual  Ballot.  There  is  serious  doubt  as 
to  the  simple  completion  of  twenty-one  years  of  exist- 
ence qualifying  a  man  for  voting.  Democracy  does 
not  mean  the  rule  of  mere  numbers.  The  majority 
may  require  the  protection  which  only  the  will  of  the 
intelligent  minority  can  insure.  Ignorance,  prejudice, 
and  enmity  cannot  equip  a  safe  electorate,  even  for 
itself.  When  the  Southern  States  were  controlled  by 
these  things  there  was  no  hope  for  progress  of  any  kind, 
and  if  there  had  not  come  a  change,  economic,  social, 
and  moral  prostration  would  have  been  the  condition 
to-day.  Only  the  intelligent  ballot  can  insure  safety 
to  a  democracy.  If  there  exists  an  indifference  in  the 
body  politic  to  the  intellectual  qualification  of  any  con- 
siderable portion  of  the  electorate,  measures  must  be 
taken  to  protect  the  ballot  and  to  create  an  incentive  to 
securing  the  proper  qualification.  The  Southern  States 
a  quarter  of  a  century  ago  began  to  realize  the  absolute 
necessity  of  adopting  amendments  to  their  constitutions 
that  would  restrict  suffrage  to  those  who  were  qualified 
to  exercise  it  to  the  public  advantage.  All  now  require 
the  payment  of  poll  taxes  as  a  preparation  to  voting. 
Georgia  requires  the  payment  of  all  taxes  six  months 
before  election.  Alabama  requires  also  forty  acres  of 
land  or  real  or  personal  property  worth  not  less  than 
$300  on  which  taxes  have  been  paid.  Louisiana  and 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  151 

South  Carolina  require  $300  worth  of  property  and 
Georgia  $500.  Mississippi,  North  Carolina,  and  Vir- 
ginia have  no  property  test.  All  these  states  with 
Oklahoma  have  an  educational  test  of  being  able  to 
read  and  write  the  Constitution  of  the  United  States 
in  English.  Virginia  and  Louisiana  also  require  the 
applicant  to  make  an  application  for  registration 
in  his  own  writing.  Mississippi  and  Georgia  require 
the  applicant  to  be  able  to  understand  and  inter- 
pret the  Constitution.  That  these  laws  disfranchise 
many  Negroes  and  some  whites  everybody  knows.  That  • 
this  was  the  purpose  of  such  laws  no  one  denies. 
Whether  they  are  considered  right  or  wrong  will  depend 
on  one's  point  of  view  and  upon  the  importance  which 
one  attaches  to  an  intelligent  and  substantial  ballot. 
That  unfairness  and  injustice  are  occasionally  and  in 
some  communities  frequently  practised  in  administering 
such  laws  cannot  be  gainsaid,  but  it  is  hoped  and  be- 
lieved that  a  public  conscience  will  not  be  long  in  de- 
veloping which  will  demand  that  such  injustice  shall  not 
continue,  but  that  all  men  shall  receive  fair  treatment  in 
accordance  with  the  law  of  the  land  and  the  claims  of 
humanity.  Right,  conscience,  and  intelligence  are  the 
safeguards  of  the  ballot,  and  with  either  one  lacking, 
the  ballot  is  in  danger  of  becoming  a  menace  to  society. 
No  man  should  be  denied  the  ballot  who  can  exercise 
it  intelligently  and  who  will  use  it  conscientiously  for 
the  public  good,  whatever  his  race  or  color. 

Mob  Law.    Mob  law  is  the  shame  of  the  South.    The  | 
author  speaks  as  a  Southern  man.    That  it  is  frequently  f 


152  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

called  into  action  in  Northern  states  does  not  lessen  its 
heinousness  in  Southern  communities.  It  is  inhuman 
and  is  utterly  without  excuse  or  foundation.  No 
offense  warrants  such  outlawry.  The  perpetrators  of 
such  community  crime  are  almost  entirely  men  without 
property  and  social  standing.  In  a  few  instances  there 
have  been  exceptions  and  the  substantial  men  have  been 
swept  off  their  feet  by  hypnotic  and  hysterical  excite- 
ment. Mob  law  had  its  origin  in  the  days  when  there 
was  little  else  and  when  the  public  resisted  the  author- 
ities which  they  did  not  choose.  It  is  the  archaic  re- 
mains of  a  false  method  of  punishment.  The  spirit  of 
the  South  is  set  to  put  an  end  to  such  procedure.  The 
occasional  outbursts  of  such  a  journal  as  that  of  Chi- 
cago that  in  1915  poured  out  its  vituperations  upon  the 
South  can  only  bring  heartaches  and  resentment.  The 
South  knows  the  enormity  of  this  crime,  whether  com- 
mitted within  its  borders  or  in  some  Northern  com- 
munity, and  in  no  way  condones  it.  Its  chief  concern 
is  how  to  make  it  impossible.  Such  a  social  sin  must 
be  put  away  by  the  preaching  and  practise  of  social 
righteousness.  In  1915,  under  the  leadership  of  Presi- 
dent C.  M.  Bishop  of  Southwestern  University 
(Texas),  an  organization  of  Southern  college  presi- 
dents was  formed  with  the  avowed  purpose  of  conduct- 
ing campaigns  of  education  against  this  social  evil  until 
it  has  been  wiped  out  or  reduced  to  the  minimum. 

Railroad  Injustice.  Another  form  of  social  injustice 
is  found  in  the  provision  made  by  the  railroads  in  the 
cars  for  Negroes.  These  railroads  are  not  Southern 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  153 

owned  except  in  small  part.  In  all  the  Southern  States, 
excepting  Missouri,  there  are  laws  requiring  the  separa- 
tion of  Negroes  from  all  others  in  the  railroad  cars 
just  as  they  have  laws  requiring  the  separation  of  the 
races  in  the  public  schools.  In  all  except  Missouri, 
Maryland,  and  Kentucky  a  similar  law  exists  for  street- 
cars. This  law  insures  seats  for  Negroes  on  crowded 
cars,  as  the  white  person  cannot  take  the  seat  provided 
for  the  Negro  any  more  than  the  Negro  can  take  the 
seat  provided  for  the  white  person.  Frequently  Negro 
men  have  had  seats  on  street-cars  while  white  women 
stood,  as  the  women  could  not  have  taken  them  had  they 
been  vacated.  However,  it  is  frankly  confessed  that 
the  purpose  of  the  law  is  not  to  insure  seats  to  either 
race  but  to  separate  the  races  in  the  seating.  Gentle- j 
men  in  the  South  surrender  their  seats  to  women  in' 
the  cars.  On  the  trains  the  accommodations  for 
Negroes  are  not  the  equal  of  those  for  white  people, 
although  there  is  no  difference  in  the  price  of  the  tickets. 
The  day  must  speedily  come  when  railroads  will  not  be 
permitted  to  charge  first-class  fare  for  second-class 
accommodations,  though  the  latter  be  for  Negroes.  If 
cars  are  to  be  of  poorer  quality,  made  of  wood  while  the 
others  are  of  steel,  if  the  white  persons  are  to  have 
smokers  and  non-smokers  while  the  Negroes  have  only 
the  one  for  all,  if  the  cars  are  to  have  less  conveniences 
and  be  given  less  attention,  if  discrimination  in  accom- 
modations is  to  be  made,  then  the  cost  of  the  ticket 
should  be  less.  If  the  price  is  to  remain  the  same,  then 
the  white  public  must  insist  that  the  Negro  passengers 


154  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

receive  equal  accommodations  with  the  white  pas- 
sengers. The  protest  has  been  entered.  A  statute  may 
be  necessary  to  make  it  effective,  but  it  will  not  be 
long  delayed  if  the  social  conscience  does  not  respond 
to  the  stimulus  now  being  applied. 

Municipal  Fairness.  Politicians  in  the  South  have 
won  many  votes  by  advocating  that  the  public  moneys 
be  divided  in  proportion  to  the  direct  contributions  to 
the  treasury  by  the  respective  races.  This  accounts  for 
the  fact  that  the  school  fund  has  not  always  been  fairly 
divided.  Who  does  not  know  that  the  Negro  fre- 
quently makes  for  the  white  man  the  taxes  which  he 
pays  in  ?  The  white  man  pays  many  taxes  whose  bur- 
dens rest  upon  the  black  man's  shoulders.  Inequalities 
in  the  administration  of  school  funds  are  manifest 
enough  but  inequalities  in  the  distribution  of  other 
municipal  funds,  for  parks,  streets,  driveways,  and 
•'  libraries,  are  more  glaring.  Civic  improvements  reach 
l  the  black  man  last.  The  Negro  cannot  choose,  as  can 
the  white  man,  the  community  in  which  he  lives.  St. 
Louis  on  February  29th,  1916,  adopted  an  ordinance 
by  a  vote  of  three  to  one  that  no  Negro  can  become  a 
resident  in  a  block  occupied  entirely  by  white  people.  It 
voted  another  which  imposes  the  same  restrictions  in 
blocks  containing  75  per  cent,  white.  Life  for  him 
would  be  most  uncomfortable  if  not  intolerable  on  the 
avenue  in  any  city  where  only  the  well-to-do  white 
people  live,  whatever  might  be  his  income  or  the  ele- 
gance of  his  home  and  the  refinement  of  his  family. 
Social  restraints  make  that  impossible.  Shall  he  have 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  155 

the  benefit  of  a  well-kept  neighborhood  among  his  own 
people,  with  parks  for  his  family,  good  streets  and  j 
tasteful  houses?  Social  conscience  cannot  be  indifferent  ' 
to  these  just  claims  of  a  people  who  must  depend  upon 
white  people  for  their  realization.     To  secure  fairness 
in  these  matters  may  require  agitation  before  councils 
and  commissions  and  the  authorities  by  which  they  are 
made  possible. 

j.  Institutional 

Almshouses.  Have  you  ever  visited  the  almshouse 
to  which  the  poor  of  your  community  are  sent?  Is 
the  superintendent  fit  for  the  place,  knowing  what  the 
social  conscience  should  require  and  anxious  to  care 
properly  for  those  in  his  charge,  or  is  he  illiterate, 
crude,  rough,  and  without  knowledge  as  to  how  such 
a  place  should  be  kept?  Is  the  house  and  are  the 
premises  kept  clean,  sanitary,  and  inviting?  Are  all 
the  inmates  idle,  or  is  some  useful  toil  provided  and 
suited  to  the  physical  abilities  of  the  inmates?  Are 
there  any  children  there?  Any  feeble-minded?  Any 
insane?  Are  tramps  allowed  to  stop  there  for  a  few 
weeks  and  then  to  go  on?  Are  old  couples  separated 
when  their  circumstances  force  them  there?  Have 
inadequate  bathing  facilities  been  provided  ?  These  are 
personal  questions,  and  every  reader  should  be  called 
upon  to  find  out  conscientiously  and  minutely  the 
answers  to  them.  They  may  belong  specially  to  a 
committee  on  social  service,  but  no  one  should  evade 


156  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

them.  In  1910  there  were  over  16,000  inmates  in  the 
almshouses  of  the  South.  Probably  one  half  of  them 
should  have  been  in  altogether  different  institutions. 
The  blind,  the  deaf,  the  insane,  the  children,  and  the 
feeble-minded  should  be  in  institutions  for  their  kind. 
The  common  county  poorhouse  is  usually  so  poorly 
conducted  as  to  bring  disgrace  upon  the  public.  It 
should  be  abolished.  Almshouses  should  be  state  or 
district  homes,  one  for  each  congressional  district.  The 
counties  could  support  their  inmates  in  that  district 
home.  That  would  insure  adequate  shelter,  warmth, 
food,  and  clothing  and  give  the  humble  poor  moral, 
social,  and  physical  protection  and  necessary  medical 
attention.  Old  couples  could  be  given  some  considera- 
tion. The  sexes  could  be  kept  separate.  The  tramp 
would  be  kept  out.  The  classes  not  eligible  could  be 
sent  where  they  will  get  the  needed  treatment.  The 
usual  almshouses  of  the  Southern  States  are  bringing 
reproach  and  multiplying  social  problems.  There  is 
need  of  reform,  and  it  should  not  be  long  delayed. 
The  first  essential  is  information ;  the  second  is  agita- 
tion; the  third  will  be  reformation.  To  grow  old  is 
no  disgrace;  to  be  poor  is  no  crime.  Homes  for  the 
aged  and  infirm,  marked  by  tenderness,  sweetness, 
and  respect,  representative  of  the  communities  that 
build  and  maintain  them,  should  be  the  demand  of  good 
people  everywhere. 

Humanity  in  Jail.  An  ecclesiastical  body  was 
shocked  and  stirred  by  a  report  one  of  its  own  com- 
mittees recently  made  of  the  jails  and  asylums  within 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  157 

its  territory.  No  state,  county,  or  municipality  has 
the  right  to  commit  even  a  criminal,  and  much  less  only 
an  accused,  to  a  cell  of  disease  germs.  The  public  may 
be  guilty  of  crime  if  it  permits  the  existence  of  deadly 
conditions  in  institutions  in  which  it  confines  the 
members  of  its  society.  The  state  should  not  make  a 
school  of  vice  and  death  of  its  prisons  and  asylums.  In 
many  jails  the  insane  are  frequently  kept  because  the 
state  has  failed  to  provide  sufficient  room  in  an  asylum. 
In  jails  frequently  juvenile  offenders  have  been  put 
with  hardened  criminals.  The  social  conscience  is 
beginning  to  be  awakened,  but  action  has  been  slow. 
Christian  people  should  become  sensitive  to  these  con- 
ditions, inform  themselves  thoroughly,  and  act  promptly 
in  presenting  vigorously  their  demands  upon  the  public 
authorities.  Politicians  usually  hold  the  positions  of 
supervision  and  control,  but  they  are  always  amenable 
to  the  asserted  wishes  of  their  constituency  and  will 
carry  them  out  rather  than  suffer  defeat  by  another  set 
who  will  do  so.  The  trouble  to-day  is  with  the  indif- 
ferent good  people  who  leave  the  criminal  to  the  police- 
man, the  constable,  the  jailer  and  prison  guard.  Usu- 
ally the  social  conscience  of  these  officials  needs  reen- 
forcement  from  those  who  are  intelligently  interested 
in  the  redemption  of  men  for  earth  as  well  as  heaven. 
The  author  has  seldom  attended  a  service  in  a  Negro 
church  without  hearing  a  prayer  for  those  in  prison, 
but  very  rarely  has  he  ever  heard  such  a  petition  in  a 
white  church.  Jesus  spoke  of  being  visited  in  prison, 
but  the  average  man  and  woman  know  nothing  of  the 


158  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

prisons  for  which  they  are  morally  responsible.    Is  this 
neglect  without  harm  to  society? 

Winning  Them  Back.  The  magic  word  in  criminal 
procedure  and  punishment  is  reform.  Men  are  giving 
earnest  thought  to-day  to  measures  for  reducing  crime 
and  vice  and  also  to  means  and  methods  for  reform- 
ing criminals.  Juvenile  courts  and  probation  officers 
are  of  recent  origin.  Reformatories  or  schools  for  de- 
linquent boys,  and  others  for  girls,  are  in  all  the  states. 
The  lease  convict  system  is  practically  abolished  be- 
cause of  -its  hardening  effect  on  the  prisoners.  Schools 
and  libraries  have  been  established  and  installed  in  prac- 
tically all  the  Southern  state  prisons.  In  many  states 
the  farm  has  been  substituted  for  the  factory.  Pris- 
oners in  some  Southern  states  are  building  the  new 
public  highways.  Sentiment  is  rapidly  growing  in 
favor  of  doing  away  with  county  jails  as  places  of  pun- 
ishment and  substituting  a  system  of  district  farms  in 
which  a  few  contiguous  counties  will  join.  Fresh  air 
and  wholesome  exercises  may  not  be  denied  even  the 
criminal  class.  The  indeterminate  sentence  and  the 
parole  are  becoming  common  because  they  arrest  crim- 
inality and  redeem  many  criminals.  There  is  an 
increasing  demand  that  accused  defendants  should  .not 
be  made  to  languish  in  jail  awaiting  the  session  of  an 
itinerant  court  that  comes  two  to  four  times  a  year,  but 
that  provision  should  be  made  for  the  convening  of 
some  court  by  which  the  trial  may  be  immediate  and 
speedy.  This  would  increase  the  respect  for  the  courts 
and  thereby  diminish  crime.  There  is  also  an  increas- 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  159 

ing  demand  that  the  administration  of  law  shall  be 
impartial  as  well  as  humane.  The  poor,  the  black,  the 
alien  should  feel  as  sure  of  justice  as  the  rich  or  the 
most  influential  white  man.  "Man's  inhumanity  to 
man  makes  countless  thousands  mourn."  This  is  an 
age  when  "man's  inhumanity"  is  being  decidedly  re- 
duced. "The  soft  answer  turneth  away  wrath."  Crime 
must  be  reduced,  but  not  by  crime — public  or  private. 
Softness  must  be  avoided,  but  love  is  God's  method  of 
saving  man.  Society  is  responsible  for  some  of  the 
criminality  because  of  its  neglect.  Society  must  now 
care  for  its  own. 

Removing  Poverty.  Poverty  is  a  social  evil  curable 
by  getting  at  its  causes  and  destroying  them.  Is  poverty 
an  accident  of  human  life,  or  is  it  the  harvest  of  eco- 
nomic injustice,  social  maladjustment,  and  individual 
iniquity?  If  the  former,  then  reduce  the  occasion  for 
such  accidents.  Safety  first  must  be  the  universal 
warning.  If  the  latter,  then  there  must  be  economic 
and  social  reconstruction  and  protection  against  the 
snares  that  entrap  men.  The  great  reproach  of  Great 
Britain  in  recent  years  has  been  her  enormous  army  of 
unemployed,  her  neglected  fields,  and  her  outrageous 
drunkenness.  The  great  boast  of  Germany  has  been 
her  removal  of  all  poverty  and  the  provision  of  gainful 
employment  for  all  her  subjects.  The  organized  charity 
of  our  cities  is  commendable,  necessary,  and  deserves 
adequate  support,  but  a  socialized  public  will  ask,  Who 
made  the  poor?  and,  Will  men  always  be  poor?  Is 
some  factory  or  employer  responsible?  Are  the 


160  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

brewery  and  distillery  responsible?  If  the  latter,  de- 
stroy it;  if  the  former,  regulate  it.  Is  the  lack 
of  public  health  protection  responsible?  Shall  a  man 
be  allowed  to  make  himself  and  his  family  objects  of 
abject  poverty  ?  Hitherto  men  have  thought  of  poverty, 
as  of  crime,  as  individual,  but  now  they  are  beginning 
to  think  of  both  as  largely  social.  There  is  enough  food 
and  raiment  in  the  world  to  make  every  inhabitant  com- 
fortable. Can  the  proper  distribution  be  made?  That 
is  a  very  difficult  matter,  but  not  an  impossible  achieve- 
ment. Christianity  has  put  the  spirit  into  men  to  work 
this  out  and  they  have  entered  upon  the  task.  It  is 
wholly  and  thoroughly  Christian — even  the  thought  of 
the  possibility  of  such  an  achievement.  Men,  life,  rela- 
tionships, society,  government,  must  be  redeemed.  That 
is  the  impelling  conviction  of  men  to-day,  and  all  efforts 
are  being  directed  by  that  spirit.  The  human  task  is 
impossible  without  the  superhumanly  divine  power. 
The  sense  of  the  supernatural  brings  an  exalted  estimate 
of  the  value  of  human  life.  This  new  spirit  does  not 
lessen  interest  in  the  other  life,  not  far  ahead  for  any, 
but  it  creates  the  sense  of  colaboring  with  God. 

Saving  in  Transit.  Who  has  not  seen  at  the  railroad 
stations  when  the  trains  come  in  the  eager-eyed  woman 
in  black  uniform  with  a  broad  sash  or  badge  bearing 
those  life-saving  words,  "The  Traveler's  Aid"?  That 
means  a  mother  heart  on  guard  when  the  daughter 
walks  in  uncertainty.  That  is  not  rescue ;  it  is  preven- 
tion. Avarice  has  in  recent  years  been  guilty  of  "com- 
mercialized vice."  Many  young  women  coming  to  the 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  161 

city  in  answer  to  an  advertisement  or  a  correspondence 
have  dropped  out  of  sight  into  dens  fashioned  by  human 
tigers.  "Traveler's  Aid"  means  "There  is  danger!  be 
sure  you  are  right ;  if  you  are  not  sure,  ask  me."  There 
is  no  cost ;  the  service  is  free  to  all,  irrespective  of  age, 
race,  creed,  class,  or  sex.  When  one  of  these  sentinels 
of  virtue  and  honor  is  seen  there  is  but  one  thing  to 
think — "the  mother  heart  is  on  guard."  At  the  immi- 
grant stations  in  the  great  ports  of  this  country  the 
churches  have  on  guard  similar  persons  to  help  the 
bewildered  stranger — the  new  American  to  be — and  to 
protect  him  or  her  from  the  human  sharks  who  would 
take  everything  without  a  twinge  of  conscience.  Here 
the  tongues  speak  poorly,  but  the  hearts  understand. 
Saving  in  transit  is  this.  The  time  to  watch  is  before 
the  treasure  is  gone.  What  is  the  meaning  of  child 
welfare  associations,  child  labor  laws,  the  children's 
bureau,  and  numerous  societies  whose  labors  are  for  the 
preservation  of  the  purity  and  beauty  of  life?  This  is 
society's  service  to  society,  and  human  service  to  hu- 
manity. 

4.  Domestic 

Housing.  Men  who  live  in  glass  houses  learn  the 
folly  of  throwing  stones.  Persons  dressed  in  their 
"Sunday  clothes"  avoid  sitting  down  in  muddy  and 
grimy  places,  but  not  so  when  in  overalls.  People  are 
fashioned  in  no  small  measure  by  the  houses  they  live 
in.  Houses  like  clothes  have  a  psychological  as  well  as 
a  physiological  effect.  The  urban  Negro  population  is 


162  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

forced  to  live  in  poorly  built,  unsanitary,  and  frequently 
dilapidated  dwellings,  on  filthy  and  neglected  streets 
and  even  alleys,  and  in  an  atmosphere  permeated  by 
vice.  Herding  will  make  animals  of  men.  Abominable 
as  the  housing  facilities  are,  the  Negroes  are  compelled 
to  pay  exorbitant  rent.  Shacks  and  cabins  are  con- 
sidered fine  investments.  When  will  the  social  con- 
science rebel  at  such  injustice  to  the  Negroes  and  such 
gross  mischief  to  the  coming  generations?  On  the 
plantations  the  tenants'  quarters  are  even  worse  than  in 
the  towns  and  cities.  But  such  conditions  are  not  con- 
fined to  Negro  communities.  Jacob  Riis  spent  a  good 
portion  of  his  great  life  fighting  the  tenements  of  New 
York.  Every  town  and  city  needs  a  Jacob  Riis.  The 
plantations  and  the  mountain  hollows  need  a  gospel  of 
adequate  housing.  The  housing  of  a  factory  or  mining 
population  will  affect  their  economic  efficiency,  their 
social  integrity,  and  their  intellectual  and  moral  develop- 
ment. The  problem  of  humanity  is  in  no  small  degree 
the  problem  of  a  home,  and  housing  has  much  to  do 
with  the  home. 

The  Home.  The  trend  of  life  in  the  South  is,  like 
that  in  the  North,  toward  the  weakening  of  the  home. 
When  Southern  people  lived  on  the  farm  there  were 
few  divorces,  but  in  the  Southern  city,  as  in  other  cities, 
the  customs  are  loose  and  the  divorce  rate  is  large  and 
on  the  increase.  The  divorces  in  the  United  States 
number  about  80,000  a  year,  or  fifty  per  cent,  more  than 
all  the  rest  of  Christendom.  Divorce  is  increasing  in 
this  country  three  times  as  fast  as  the  population.  Shall 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  163 

this  continue?  Sixty  per  cent,  of  all  the  inmates  in 
orphanages  are  from  homes  broken  by  divorce.  Where 
is  the  trouble?  Marriage  has  been  in  too  many  cases 
a  matter  of  commerce.  Young  women  have  married 
for  support,  for  luxury,  for  publicity,  for  social  posi- 
tion in  a  gay  and  silly  world,  and  they  do  not  make 
homes.  Too  many  child  marriages  for  stable  home  life 
— 5,000  annually  of  persons  under  sixteen,  and  that 
multiplied,  under  eighteen.  The  helpmeet  idea  is  taken 
all  too  seldom  into  account.  Home  religious  worship 
is  grossly  neglected  and  the  religious  instruction  of 
children  is  left  in  many  instances  almost  entirely  to 
institutions.  Home  attractions  have  decreased  as  public 
amusements  have  increased.  The  town  and  city  encour- 
age idleness  and  wasteful  entertainment  in  women  and 
children.  Idlers'  resorts  and  clubs  for  women  as  well 
as  men  are  too  common  for  the  cultivation  of  home 
atmosphere.  Passionate  love  for  the  home  is  no  longer 
the  rule.  An  alarm  should  be  sounded.  The  home  is 
in  danger.  With  the  decay  of  the  home  comes  the 
deterioration  of  the  nation  and  the  rule  of  the  stranger. 
Disease.  The  South  has  enlisted  with  enthusiasm 
and  determination  in  the  war  upon  preventable  disease. 
Of  the  600,000  persons  who  die  in  the  United  States 
of  preventable  disease — 600,000  who  might  have  lived 
had  science  and  humanity  cooperated  in  the  fight — one 
third  are  in  the  South.  The  truth  about  tuberculosis 
with  its  enormous  annual  toll  of  190,000  lives  and  an 
expense  account  of  one  billion  dollars  is  out,  and  the 
anti-tuberculosis  leagues  are  making  it  known  every- 


164  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

where.  Fresh  air  and  sunlight  are  being  used  as  never 
before.  Hygiene  and  sanitation,  pure  water  and  pure 
milk,  death  and  quarantine  to  flies  and  mosquitoes, 
market  inspection  and  dairy  supervision,  school  inspec- 
tion by  physicians  and  dentists,  have  all  rightly  become 
slogans  in  the  new  campaign  for  health.  The  state, 
county,  and  city  boards  of  health  are  becoming  vital 
factors  in  the  prevention  of  disease.  Many  of  the 
people  are  still  ignorant  of  what  is  possible  under  the 
direction  of  preventive  medicine,  the  most  beneficent 
of  all  scientific  achievements.  They  are  addicted  to 
drugs,  and  as  Dr.  William  Osier  says  of  people  in  gen- 
eral they  "just  naturally  want  to  swallow  medicine." 
Of  the  $75,000,000  spent  in  the  United  States  annually 
for  patent  nostrums,  the  South  spends  its  share  for 
these  concoctions  of  burnt  sugar,  cheap  alcohol,  cheap 
drugs,  and  water.  An  active  health  crusade  is  now  on 
to  reduce  the  use  of  drugs,  to  set  up  barriers  against 
the  plagues  which  spread  through  the  social  body,  to 
create  a  public  conscience  in  regard  to  health  and  to 
quicken  and  enlighten  it  where  it  does  exist,  to  rally 
everywhere  moral  purpose  and  intelligence  to  the  sup- 
port of  local,  state,  and  national  health  agencies.  Such 
a  crusade  is  worthy  of  hearty  support  The  Southern 
Sociological  Congress  is  leading  this  campaign  in  the 
South.  The  churches  are  being  called  upon  to  give 
assistance  through  public  utterances,  teaching  services, 
with  constructive  programs,  and  cooperation  with  local 
hygienic  surveys,  and  they  will  do  well  to  respond 
loyally.  There  is  no  public  interest  so  great  as  public 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  165 

health.  Disease  is  an  economic  liability,  a  social 
scourge,  a  moral  waste.  Social  responsibility  is  no- 
where greater  than  in  the  crusades  for  the  banishment 
and  prevention  of  disease,  and  in  the  stimulation  of  all 
activities  that  will  bring,  maintain,  and  promote  health. 
Temperance  and  Prohibition.  The  South  recognizes 
no  greater  cause  of  disease  and  poverty  than  intemper- 
ance. For  twenty-five  years  the  temperance  advo- 
cates have  been  numerous,  strong,  and  persistent.  The 
temperance  and  prohibition  movement  has  been  a  moral, 
if  not  a  religious  movement,  led  for  the  most  part  by 
ministers  and  other  religious  workers.  Of  the  sixteen 
Southern  States  ten  now  have  state-wide  prohibition 
and  very  large  parts  of  the  remaining  six  are  under 
local  option  laws.  The  states  having  state-wide  pro- 
hibition are  Alabama,  Arkansas,  Georgia,  Mississippi, 
North  Carolina,  South  Carolina,  Oklahoma,  Tennessee, 
Virginia  and  West  Virginia.  Of  the  fifty  counties  of 
Florida,  forty  are  dry.  On  January  i,  1915,  there  were 
only  321  saloons  in  the  state  and  they  were  in  fifteen 
towns  and  cities.  The  prohibition  amendment  received  a 
majority  of  the  white  vote  in  1910,  but  the  Negroes,  as 
is  usually  the  case,  defeated  the  amendment.  Kentucky 
has  the  local  option  law  and  has  106  counties  of  118 
totally  dry  and  only  three  counties  totally  wet.  One 
half  of  the  parishes  (counties)  of  Louisiana  are  dry 
under  the  parish  local  option  law.  Maryland  has  no 
general  local  option  law  but  many  of  the  counties  have 
voted  on  the  liquor  question  by  virtue  of  special  acts  of 
the  legislature  and  as  a  result  thirteen  of  the  twenty- 


i66  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

three  counties  are  now  without  saloons.  Missouri  has 
77  of  its  114  counties  dry  under  a  local  option  law. 
The  temperance  forces  in  that  state  of  strong  breweries 
have  an  almost  unbroken  chain  of  local  option  victories 
to  their  credit  during  the  last  four  or  five  years.  The 
temperance  forces  are  confident  of  an  early  important 
victory.  Texas  has  220,000  square  miles  of  dry  terri- 
tory, or  177  of  the  249  counties.  Fifty-two  counties 
are  without  saloons,  except  in  one  or  two  places  each. 
Twenty  counties  only  are  entirely  open  to  saloons  and 
they  are  along  the  Mexican  border  or  where  immigrants 
are  numerous.  The  native  white  inhabitants  of  the 
Southern  States  will  make  all  the  states  dry  at  the  first 
opportunity.  But  South-wide  prohibition  is  not  far 
ahead.  To  this  and  nation-wiide  prohibition  social 
responsibility  commits  all  the  people. 

Meeting  the  Demand.  Social  responsibility  is  not  an 
ecclesiastical  preserve  but  it  awaits  a  moral  if  not  a 
religious  motive.  Social  service  is  too  large  a  task  for  it 
all  to  be  attempted  in  the  name  of  the  Church.  Educa- 
tion is  a  social  responsibility,  the  establishment  of  hos- 
pitals, asylums,  almshouses,  and  orphanages  is  a  very 
necessary  social  service,  but  these  cannot  all  be  under- 
taken by  the  Church  as  an  organization.  But  if  the 
Church  does  not  produce  in  men  a  Christianity  that  will 
eventuate  in  actual  and  constant  service  of  this  kind 
some  serious  question  may  be  raised  as  to  the  efficiency 
of  the  Church.  Humanitarianism  is  not  Christianity; 
but  Christianity  that  does  not  produce  the  fullest,  broad- 
est and  purest  humanitarianism  is  spurious.  Social 


SOCIAL  ENDEAVOR  167 

settlements,  district  nursing,  pure  milk  stations,  public 
free  dispensaries,  well-supervised  public  gymnasiums 
and  baths  are  necessities  in  cities  in  this  age.  Who  shall 
provide  them?  The  Church  must  at  least  promote 
them.  Civic  righteousness,  economic  justice,  social 
health  must  have  sponsors  somewhere.  If  all  else  is 
silent,  has  not  the  Church  a  voice  with  a  duty  to  make 
it  heard?  If  the  poor  man,  black  or  white,  is  being 
imposed  upon  in  the  courts,  in  the  city  provisions,  in 
the  housing  which  he  must  accept,  in  the  law  of  the 
land,  in  the  customs  of  society,  shall  the  Church  be 
dumb?  The  brotherhood  of  man  was  never  proclaimed 
as  the  brotherhood  of  rich  men,  or  club  men,  or  lodge 
men.  The  redemption  of  men  is  the  business  of  the 
world.  Lifting  the  level  of  human  living  is  a  sacred 
and  blessed  duty  which  Christian  men  heartily  welcome. 
Christianity  has  a  message  of  life  to  the  individual  soul. 
"The  church  is  set  for  the  rebirth  of  souls,  for  the  re- 
making of  men,  for  the  imparting  of  divine  capacity, 
for  the  revelation  of  moral  and  spiritual  dynamics,  to 
lead  into  the  line  of  a  new  and  blessed  ancestry,"  as 
Dr.  Jowett  has  said.  But  what  may  be  expected  of 
men  in  whom  this  experience  has  been  wrought 
if  not  the  Christianization  of  the  society  in  which  they 
live?  The  social  responsibility  of  the  South  is  large 
and  difficult,  but  the  numbers  who  have  felt  its  weight 
and  are  endeavoring  to  meet  its  demands  are  increasing 
at  a  rapid  rate. 


CHAPTER  VII 

RELIGIOUS  LIFE  AND  PROTESTANT 
FORCES 

J.  Characteristics 

Religion  Primary.  The  Puritan  pilgrims  came  to 
America  to  find  a  religious  home  where  they  would  be 
unmolested  in  their  tenets  and  mode  of  worship.  Their 
contribution  to  the  character  and  force  of  American' 
life  has  been  beyond  any  human  ability  to  estimate. 
They  made  the  entire  nation  their  debtor.  The  Virginia 
settlers  may  have  come  in  the  interest  of  their  fortunes 
rather  than  in  obedience  to  their  consciences,  yet  they 
were  not  wanting  in  strong  religious  convictions,  and 
their  first  act  upon  landing  on  the  soil  of  the  New 
World  was  to  worship  Almighty  God  according  to  the 
rites  of  the  Church  of  England,  with  an  old  sail  hung 
to  "shadow  them  from  the  sun"  and  a  "bar  of  wood 
nailed  in  neighboring  trees  as  a  pulpit."  Theirs  was 
the  beginning  of  the  religious  life  which  has  character- 
ized the  southern  colonies  and  states  from  that  time 
until  this  day.  The  Spanish  established  numerous  mis- 
sions and  settlements  from  1536  onward,  but  none  of 
them  made  any  worthy  or  lasting  contribution  to  the 
civilization  or  Ohristianization  of  the  United  States  of 

169 


i  ;o  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

America.  The  settlements  were  failures  and  the  mis- 
sions became  as  lost  streams  in  a  desert.  It  is  well  for 
the  Southern  land  that  it  was  so.  The  settlement  at 
Jamestown  saw  the  real  beginning  of  American  Chris- 
tianity and  American  civilization.  The  colonists  were 
strict  in  their  religious  requirements,  as  may  be  seen 
in  their  legislation.  In  Hening's  Statutes  at  Large  will 
..'  be  found  Acts  of  the  General  Assembly  of  Virginia 
which  assessed  penalties  for  drunkenness,  for  profan- 
ing God's  holy  name,  for  desecrating  the  Sabbath-day, 
or  for  failure  to  attend  Church  service;  and  "to  deny 
the  being  of  God,  or  the  Trinity,  or  assert  that  there  are 
more  Gods  than  one,  or  to  deny  the  Christian  religion 
to  be  true,  or  the  Scriptures  to  be  of  divine  authority 
subjects  the  offender  for  the  first  offense  to  incapacity 
to  hold  any  office,  and  for  the  second  to  disability  to 
sue,  and  disqualification  to  be  a  guardian  or  executor, 
or  to  take  any  gift  or  legacy;  and  moreover  he  shall  be 
incapable  of  bearing  any  office  and  shall  suffer  three 
years'  imprisonment."  The  person  convicted  might  be 
discharged  from  the  penalties  by  renouncing  these  opin- 
ions within  six  months.  In  the  early  days  of  the  colony 
there  was  a  statute  that  "No  man  above  the  age  of 
seventeen  years  shall  have  the  benefit  of  the  laws  whose 
name  is  not  recorded  as  a  member  of  some  church,  or 
religious  profession."  In  the  charters  of  the  Southern 
colonies  the  propagation  of  the  gospel  was  emphasized 
as  one  of  the  reasons  for  planting  them. 

Religious  Conservatism.    Religion  has  had  primary 
consideration  in  the  life  of  the  South.    From  colonial 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  171 

times  to  the  present  the  people  of  the  South  have  been 
notably  religious.  They  have  been  and  are  homogene- 
ous and  largely  Anglo-Saxon,  and  as  might  be  expected 
the  religious  movements  of  Great  Britain  having  found 
favorable  conditions  in  the  South,  the  Church  life, 
beliefs,  and  polity  of  the  mother  of  the  colonies  were 
easily  transferred  to  Southern  soil.  The  people  are 
conservative,  as  a  homogeneous  and  rural  people  usually 
are,  and  as  a  result  the  religious  movements  and 
churches  have  not  been  unduly  multiplied,  but  have  kept 
rather  closely  to  the  great  denominations  which  have 
molded  civilization.  The  people  have  been  and  are 
strongly  evangelical  in  their  faith  and  the  South  has 
been  and  is  the  stronghold  of  orthodox  Christianity  in 
this  country.  The  independentism  of  New  England, 
springing  out  of  the  spirit  of  the  Puritan  settlers,  with 
all  its  sturdiness  and  beneficence,  has  given  rise  to  many 
peculiarities  of  beliefs  and  Church  life,  and  made  New 
England  the  birthplace  of  divisions,  odd  sects,  and 
religious  vagaries.  The  South  has  felt  the  controlling 
influence  of  ecclesiastical  government  through  Scotch 
Presbyterianism  and  the  Episcopal  systems  of  the  Prot- 
estant Episcopal,  Roman  Catholic,  Baptist,  and  Meth- 
odist organizations.  Government  brings  and  sustains 
the  sense  of  authority  which  affects  thought  as  well  as 
action.  The  independent  is  a  stimulant  to  new  thought 
and  ready  activities,  but  the  man  with  relations  renders 
in  the  long  run  the  larger  service.  Conservatism  is 
not  a  hindrance  except  when  tied  to  dead  issues.  In 
religion  it  may  so  greatly  magnify  the  far  past  and  the 


THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

actors  and  methods  of  ancient  days  as  to  lose  its  appeal 
to  the  men  who  are  molding,  and  being  molded  by,  the 
present.  Sanity,  the  ability  to  measure  values,  the 
dominant  purpose  to  get  and  apply  the  truth,  and  the 
passion  for  life  will  stabilize  and  impel  men  to  the 
best  thought,  faith,  and  service.  These  are  not  possible 
with  an  iconoclastic  independentism  or  a  blind  and 
dogged  devotion  to  antiquity,  but  they  are  possible  in 
a  progressive  conservatism.  -The  orthodoxy  of  the 
South  is  not  far  from  this  middle  realm  and  is  a  strong 
support  to  the  best  religious  life  and  thought  of  the 
nation. 

Religious  Mind.  The  attitude  of  the  Southern 
people  toward  religion  is  positive,  fervent,  and  vital. 
Their  prevailing  idealism  and  natural  warm-hearted- 
ness form  a  basis  for  a  strong  religious  faith  and  back- 
ground for  lively  religious  experience.  The  Celtic 
strain  in  their  blood  prepares  them  for  healthy  emotion- 
alism, and  the  Scotch  element  furnishes  the  inclination 
to  theological  thinking.  The  Huguenot  devotion  and 
the  Church  of  England  correctness  add  to  the  enthusi- 
asm for  fervent  piety  and  to  the  regard  for  the  orderly 
in  worship.  The  type  of  religious  life  is  influenced  by 
the  predominance  in  any  community  of  any  one  of 
these  original  factors.  There  are  twenty  millions1  in 
the  South  outside  of  a  religious  organization,  but  the 
large  percentage  of  these,  in  fact  practically  all  of  them, 
have  the  highest  respect  for  the  Church  and  great  cor- 
diality toward  religion.  The  skeptic  is  rare,  and  the  out- 

1  See  note  on  page  209. 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  173 

spoken  enemy  of  the  Church  and  religion  is  seldom 
seen.  With  the  growth  of  industrialism  and  the  indus- 
trial populations  that  are  subject  to  certain  socialistic 
views  the  criticisms  of  the  Church  are  more  frequent 
and  more  severe.  This  is  due  in  large  part  to  their 
neglect  of  the  Church  and  the  Church's  neglect  of  them, 
and  also  'to  certain  influences  that  have  come  in  with 
a  certain  type  of  industrial  leaders.  The  native-born 
people  of  the  South  are  all  favorably  disposed  toward 
Christianity  and  the  Church. 

Evangelical.  The  theological  vagaries  that  afflict 
some  sections  of  the  country  have  not  found  any  great 
hold  in  the  South.  The  isms  that  prevail  in  some  dis- 
tricts owe  their  origin  and  success  to  ignorance,  and 
they  pass  with  the  spread  of  general  intelligence  and 
a  faithful  seed-sowing  of  gospel  truths.  They  are 
evidences  of  neglect  on  the  part  of  the  Church.  The 
supernatural  in  religion  is  so  universally  accepted  as 
to  make  it  practically  impossible  for  a  mere  human- 
itarian faith  to  make  any  headway.  Men  want  God, 
the  God  of  their  fathers,  and  God  as  incarnated  in  Jesus 
Christ.  There  is  no  conflict  here  over  the  deity  of 
Jesus.  Historical  criticism  has  had  rough  treatment  at 
the  hands  of  those  who  thought  its  purpose  was  the 
overthrow  of  belief  in  the  supernatural,  in  revelation, 
and  in  the  superhuman  in  Jesus  Christ.  The  scholar- 
ship, however  scientific  and  thorough,  that  minimized 
the  divine  elements  in  religion  and  life  has  been  dis- 
counted in  public  esteem.  The  people  will  not  have 
their  religious  foundations  disturbed  nor  their  faith 


174  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

diluted  by  extraneous  doctrines.  This  state  of  mind 
furnishes  a  bed-rock  for  the  building  of  strong  relig- 
ious life. 

Religious  Liberty.  The  orthodoxy  of  the  South  has 
in  no  way  restrained  freedom  of  religious  thought. 
Tolerance  it  must  be  confessed  was  not  a  prominent 
virtue  of  the  early  colonists  of  this  country,  North  or 
South.  While  the  established  Church  was  anything 
but  friendly  to  dissenters,  it  is  also  true  that  the  dis- 
senters were  no  more  kindly  disposed  to  those  who  dis- 
sented from  them.  Roger  Williams,  though  a  separate 
ist,  was  forced  from  the  Massachusetts  Colony.  So 
non-Episcopal  colonists  were  practically  driven  from 
Virginia  into  Maryland,  the  Carolinas,  and  elsewhere. 
But  the  Rev.  Francis  Makemie,  the  great  Scotch  Pres- 
byterian, became  the  apostle  of  religious  liberty  and  did 
not  a  little  in  securing  the  passage  of  the  Toleration  Act 
in  1699.  After  1732,  dissenters,  both  Baptists  and 
Presbyterians,  poured  into  the  great  valley  of  Virginia 
and  became  an  influential  and  forceful  body  of  citizens. 
The  English  considered  the  enjoyment  of  religious 
ordinances  established,  maintained,  and  defended  by  the 
state,  undisturbed  and  unawed  by  any  foreign  power, 
to  be  religious  liberty.  The  Scotch-Irish  understood 
religious  liberty  to  mean  choice  of  doctrines  of  belief, 
forms  of  worship,  and  ordinances  of  religion  and  they 
required  the  undisputed  and  undisturbed  exercise  of 
this  choice  confirmed  to  every  member  of  society  and 
defended  by  law.  The  Shenandoah  Valley  and  the  ad- 
jacent Appalachian  regions  became  the  cradle  of  relig- 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  175 

ious  liberty  from  which  went  forth  a  strong  religious 
life  to  bless  the  entire  South.  It  is  true  that  the  Vir- 
ginia statute  of  religious  liberty  can  be  traced  to 
Thomas  Jefferson,  George  Mason,  George  Wythe,  and 
Edward  Pendleton  who  were  vestrymen  in  the  Estab- 
lished or  Episcopal  Church,  yet  the  memorial  of  the 
Presbytery  of  Hanover  of  1776  contained  the  principles 
declared  in  Jefferson's  "Bill  for  Establishing  Religious 
Freedom"  of  a  year  later.  The  Baptists  also  had  a 
leading  part  in  this  struggle  for  religious  freedom  and 
because  of  their  constant  agitation  many  of  them  suf- 
fered in  prison.  But  no  law  can  rid  any  people  entirely 
of  religious  intolerance.  "Think  and  let  think,"  John  \ 
Wesley's  injunction  to  his  associates,  is  impossible  with 
a  certain  type  of  mind.  Some  people  are  so  constituted, 
or  so  trained,  that  they  can  see  no  possibility  of  any  one 
being  right  or  having  the  truth  who  differs  from  them. 
They  become  confident,  assertive,  bigoted,  intolerant. 
They  will  sit  in  judgment  on  individuals  or  denomina- 
tions that  do  not  sound  their  shibboleth.  All  sections 
have  such  men,  and  perhaps  they  are  no  more  numerous 
in  the  South  than  elsewhere.  Southern  churchmen 
respect  authority  and  give  allegiance  to  faithful  and 
intelligent  leaders,  but  they  cannot  be  restrained  in  the 
freedom  of  religious  thought  and  action. 

Evangelistic.    Nothing  has  been  more  characteristic 
of  the  religious  life  of  the  South  than  its  evangelistic  * 
zeal  and  activities.     The  Wesleyan  revival  that  swept 
England  for  fifty  years,  beginning  about   1740,  was 
duplicated  in  a  smaller  way  in  the  American  colonies.  ) 


1 76  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

The  Rev.  George  Whitefield  became  as  well  known  by 
his  incomparable  eloquence  and  evangelistic  fervor  in 
America  as  in  England,  and  his  dust  lies  in  New- 
buryport,  Mass.  The  Methodist  itinerants,  led  by 
Francis  Asbury,  Jesse  Lee,  and  William  McKendree, 
were  all  evangelists  and  kindled  religious  flames  wher- 
ever they  went.  The  camp-meetings  with  the  brush 
arbors  became  necessities,  and  the  scenes  of  great 
revival  influence.  The  Baptists  were  not  less  zealous 
nor  less  effective.  The  temperament  of  the  Southern 
people  responded  readily  to  the  evangelistic  appeal, 
being  in  this  respect  like  their  English  progenitors. 
The  unritualistic  and  evangelistic  churches  rapidly  at- 
tached the  great  rural  population  of  the  South  and  have 
held  it  to  this  day,  and  as  the  rural  population  soon 
became  the  body  of  the  population  of  the  towns  and 
cities  of  the  South  the  evangelistic  spirit  and  method 
have  been  perpetuated.  Revivals  are  by  no  means  out  of 
date  yet,  except  in  churches  where  they  would  be  prac- 
tically impossible  on  account  of  the  state  of  the 
religious  life.  The  Methodist,  Baptist,  Presbyterian 
churches,  and  the  Disciples  of  Christ  are  promoting 
revival  work  in  the  South  to-day  more  systematically, 
diligently,  and  perhaps  effectively  than  ever  before. 
Camp-meetings  are  still  held,  but  the  need  for  them  has 
lessened  and  their  value  has  diminished.  The  city-wide 
revival  with  an  evangelist  at  the  center  is  not  so  com- 
mon as  formerly,  but  that  church  is  the  exception 
which  goes  a  year  without  some  special  protracted  evan- 
gelistic services.  These  efforts  have  kept  religion  a 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  177 

vital  force.  The  warm  belief  in  the  fundamentals  of 
the  Christian  faith  has  been  renewed.  Worldliness  has 
received  its  stern  rebuke.  New  life  has  been  brought 
into  the  Church  by  the  quickening  zeal  of  redeemed 
men  and  women.  A  religious  glow  is  brought  to  all 
the  activities  of  the  church.  The  outside  world  has  felt 
the  tugging  at  its  sinful  life  of  those  who  would  f  g 
bestow  a  Savior's  love.  Evangelism  is  the  restorer  of 
vital  godliness  and  the  promoter  of  Christianity  in 
earnest. 

2.  Denominational  Forces 

Denominationalism.  Denominationalism  has  served 
well  its  purpose  in  the  religious  development  of  the 
South,  notwithstanding  the  fact  that  there  has  not 
always  been  that  manifestation  of  fraternity  and  mutual 
respect  which  should  characterize  religious  bodies. 
There  have  been  fierce  forensic  combats  over  the  doc- 
trines peculiar  to  each  denomination.  Predestination 
and  baptism  have  furnished  the  occasion  for  many  a 
royal  debate.  Baptists  and  the  Disciples  of  Christ  have 
done  yeoman  service  in  the  interest  of  immersion,  while 
the  Methodists  and  Presbyterians  have  vigorously  de- 
fended sprinkling  and  pouring  as  proper  modes  of 
baptism.  Occasionally  the  Methodists  and  Presbyter- 
ians have  clashed  over  Calvinism  and  Arminianism. 
The  day  of  the  debate  is  about  gone.  The  people  have 
found  that  debates  settle  nothing.  They  have  answered 
these  questions  for  themselves  by  reading  and  study. 
General  intelligence  has  brought  about  mutual  denom- 


1 78  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

inational  regard.  The  denominational  bully  has  no 
place  in  polite  Church  society.  The  churches  are  exhib- 
iting more  and  more  an  interest  and  a  joy  in  each  other's 
growth  and  are  becoming  allies  in  the  common  defense 
of  truth  and  common  warfare  upon  iniquity. 

South's  Responsibility.1  There  are  about  24,000,000 
/  members  of  the  various  Protestant  Churches  in  the 
United  States,  and  of  these  between  10,000,000  and 
11,000,000  are  in  the  South.  The  South  has  34  per 
cent,  of  the  population  and  about  44  per  cent,  of  the 
Protestant  church-membership.  More  than  forty  per 
cent,  of  the  Protestant  membership  in  the  South  are  in 
the  Southern  Baptist  and  Southern  Methodist  Churches, 
while  another  forty  per  cent,  are  in  Negro  Baptist  or 
Negro  Methodist  Churches.  These  figures  indicate 
where  the  heaviest  responsibility  must  necessarily  lie 
for  the  Christianization  of  the  Southern  States.  This 
responsibility  is  missionary,  evangelistic,  educational, 
and  doctrinal.  If  a  broad,  comprehensive,  constructive 
policy  is  to  be  carried  out,  the  churches  have  it  with 
them  to  give  it  force,  direction,  and  effectiveness.  Nar- 
rowness of  thought  and  purpose,  indifference  to  relig- 
ious movements  and  present  needs,  inertness  before 
the  conditions  in  the  country,  the  mountains,  and  the 
city,  with  the  belated,  the  neglected,  and  the  late  arrival 
would  be  disastrous  to  the  highest  interest  of  Southern 
civilization  and  its  Church  life.  For  this  reason  the 
churches  that  touch  all  sections  of  the  nation  are  wel- 


1  Appendix  E  contains  valuable  information  about  the  various  denominations  of 
the  South. 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  179 

come,  especially  if  they  bring  the  open-mindedness,  the 
sympathetic  feeling,  the  broad  conceptions,  the  con- 
structive purpose  and  ability  which  the  South,  and  every 
section,  must  have  in  this  era.  The  largest  service  which 
churches  having  their  headquarters,  and  for  the  most 
part,  their  leadership  and  membership  in  Northern 
states  can  render  the  people  of  the  South,  must  come 
through  the  influence  which  they  exert  upon  the  leader- 
ship, thought,  and  policy  of  the  churches  that  are  largely 
Southern.  The  relations  which  the  Northern  and 
Southern  churches  bear  to  each  other  are  vital  in  the 
new  religious  developments  of  the  South.  Had  there 
existed  through  the  last  fifty  years  that  sympathy, 
trustfulness,  mutual  respect,  and  consideration  which 
churches  of  whatever  sections  should  at  all  times  enter- 
tain for  each  other,  much  bitterness  and  heartache 
would  have  been  avoided  and  the  kingdom  of  God 
would  have  been  more  efficiently  served.  Through  such 
bodies  as  The  Federal  Council  of  the  Churches  of 
Christ  in  America,  the  Home  Missions  Council,  and  the 
Conference  of  Foreign  Mission  Boards,  this  fine  spirit 
is  being  brought  about  more  and  more,  and  all  sections 
will  be  the  gainers  thereby.  The  author  entertains  the 
hope  that  cooperation,  which  is  so  greatly  needed  and 
desired  by  many  so  much,  will  plainly  characterize 
the  future  work  of  Churches  in  this  country. 

5.  The  Program  of  Protestantism 

One  Objective.    While  there  are  ten  to  eleven  mil- 
lions of  Protestant  church  members  in  the  South,  or 


i8o  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

'f  .slightly  more  than  thirty  per  cent,  of  the  entire  popula- 
tion, it  must  be  remembered  that  four  millions  of  these 
are  Negroes,  and  in  their  present  state  of  economic, 
intellectual  and  social  development  they  are  not  in  a 
position  to  contribute  very  largely  to  the  religious  influ- 
ence and  force  of  Protestantism  except  in  their  own 
race.  More  than  that,  the  Negro  religious  leader  still 
needs  help,  and  much  of  it  While  the  Negro  is  notably 
and  demonstrabiy  religious,  yet  he  is  not  always  intelli- 
gently and  practically  Christian.  There  are  large  and 
increasing  numbers  of  them  who  have  an  intelligent  and 
forcible  hold  on  the  great  teachings  of  Christianity,  but 
the  masses  mix  much  superstition  with  their  emotions 
and  produce  a  religion  which  is  far  removed  from  that 
of  developed  humanity.  Protestantism  is  under  the 
keenest  and  most  exacting  responsibility  to  give  to  the 
Negroes  a  correct,  competent,  and  gripping  Christianity 
which  will  be  satisfying  to  them  and  a  developing  force 
in  the  life  of  the  race.  This  must  be  accomplished 
through  their  own  religious  leaders.  The  Negro  school 
or  institution  now  most  needed  is  that  which  will 
strongly  equip  Negro  religious  leaders  to  work  through 
the  denominations  of  their  choice  and  the  institutions 
which  will  make  successful  appeals  to  their  sentiments, 
aspirations,  and  capabilities.  These  men  need  prac- 
tical training  for  the  most  difficult  and  exacting  service. 
The  Protestantism  of  the  South  and  that  working1  in 
the  South  must  keep  in  mind  this  objective  in  making 
out  the  larger  program  of  service. 

Romanism.    Romanism  offers  another  objective  to 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  181 

responsible  Protestantism.  According  to  the  Cath- 
olic Directory  there  is  a  Roman  Catholic  population 
of  2,088,227  in  the  South,  one  cardinal,  three  arch- 
bishops, twenty-three  bishops,  and  2,838  priests.  The 
only  hope  Romanism  has  of  making  any  large  increase 
is  through  immigration.  Romanism  loses  thousands  of 
its  population  every  year,  some  through  indifference 
and  some  through  conversion  to  evangelical  Christianity 
and  a  personal  Christian  experience.  Of  course  some 
Protestants  go  to  Romanism,  mostly  through  marriage, 
but  the  number  is  not  large.  Romanism  cannot  make 
any  headway  with  any  community  that  has  enjoyed  the 
white  light  of  genuine  forceful  evangelical  Christianity. 
Its  hope  of  getting  any  hold  in  the  South  is  in  the 
immigration  of  the  Irish  from  the  North  or  the  immi- 
gration of  the  Italian,  Austrian,  and  Mexican.  It 
has  made  and  is  making  strenuous  efforts  to  secure 
the  Negro,  but,  as  the  Rev.  Lucian  Johnston,  a  Roman 
Catholic  priest,  in  a  written  article  says:  "the  Negro 
does  not,  as  yet,  seem  very  amenable  to  Catholicism.'" 
In  a  few  cities  like  Baltimore,  New  Orleans,  Natchez, 
and  Washington  there  are  some  flourishing  Negro 
Roman  Catholic  congregations,  but  outside  of  the  two 
former  dioceses,  "the  percentage,"  as  Mr.  Johnston  says, 
"of  Negro  Catholics,  is  low."  But  what  of  the  Roman- 
ists themselves?  Protestantism  believes  that  Roman- 
ism is  full  of  error  and  that  its  teachings  are  perversions 
of  the  Christian  truth,  and  that  ecclesiastical  hier- 
archy would  if  able  greatly  limit  if  not  destroy  all  relig- 
ious freedom  and  put  all  political  organization  and 


182  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

government  under  the  dominance  of  their  own  head  at 
Rome.  The  immigrants  who  come  to  the  Southern 
States  show  unmistakably  the  evil  effects  of  Roman 
Catholicism  upon  them  in  Mexico,  Italy,  Austria, 
southern  Germany,  or  wherever  its  power  has  been 
undisputed.  Should  not  Protestantism  gird  itself  for 
more  than  a  passive  resistance  to  this  menace  to  evan- 
gelical Christianity,  public  school  education,  and  that 
freedom  of  religious  life  which  is  the  heart  of  all 
liberty?  Protestantism's  advance  must  meet  the  en- 
trenched forces  of  Rome.  But  Romanism  is  not  to  'be 
vanquished  by  assaults,  and  if  that  were  possible  such 
action  is  unchristian.  "The  weapons  of  our  warfare  are 
not  carnal,  but  mighty  through  God  to  the  pulling  down 
of  strongholds."  Protestantism  must  win  in  the  future 
as  in  the  past  by  light,  truth,  love,  and  the  power  of  the 
Christ-life  in  its  adherents,  and  ultimate  triumph  is 
assured  if  these  are  unquestionably  evident. 

Organize  for  Work.  The  man  who  decries  machinery 
or  organizations  is  usually  the  man  who  cannot  organize 
organizations  and  speak  power  into  machinery.  The 
more  developed  humanity  becomes,  the  more  organiza- 
tion becomes  .a  necessity.  But  machinery  is  worthless, 
and  even  worse,  if  it  is  not  used  for  the  purpose  for 
which  it  was  created.  Church  machinery  and  Church 
life  to<lay  are  idle  and  weak  as  compared  with  their 
possibilities,  because  the  pulpit  and  the  pew  require  too 
little  of  each  other.  The  minister  is  compelled  to  con- 
sume too  much  time,  physical  force,  and  mental  and 
spiritual  vitality  in  attending  to  small  matters,  which 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  183 

cannot  be  neglected,  but  which  members  of  the  pew 
should  take  charge  of.  The  helplessness  of  laymen, 
who  are  superbly  efficient  in  business,  in  the  usual  work 
of  the  ordinary  church  is  pitiable.  Why  this  helpless- 
ness ?  No  effort  nor  program  has  been  carried  out  to 
make  every  member  of  the  church  capable  of  doing 
well  at  least  some  one  task.  This  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  church  has  been  looked  upon  as  a  shelter,  a 
safety-device,  instead  of  the  organism,  the  "body"  of 
our  Lord,  for  bringing  the  kingdom  of  God  to  all  men 
and  every  man.  A  little  group  hold  the  offices  and  form 
all  the  committees.  "One  church,  noted  for  having 
nearly  every  member  a  worker,  presents  to  every  per- 
son who  joins,  a  card  having  nine  distinct  lines  of  work  \ 
indicated.  The  new  member  may  choose  one  or  two 
of  the  lines  of  work,  and  then  a  regular  church  officer 
charged  with  that  duty  inducts  the  new  member  into 
the  work  which  he  or  she  has  chosen."  Ninety  per  cent., 
if  not  more,  of  all  church-members  can  say  with  Mrs. 
Browning,  "I  have  not  used  half  the  powers  God  has 
given  me."  Roads  in  Rural  Christendom  says  that  "one 
half  of  the  members  of  the  majority  of  the  churches 
have  no  churchgoing  habit,  two  thirds  contribute  very 
little  to  the  income,  three  fourths  do  not  go  to  any 
service  between  Sundays,  five  sixths  have  little  or  no 
interest  in  general  Church  work  or  in  missions,  take  no 
Church  paper,  and  attend  no  conventions,  nine  tenths 
do  no  work  for  the  church  either  in  teaching,  public 
prayer,  administrative  or  benevolent  work,  or  any  other 
work  that  means  real  service,  and  ninety-five  out  of  a 


j84  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

hundred  never  led  a  soul  to  Christ  nor  ever  did  any 
personal  work  of  a  soul-winning  character."  How  can 
there  be  power  in  the  Church  with  such  conditions? 
Surely  he  is  right  when  he  says :  "The  next  great  move- 
ment of  Christendom,  therefore,  will  be  the  develop- 
ment of  the  local  church."  By  the  pew  has  too  long 
been  meant  the.  sitting  part  of  the  church,  that  com- 
pliments the  preacher  by  listening  to  him.  The  power 
in  such  a  pew  is  meager  and  is  usually  going  to  waste 
through  an  earth  connection.  The  pew  needed  is  one 
that  receives  wireless  messages  and  transmits  Divine 
currents. 

Every  Member.  The  every  member  canvass  is  the 
best  product  of  the  Laymen's  Missionary  Movement. 
Every  member!  Put  the  emphasis  on  every  member 
for  everything.  Every  member  contributes  to  the  sup- 
port of  the  church,  every  member  contributes  to  mis- 
sions and  every  other  benevolence,  every  member  in 
vital  connection  with  the  Sunday-school  through  some 
department,  every  member  studying  the  Bible  every  day, 
every  member  known  to  every  member  of  the  local 
church,  every  member  engaged  in  some  department  of 
church  work,  every  member  a  soul-winner  seeking  to 
"win  one"  in  every  campaign,  every  member  reaching 
the  church  or  the  church  reaching  him  or  her  every 
week.  Every  member!  A  member  that  cannot  help 
the  church  should  be  helped  by  the  church.  How  can 
this  state  be  brought  about?  Begin  with  the  willing 
ones  as  the  center  and  work  out  from  them  and  through 
them.  A  Christianized  church  with  a  program  that  is 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  185 

centralized  upon  actually  preaching  the  gospel  to  every 
creature  in  reach  of  the  church,  privately  if  not  publicly, 
is  the  hope  of  reaching  the  twenty  millions1  in  the  South  ; 
who  have  no  connection  with  religious  organizations.  / 
This  is  the  meaning  of  missions. 

Missions  Defined.  By  missions  is  usually  meant 
some  set-off  and  set-up  religious  activities  which  are 
carried  on  by  some  paid  workers  who  wear  halos  and 
live  hard  lives.  But  that  is  not  what  missions  should 
mean.  Missions  is  the  plural  of  mission.  What  is  the 
mission  of  the  Church?  The  young  people  in  the 
country  are  greatly  interested  in  mission  work  in  the 
city.  The  city  young  people  are  consumed  with  the 
rural  problem.  The  Southern  young  people  are  sup- 
porting a  mission  in  Africa.  The  Northern  young 
people  are  exercised  over  the  Negro  of  the  South.  The 
fearful  religious  conditions  in  New  York,  Chicago, 
and  San  Francisco  stir  the  people  of  the  South  while 
the  Southern  mountaineer  brings  sighs  and  some  coin 
from  the  Northern  church-member.  New  England  is 
as  much  a  mission  field  to-day  as  the  South,  or  the 
West.  Christianizing  New  England,  the  South,  the  I 
West,  and  the  North  as  well,  would  have  the  greatest 
possible  effect  in  evangelizing  the  Orient  or  Latin 
America.  The  South  must  come  to  realize  that  her 
neglected,  illiterate,  morally  destitute,  and  religiously 
delinquent  peoples  are  her  first  abiding  obligation. 
Nine  million  Africans,  three  hundred  thousand  helpless 
hill  people,  one  hundred  thousand  Indians,  one  million 

1  See  note  on  page  209. 


i86  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

foreigners,  and  her  immense  agricultural  population 
with  inadequate  church  facilities,  are  cause  enough 
for  religious  home  industries.  The  plans  of  Protestant- 
ism in  the  Southern  States  must  embrace  a  great  mis- 
sionary propaganda  in  this  great  field.  Dr.  W.  R. 
Harper  once  said:  "America  is  the  world's  greatest 
mission  field  because  of  what  it  is  and  what  it  is  to  be." 
The  Southerner  may  well  get  the  same  conception  of 
his  own  territory.  In  recent  years  this  feeling  has  taken 
strong  hold  on  the  people  of  the  South  and  they  are 
beginning  to  formulate  a  program  of  service  in  har- 
mony with  this  conviction. 

Evangelistic.  The  evangelistic  program  of  the 
Churches  in  the  South  is  very  definite  and  comprehen- 
sive, and  is  being  diligently  and  successfully  carried  out. 
The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  the  Presbyterian 
Church  in  the  U.  S.  A.,  and  the  Disciples  of  Christ  have 
commissions  on  evangelism  that  reach  in  their  work  the 
Southern  States.  The  Disciples  have  many  evangelists 
at  work  in  all  the  South.  The  Southern  Baptists  have 
a  regular  secretary  of  evangelism  and  employ  27  evan- 
gelists who  are  under  the  direction  of  their  Home  Mis- 
sion Board.  The  salaries  of  these  evangelists  are  paid 
out  of  an  evangelistic  fund.  They  go  to  individual 
churches,  sometimes  in  squads  to  cities  for  a  simultan- 
eous campaign  and  sometimes  to  a  state  for  a  simul- 
taneous campaign.  Last  year  they  held  305  meetings, 
delivered  9,219  sermons  and  addresses,  baptized  12,673 
persons  and  received  4,384  into  the  church  by  letter  and 
otherwise.  The  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  187 

States  has  a  superintendent  of  evangelism  who  labors 
with  the  advice  and  assistance  of  the  Executive  Com- 
mittee of  Home  Missions.  Thirty-nine  of  the  eighty- 
five  Presbyteries  have  committees  on  evangelism  and 
thirty-eight  have  evangelists.  The  superintendent  will 
have  associated  with  him  a  corps  of  evangelists  who 
will  be  at  the  service  of  the  Church.  A  sub-committee 
on  evangelism  is  giving  the  work  strong  encouragement 
and  support.  The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  South, 
has  a  Committee  on  Evangelism  appointed  by  the  Board 
of  Missions  that  labors  under  the  direction  of  the 
Department  of  Home  Missions,  and  of  which  the  Secre- 
tary of  Home  Missions  is  the  administrative  officer. 
Conference  committees  on  evangelism  have  been  ap- 
pointed in  all  the  forty  conferences  to  promote  revival 
work  within  their  respective  territories.  Regular  itin- 
erant preachers  may  be  appointed  General  or  Confer- 
ence evangelists  upon  the  recommendation  of  the  Gen- 
eral or  Conference  Committee  respectively.  There  are 
now  fifteen  General  evangelists,  and  forty-five  Confer- 
ence evangelists  in  the  field.  Independent  evangelists 
must  have  the  approval  of  the  committee  on  evan- 
gelism of  the  Conference  within  which  they  reside,  be- 
fore they  can  act  as  evangelists.  A  Methodist  Evangel- 
ists' Association  has  been  formed  which  is  bringing  the 
evangelists  and  the  committees  on  evangelism  into  closer 
relations  with  each  other.  Great  evangelistic  campaigns 
are  now  conducted  in  all  parts  of  the  South.  Personal 
evangelism,  or  "one-to-win-one-evangelism"  is  being 
used  with  most  gratifying  results.  Evangelism  in  the 


1 88  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

South  is  a  prominent  feature  of  the  work  of  all  the 
Churches. 

Social  Service.  No  program  of  Protestantism  would 
be  complete  in  this  day  without  proper  emphasis  on 
community  service.  There  are  those  who  will  oppose  it 
because  it  seems  new,  and  others  because  they  think  it 
means  a  lessening  of  the  stress  on  revivalism,  but  a 
little  time  and  successful  service  will  bring  the  proper 
view-point.  There  is  not  so  great  need  in  the  South 
for  institutional  churches,  social  settlements,  dispen- 
saries, day  nurseries,  orphans'  homes,  and  hospitals  as 
in  the  Northern  cities,  but  there  is  enough  to  bring  into 
existence  these  institutions  and  they  are  finding  favor 
and  very  little  criticism.  "Soup  and  Soap"  becomes  the 
cynic's  slogan  sometimes  but  when  salvation  follows 
the  criticism  falls.  The  larger  community  program  for 
the  rural  church  and  for  the  factory  districts  is  being 
regarded  as  a  necessity  and  it  is  being  introduced  in 
many  places.  The  social  gospel  may  not  be  receiving 
the  same  emphasis  in  the  South  as  in  the  North  but  it 
is  by  no  means  being  neglected.  Protestantism  dare 
not  neglect  it  anywhere  if  it  means  to  carry  to  all  men 
the  fullness  of  the  gospel  benefits.  The  Southern 
Churches  have  general,  conference,  sy nodical,  and  state 
committees  on  social  service  that  are  promoting  and 
giving  direction  to  the  movement. 

Church  Service.  The  Church  service  of  the  South 
exhibits  the  characteristics  of  the  people  in  many  re- 
spects. It  is  simple,  cordial,  and  unconventional.  The 
people  do  not  want  manuscript  sermons  read  or  recited, 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  189 

and  it  is  very  seldom  that  a  sermon  is  read  from  any 
pulpit  on  any  occasion.  They  object  to  any  large 
amount  of  formality  and  ceremony.  They  demand  a 
simple  order  of  service  in  which  the  sermon  shall  be  the 
chief  part.  They  do  not  want  elaborate  ritual  services 
on  any  occasion.  They  do  not  approve  lectures  in  the 
pulpits  when  sermons  are  to  be  delivered.  Let  lectures 
come  from  the  platform  at  their  own  proper  time. 
Yet  the  esthetic  is  enjoyed,  but  the  esthetic  in  simple 
forms.  The  South  has  suffered  greatly  in  the  rural 
churches  and  even  in  the  towns  and  villages  by  the 
almost  exclusive  use  of  gospel  songs,  with  the  excep- 
tion of  the  Lutherans  and  the  Episcopalians.  Thirty 
to  forty  years  ago  only  hymns  were  used,  but  the 
Moody  and  Sankey  meetings  put  the  gospel  songs  into 
circulation  and  especially  into  revival  services.  They 
were  left  for  the  Sunday-schools  and  gradually  came 
into  use  in  the  public  worship.  The  present  mature 
generation,  with  their  childhood  in  those  early  gospel 
song  days,  has  never  used  extensively  the  standard 
hymns  and  to-day  they  are  almost  unable  to  do  so. 
There  is  no  greater  need  to-day  in  the  Southern  Church 
life  than  the  development  of  hymn  singing  in  country 
and  village  churches.  The  present  condition  is  pitiable. 
The  country  singing-master  is  still  to  be  found  in  some 
rural  sections.  The  all  day  "singing"  is  by  no  means 
unusual  in  some  of  these  communities  and  the  "classes" 
come  together  from  a  large  territory.  These  singing- 
masters  use  cheap  books  with  doggerel  verse  and  rag- 
time tunes.  The  churches  will  do  well  to  make  friends 


190  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

of  the  singing-masters,  develop  them  for  a  higher  serv- 
ice and  make  provision  for  the  training  of  all  communi- 
ties in  the  use  of  worthy  church  hymns  and  music.  In 
the  larger  towns  and  cities  standard  hymns  and  an- 
thems are  in  constant  use,  with  competent  choirs  to 
give  leadership  and  special  service.  Efforts  to  make  the 
church  the  community  center  are  being  multiplied,  but 
still  larger  effort  must  be  made  if  the  young  people 
are  to  be  enlisted  for  the  service  which  the  church  can- 
not do  without.  The  young  people's  societies  reach 
only  a  small  percentage  of  the  young  people,  but  from 
this  small  percentage  have  come  the  religious  workers 
in  the  towns  and  cities  and  many  of  the  younger  min- 
isters and  missionaries.  The  mid-week  prayer-meeting 
services  are  poorly  attended  and  are  generally  lacking 
in  inspiration  or  any  great  helpfulness.  The  Sunday 
night  service  in  the  city  is  almost  in  every  case  a  bur- 
den to  the  minister  and  the  faithful  few.  In  the 
country  there  is  seldom  any  night  service.  In  the  small 
town  and  village  the  Sunday  night  service  is  the  most 
interesting  and  best  attended  of  the  day.  There  is  need 
for  an  interdenominational  commission  to  make  a  study 
of  the  mid-week  and  Sunday  night  services  and  make 
some  suggestions  to  the  Church  bodies  as  to  what  is  to 
be  done  with  them  or  in  them.  No  pastor  feels  free, 
or  is  free,  to  act  alone,  and  there  is  some  doubt  as  to 
the  advisability  of  one  denomination  acting  alone,  but 
some  profitable  joint  action  might  be  possible.  At 
least  the  present  state  of  things  needs  to  be  changed. 
Two  Foes.  The  two  things  from  which  Christianity 


PROTESTANT  FORCES  191 

and  the  Church  have  suffered  most  in  the  South  are 
narrow,  belligerent  sectarianism  and  shallow  evangel- 
ism. Sectarianism  is  the  degenerate  product  of  vigor- 
ous denominationalism,  which  is  the  outgrowth  of 
assertive  evangelicalism.  Where  two  or  more  denom- 
inations holding  the  great  fundamental  evangelical  doc- 
trines become  competitors  in  a  community  for  favor- 
able consideration  they  very  naturally  emphasize  their 
differences.  Emphasis  on  trifles  will  make  trifles  out 
of  essentials  and  allow  the  fundamental  principles  of 
faith  and  life  to  be  slightingly  regarded.  This  neglect 
of  education  in  the  realities,  the  elemental  verities  of 
Christianity  is  responsible  for  the  springing  up  of  re- 
ligious vagaries  and  the  side-tracking  to  isms.  With 
this  comes  shallow  evangelism,  which  is  frequently 
without  a  message  of  strong  gospel  truth  and  must  de- 
pend on  violent  denunciations  of  worldly  practises  and 
vehement  efforts  at  promoting  overflowing  emotion, 
in  order  to  superinduce  the  religious  commotion  de- 
sired. The  effects  of  such  evangelism  are  not  lasting. 
The  Church  is  filled  in  this  way  with  a  throng  of  per- 
sons who  are  without  a  genuine  religious  experience. 
From  this  the  Church  suffers  to-day.  But  it  must  not 
be  understood  that  there  has  not  been  much  true  evan- 
gelism of  the  very  best  type,  and  this  type  is  becoming 
more  and  more  the  rule.  These  two  enemies  of  the 
highest  Church  life  are  passing  out,  but  their  evil  influ- 
ence in  the  past  has  been  wide  and  distressing. 

Cooperation.     Protestantism  is  going  forward  at  a 
fine  rate.    The  churches  are  progressive  and  aggressive. 


192  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

But  the  demands  are  increasing,  the  expectations  are 
growing,  and  not  t-o  improve  on  the  past  is  to  fail  to 
do  as  well.  Denominationalism  has  been  somewhat 
keen  and  competition  has  not  been  wholly  absent.  No 
criticism  of  the  past  would  be  in  place,  but  the  future 
should  show  a  new  spirit  of  cooperation  in  all  Church 
work  in  the  South.  Especially  is  this  true  in  the 
country  districts  where  the  communities  are  torn  with 
religious  strife.  That  is  evidently  a  paradox.  How 
can  strife  be  religious  and  how  could  real  religion 
develop  strife?  The  federated  church  would  not  be 
tolerated,  at  least  it  would  never  be  suggested.  The 
people  want  to  belong  to  something  bigger  than  such 
an  organization.  But  the  preachers  of  various  denom- 
inations who  minister  to  the  same  communities  should 
agree  upon  a  community  program  which  could  be  car- 
ried out  by  the  religious  people  as  a  whole  without  los- 
ing their  denominational  affiliations.  Ministers  should 
learn  to  preach  so  as  not  to  give  offense  to  persons 
holding  different  doctrinal  views.  That  does  not  mean 
that  they  should  be  silent  upon  their  denominational 
tenets.  They  should  explain  them,  but  in  doing  so 
not  discredit  and  try  to  discount  the  views  of  others. 
The  Golden  Rule  would  be  about  what  is  needed  in 
such  a  case  to  protect  all  concerned.  The  author  be- 
lieves that  nothing  would  so  reen force  Protestantism 
in  all  this  country  as  the  spirit  of  Christian  unity  and 
a  thoroughgoing  program  of  Christian  cooperation.  In 
girding  for  a  great  advance  the  girdle  of  cooperation 
will  give  strength,  beauty,  and  power. 


CHAPTER  VIII 

A  STRONGER  SOUTH  FOR  A  GREATER 
NATION 

J.     Girding  for  National  Service 

Sectionalism.  The  South  has  had  its  share  of  sec- 
tionalism and  has  suffered  the  curse  of  it.  But  the 
North  has  not  been  free  from  it,  while  the  East  and 
the  West  have  not  escaped  its  influence.  Frequently 
a  Northern  or  a  Southern  man  sees  it  in  the  other  but 
fails  to  recognize  it  in  himself.  There  is  a  kind  of 
sectionalism  which  is  not  offensive,  as  it  is  simply  love 
for,  pride  in,  and  devotion  to  one's  own  section.  Such 
may  become  the  means  of  high  and  honorable  life.  But 
sectionalism  that  takes  the  form  of  localism  and  de- 
velops the  provincial  state  and  character  of  mind,  erects 
a  barrier  against  the  fullest  participation  in  the  life  and 
thought  of  the  nation  as  a  whole.  It  cramps  and  con- 
fines the  sympathies,  energies,  and  activities  of  the 
people.  Such  sectionalism  tends  to  make  the  people 
narrow,  self -centered  and  even  self-sufficient.  It  some- 
times makes  people  incapable  of  being  just  in  their  esti- 
mate of  the  people  of  other  sections  and  blind  to  the 
delinquencies  of  their  own  section.  Such  sectionalism, 
whether  in  the  South,  New  England,  the  middle  North, 
or  the  West  has  been  a  corroding  element  in  the  temper 

193 


194  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

of  the  people  and  has  thereby  weakened  the  life  of  the 
nation.  Sectionalists  have  made  sectionalists.  Attacks 
have  stirred  people  to  a  counter  offensive.  But  the  day 
has  come  when  the  other  fact  is  seen — that  nationalists 
make  nationalists.  Discerning  recognition  of  each 
other's  difficulties  and  efforts,  and  intelligent  apprecia- 
tion of  each  other's  potentialities  and  purposes,  are 
opening  the  way  for  the  larger  national  activities  in 
which  sectionalism  will  be  reduced  to  the  minimum  and 
nationalism  will  become  the  supreme  unifying  force. 
Love  for  one's  state  and  section  is  legitimate  and  desir- 
able, but  provincialism  is  a  hindrance  to  any  people. 

Call  for  Nationalism.  The  Southerner  who  really 
loves  his  South  cannot  fail  to  see  that  the  day  has 
come  when  the  great  currents  of  national  life  must  have 
broad  and  free  channels  through  the  entire  body  of 
the  Southern  people.  It  must  be  confessed  that  many 
have  had  hitherto  very  few  great  vital  interests  beyond 
the  provincial  South.  The  ills  of  other  sections,  eco- 
nomic, social,  political  and  moral,  have  not  impressed 
the  Southern  people  that  they  were  national  and  there- 
fore their  own.  The  industrial  strife  in  the  North 
has  been  the  North's.  The  labor  lockouts,  the  social- 
istic agitation,  and  the  anarchistic  demonstrations  have 
been  the  North's  and  the  West's,  and  in  no  sense  the 
South's.  The  immigrant  problem,  floated  in  from  the 
ends  of  the  earth  with  the  incoming  of  vast  millions  of 
all  nationalities,  has  been  the  North's,  the  East's  and 
the  Northwest's.  Such  has  been  the  South's  thinking. 
But  it  is  false.  All  these  are  American  issues  that 


A  GREATER  NATION  195 

involve  the  fundamental  principles  of  national  life, 
and  as  such  they  will  influence  sooner  or  later  all  Amer- 
ican life  and  institutions.  There  is  nothing  that  affects 
any  part  of  this  nation  that  is  not  vital  to  the  South  and 
every  other  section.  Sectional  responsibility  is  itself 
not  sectional  but  national.  The  South  has  no  problem, 
social  or  political,  economic  or  moral,  that  is  not  of 
national  significance  and  of  national  concern.  The 
South  needs  better,  if  not  new,  correlation  with  other 
sections,  that  the  great  currents  of  the  new  national 
life  may  flow  more  freely  through  all  parts  of  this  great 
nation.  The  new  sense  of  national  responsibility  in 
world  relations  has  created  a  new  national  conscious- 
ness which  sends  sectionalism  to  the  refining  fires  to  be 
fashioned  into  a  patriotism  adequate  to  any  demands 
of  the  republic  or  humanity.  The  passion  for  a  greater 
South,  so  dominant  in  true,  fervent  Southern  hearts, 
must  find  its  highest  culmination  in  national  achieve- 
ment wrought  out  by  united  patriotic  endeavor. 

Promoting  Patriotism.  Patriotism  is  devotion  to 
the  welfare  of  one's  country.  That  devotion  should  be 
intelligent  as  well  as  sacrificial.  Every  citizen  should 
be  made  to  realize  that  this  nation  has  a  mission  in  the 
world,  a  human  task  to  perform,  a  spiritual  end  to 
reach.  Without  this  republic  the  world  would  be 
greatly  impoverished.  God  is  setting  forward  hu- 
manity through  the  instrumentality  of  the  United 
States.  Our  national  ideals  are  so  high  and  so  human, 
as  we  conceive  them,  that  no  true  American  would 
falter  one  moment  to  give  his  life  for  their  establish^ 


196  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

ment  and  preservation.  Patriotism  becomes  a  consum- 
ing passion  when  an  American  realizes  fully  what  his 
country  stands  for.  The  greatness  of  the  United  States 
is  in  its  ideals  as  much  as  in  its  achievements.  Only 
as  far  as  its  achievements  have  been  in  keeping  with 
the  ideals  of  the  founders  have  they  brought  luster  and 
real  power.  The  United  States  stands  for  more  than 
an  Eldorado  of  wealth.  In  wealth  there  is  power,  but 
the  highest  values  are  not  subject  to  the  mint.  The 
national  resources  may  be  turned  into  coin  and  cur- 
rency, but  unless  they  are  also  transmitted  in  great 
spirits  capable  of  lifting  a  generation,  they  become  as 
dust  and  ashes.  The  hope  of  a  country  is  in  the  fine 
idealism  that  inspires  its  actions  and  directs  its  move- 
ments. No  greater  service  can  be  rendered  a  nation 
than  the  generation  of  high  ideals  and  noble  purposes 
in  those  who  are  to  choose  its  leaders  and  decide  its 
policies.  Goodness,  honesty,  virtue,  and  righteousness 
become  national  when  wrought  into  citizenship.  The 
great  nation  is  possible  only  when  the  genuine  qualities 
of  the  best  human  life  become  determinative  in  its 
affairs.  Patriotism  is  moral  at  its  basis  and  is  pro- 
moted by  the  religious  motive.  The  greater  nation 
comes  with  increasing  progress,  as  those  who  make  it 
become  rooted  in  the  high  moral  and  religious  motives 
of  life. 

National  Service.  God  chose  Israel  for  a  world 
service,  to  be  limited  by  neither  space  nor  time. 
Through  Israel  as  a  vessel  the  human  race  has  received 
a  purified,  objectified,  and  unified  revelation,  divine  in 


A  GREATER  NATION  197 

content  and  priceless  in  value.  Has  not  God  chosen 
this  American  nation  to  make  known  this  revelation, 
interpret  into  living  acts  its  supreme  principles,  and 
apply  with  a  consistent  humility  the  divine  power  that 
attends  such  human  service  ?  Nations  speak  as  wholes 
and  not  as  parts.  The  impact  of  the  entire  republic 
may  be  determined  by  a  few  false  representations  but 
this  falsity  may  be  made  improbable  by  the  persistent 
righteousness  and  justice  of  all  the  sections.  How 
can  the  nation  be  made  a  great  missionary  for  genuine 
Christianity  however  or  whenever  the  nation  may 
speak?  What  America  is  in  "spirit,  manner,  and  action 
will  have  much  to  do  with  the  attitude  of  non-Christian 
peoples  toward  the  messages  of  Christian  missionaries. 
The  Christianization,  edification,  and  exaltation  of  a 
section  becomes  a  national  service  and  through  that  a 
world  service,  a  human  service.  Every  national  unit 
must  concern  itself  diligently  with  the  contribution 
which  it  may  be  brought  to  make  to  the  republic  and 
to  the  world. 

Political  Contribution.  The  South's  political  contri- 
bution to  the  strength  and  glory  of  the  nation  has  been 
large,  noteworthy,  and  illustrious.  The  very  conditions 
under  which  the  Southern  colonists  lived  and  those  into 
which  their  successors  were  thrust  ministered  to  their 
political  acumen  and  ability.  New  England  colonists 
were  primarily  religionists  and  their  great  subject  of 
thought  and  discussion  was  theology.  The  purposes 
of  God,  the  design  of  the  universe,  the  destiny  of  man, 
the  inner  meaning  of  a  multitude  of  texts  of  Scripture 


198  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

were  the  subjects  of  most  vital  interest  to  the  hard- 
headed  residents  of  the  village,  who  seemed  to  care 
less  about  the  conditions  of  the  world  in  which  they 
lived  than  of  that  to  which  they  looked  forward,  and 
as  a  result  New  England  produced  theologians.  In  the 
cavalier  settlements  of  Virginia  and  adjoining  colonies, 
there  was  continual  trouble  with  governors  and  other 
officials.  The  popular  subject  of  discussion  was  gov- 
ernment, and  politics  became  a  habit.  The  Scotch-Irish 
brought  with  them  such  a  sense  of  liberty  that  they 
were  restless  and  even  turbulent  under  wrong.  Ban- 
croft says  of  them:  "Any  government  but  their  own 
was  repression."  Another  writer  has  said  that  it  was 
the  practise  of  the  people  of  North  Carolina  to  resist 
and  imprison  their  governors.  When  Tryon  (the  royal 
governor)  raised  400  men  to  inflict  summary  punish- 
ment on  these  defiant  sons  of  liberty  they  hurriedly 
assembled  2,000  men  to  meet  him  and  some  without 
arms.  Here  was  fought  the  first  colonial  battle  in 
defense  of  popular  rights.  The  spirit  of  liberty  mani- 
fested itself  in  various  rebellions.  The  first  open  defi- 
ance of  George  III  was  sustained  by  the  Virginia  House 
of  Burgesses  in  the  passage  of  a  resolution  offered  by 
Patrick  Henry,  after  his  memorable  speech  in  St. 
John's  Episcopal  Church  in  Richmond,  where  the  ses- 
sion was  being  held.  Civil  liberty  was  the  chief  aspira- 
tion and  goal  of  these  Southern  colonists,  while  govern- 
ment was  their  chief  study.  The  revolutionary  period 
and  the  first  fifty  years  of  the  republic  saw  a  remark- 
able group  of  Southern  statesmen,  orators,  and  dip- 


A  GREATER  NATION  199 

lomatists.  The  author  of  the  Declaration  of  Independ- 
ence, the  commander-in-chief  of  the  Colonial  armies, 
the  "father"  of  the  constitution,  and  the  author  of 
the  Monroe  Doctrine  were  Southern  men.  Of  the  first 
twelve  Presidents  eight  were  Southern  men,  serving 
four  fifths  of  the  first  sixty  years  of  the  republic.  This 
unusual  service  indicates  how  great  was  the  political 
contribution  which  the  Southern  colonies  and  states 
made  to  the  establishment  of  the  principles  of  this  gov- 
ernment. Their  traits  and  views  were  transmitted  to 
the  later  leaders. 

Notable  Service.  The  Louisiana  Purchase,  the  ced- 
ing of  Florida  to  the  United  States,  the  acquisition  of 
Texas,  California,  and  the  other  vast  territory  in  the 
West,  the  purchase  of  Alaska  were  all  acts  of  the  ad- 
ministrations of  Southern  Presidents.  The  great 
Northwest  territory,  now  five  great  states,  was  the  gift 
to  the  nation  of  the  Southern  commonwealth  of  Vir- 
ginia. Only  the  Philippine  Islands  and  the  Canal  Zone 
were  acquired  under  Northern  men.  How  far  these 
administrations  were  responsible  and  are  to  be  cred- 
ited for  this  enlargement  of  the  national  domain,  no 
effort  is  made  to  show,  but  the  facts  are  interesting.  It 
was  John  Marshall,  a  Virginian,  the  great  chief  justice, 
who  planted  the  federal  constitution  upon  the  everlast- 
ing foundations.  Southern  men  have  been  Presidents 
during  every  war  that  has  vexed  the  nation,  even  to 
this  present  year,  except  the  Spanish- American  War, 
and  all  have  come  to  a  satisfactory  conclusion.  These 
may  have  been  coincidences,  but  Southern  people  may 


200  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

take  just  pride  in  these  historic  facts  in  that  they  show 
the  capabilities  of  their  leaders  when  entrusted  with 
great  national  interests.  The  Southern  soldier  has  been 
marked  by  courage,  dash,  and  effectiveness;  and  mili- 
tary leadership  has  lost  no  luster  in  the  hands  of 
Southern  officers.  This  recital  is  not  made  in  any 
spirit  of  boastfulness  but  for  the  purpose  of  showing 
the  possibilities  of  the  South. 

Political  Idealism.  Experience  with  colonial  govern- 
mentc  and  their  interminable  fight  for  civil  liberty  pro- 
duced in  the  very  blood  of  the  leaders  an  intense 
jealousy  of  the  rights  of  all  the  people.  It  may  have 
taken  the  form  of  state  rights,  or  local  self-government, 
or  individual  liberty,  but  the  South's  fight  has  been  for 
pure  democracy.  The  people  have  always  opposed  all 
legislation  for  the  benefit  of  any  special  class.  In 
recent  years  however  this  high  sense  of  governmental 
justice  has  not  been  so  marked,  and  men  have  been 
favored  for  Congress  because  they  could  get  appro- 
priations for  local  enterprises.  The  pork-barrel 
scramble  is  to-day  our  nation's  disgrace.  How  can 
any  man  who  employs  his  talents  to  any  large  extent  in 
such  service  be  or  become  a  genuine  statesman? 
"Dollar"  diplomacy  and  dollar  statesmanship  are  un- 
worthy of  a  great  people  who  have  a  world  mission  to 
give  all  people  an  enlarging  freedom  and  an  ennobling 
self-government.  The  American  people  must  contin- 
uously be  made*to-see  that  the  nation  is  in  danger  when 
material  interests  are  allowred  to  influence  civil  and 
human  responsibilities.  Rights,  responsibilities,  and 


A  GREATER  NATION  201 

service  must  be  central  in  national  thought.  Political 
idealism  has  sometimes  subjected  Southern  national 
leaders  to  the  taunts  and  criticisms  of  their  opponents 
that  they  lacked  political  efficiency.  These  were  largely 
unjust,  as  the  notable  service  and  enacted  legislation 
fully  prove,  but  the  fact  to  be  recognized  is  that  this 
political  idealism  in  itself  has  largely  characterized  the 
South's  contribution  to  the  development  of  the  nation. 
It  must  not  be  understood  that  other  sections  were 
wanting  in  these  sentiments  and  principles  of  genuine 
democracy,  but  that  the  Southern  people  have  been 
chiefly  controlled  in  their  national  policies  by  the  spirit 
of  political  idealism. 

The  Solid  South.  The  solid  South  is  not  infre- 
quentty  regarded  as  the  result  of  the  white  man's  effort; 
to  protect  himself  politically  and  socially  from  thej 
Negro.  The  Southern  white  man  may  not  be  able  to 
give  a  just  estimate  of  that  view,  but  it  is  far  from  a 
sufficient  explanation.  It  is  true  that  the  Negro  vote 
has  been  cast  for  fifty  years  with  the  political  party  that 
has  opposed  the  political  principles  and  leaders  for 
which  the  white  solid  South  has  stood.  It  is  true  that 
the  white  South  has  purposed  in  its  heart  to  have  white 
officials  throughout  as  far  in  the  future  as  can  be  seen. 
But  it  is  also  true  that  political  idealism  and  innate 
democracy  coming  down  from  colonial  times  have  had 
and  now  have  most  to  do  in  creating  and  preserving  a 
solid  South.  This  homogeneous  people,  beaten  upon 
by  the  storms  of  a  quarter-century,  pressed  by  condi- 
tions that  unified  and  welded  their  hearts  and  minds, 


202  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

stirred  by  a  leadership  that  drank  at  the  fountain  of 
Southern  civil  liberty,  and  trained  in  the  traditional 
principles  of  the  best  of  the  race,  would  be  indeed  a 
strange  people  if  they  did  not  form  a  solid  South.  The 
immigrants  who  came  from  other  lands  were  compara- 
tively few  and  readily  assimilated  and  those  from  the 
North  were  not  numerous  enough  to  be  dominantly 
influential  in  political  matters.  The  national  issues 
have  been  largely  concerned  with  legislation  that  was 
considered  favorable  to  certain  classes  and  they  not  in 
the  South.  Nothing  has  arisen  to  divide  the  South. 
What  effect  the  new  industrialism  which  is  inevitably 
near  in  the  South  will  have  remains  to  be  seen.  But 
has  the  nation  suffered  by  having  a  solid  South  ?  Has 
the  South  suffered?  Who  can  answer?  There  have 
been  gains  to  both.  Homogeneity  is  worth  much.  The 
beautiful  solidarity  of  any  people  brings  mental  and 
spiritual  benefits  which  can  never  be  lightly  estimated. 
Who  knows  but  that  this  solidarity  shall  yet  be  the 
determining  factor  in  preserving  the  integrity  of  the 
nation  that  came  from  the  founders  of  the  republic? 
With  one  sixth  of  all  the  population  foreign-born,  and 
another  sixth  of  foreign  parentage,  with  New  Eng- 
land, the  North  Atlantic  States,  and  much  of  the  North 
Central  States  holding  populations  one  half  or  more 
foreign,  the  assimilation  may  not  be  sufficiently  rapid 
to  insure  the  supremacy  of  the  ideals  of  the  nation's 
founders.  Peoples  who  have  come  for  economic  better- 
ment may  be  inclined  to  make  the  government  simply 
an  expedient  for  material  well-being  and  industrial 


A  GREATER  NATION  203 

progress.  The  solid  South,  with  its  unmixed  blood,* 
holding  the  traditions  of  civil  liberty  common  to  the 
early  days  of  the  republic,  and  loyal  to  the  highest  inter- 
ests of  the  nation,  may  yet  be  a  great  political  asset  in 
the  preservation  and  promotion  of  governmental  and 
republican  integrity.  The  nation  will  yet  receive  im- 
mense values  through  the  solidarity  of  the  Anglo- 
Saxon  South. 

The  National  South.  The  strong  and  growing  sense 
of  nationalism  in  the  South  is  a  surprise  to  many  who 
have  supposed  that  the  sentiment  for  states'  rights  was 
still  dominant.  The  great  leaders — Washington,  Jef- 
ferson, Marshall,  Madison,  and  Monroe — contributed 
not  a  little  to  the  establishment  of  the  union  of  the 
states,  but  their  nationalism  was  no  stronger  than  that 
which  permeates  the  South  to-day.  "The  Star 
Spangled  Banner,"  the  national  air,  will  bring  an  audi- 
ence in  the  South  to  their  feet  as  quickly  and  with  as 
lusty  cheers  as  will  be  possible  anywhere  in  the  nation. 
When  the  Spanish- American  war  broke  upon  the  nation,  , 
the  Southern  commonwealths,  North  Carolina  and  Ala- 
bama, sent  in  proportion,  man  for  man,  the  largest 
contributions  to  the  army  of  the  United  States,  while  ! 
Fitzhugh  Lee  and  Joe  Wheeler,  two  former  Confed- 
erate generals,  were  as  valiant  in  their  service  as  any 
other  commanders  of  the  nation's  troops.  National 
patriotism  is  as  strong  to-day  as  sectional  patriotism 
was  in  the  sixties.  This  is  written  advisedly.  The 
Southern  people  love  their  nation  with  a  genuine  and 
enthusiastic  devotion.  The  sentiment  for  military  pre- 


204  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

paredness  has  not  swept  the  South  as  it  has  the  North 
and  East,  because  it  has  not  been  inflamed  by  great 
newspapers,  the  military  industrialists,  and  the  pres- 
ence of  large  numbers  of  naval  and  military  officers. 
But  the  South  wants  enough  preparedness  to  safeguard 
the  material  interests  and  the  sacred  honor  of  the 
nation.  While  a  people  of  peace,  the  call  of  the  nation 
will  ever  bring  the  eligible  men  scampering  to  arms 
as  went  their  fathers  before  them.  The  national  gov- 
ernment has  done  much  for  the  South  in  the  eradica- 
tion of  disease,  in  fighting  the  boll-weevil  and  other 
agricultural  pests,  in  deepening  river  channels  and  de- 
veloping hydroelectric  power,  in  giving  scientific  farm- 
ing thorough  demonstration,  new  plants,  and  new  proc- 
esses of  cultivation,  in  aiding  home  economics  and 
in  the  great  Federal  Reserve  Bank  system  which  has 
stabilized  financial  conditions  when  great  crops  of 
staples  are  being  moved.  While  all  these  general  ben- 
eficences could  not  produce  national  patriotism,  which 
is  far  beyond  all  such  material  interests,  yet  they  create 
the  kindly  disposition  to  the  government.  The  South 
is  thoroughly  nationalized  and  has  no  higher  interests 
than  those  of  the  national  life  and  responsibility. 

The  Better  Ballot.  The  demagog  has  played  his 
part  in  political  matters,  but  his  life  has  been  short 
and  his  appearance  is  becoming  more  and  more  rare. 
The  liquor  interests  have  ruled  many  states  and  munici- 
palities with  a  high  hand,  but  their  power  is  broken, 
and  they  are  slinking  away  crestfallen  to  more  friendly 
climes.  Gambling  and  commercialized  vice  in  recent 


A  GREATER  NATION  205 

years  in  almost  all  the  Southern  commonwealths  have 
gone  under  the  ban  and  have  even  been  driven  from 
their  strongholds.  And  all  this  has  come  by  an  intelli- 
gent and  conscience-awakened  ballot.  The  commis- 
sion form  of  government,  which  originated  in  Gal- 
veston,  Texas,  and  is  now  in  operation  in  eighty-five, 
American  cities,  has  brought  a  new  spirit  into  our 
cities.  Law-enforcement  statutes,  with  power  vested 
in  state  officials  to  institute  ouster  proceedings  to  rid 
a  community  of  worthless  and  vicious  officers,  have 
been  enacted  and  they  are  bringing  civic  righteousness 
to  the  country.  The  better  ballot,  righteous  and  intel- 
ligent, will  be  used  in  due  time  for  the  cleansing  of 
the  nation.  The  liquor  business  must  leave  this  repub- 
lic. Gambling  and  commercialized  vice  must  be  erad- 
icated. Government  must  become  righteous  and  con- 
structive. To  this  end  the  Southern  ballot  must  be 
committed. 

2.     Girding  -for  Religious  Advance 

National  Responsibility.  The  nation  has  been  swept 
out  in  this  twentieth  century,  and  especially  since 
August,  1914,  into  international  responsibility  scarcely 
conceived  by  many  of  the  national  leaders  a  half  cen- 
tury ago.  In  population  and  extent  of  territory,  not 
counting  colonial  possessions,  only  Russia  and  China  • 
surpass  us,  while  in  wealth  ours  is  the  first  nation  of 
the  world.  In  the  struggle  for  self-government  the 
United  States  for  more  than  a  century  has  been  the 
leader,  and  is  the  inspiration  to-day  to  the  vast  multi- 


206  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

tudes  in  all  nations  who  are  seeking  the  opportunity  to 
cast  off  archaic  royalty.  Constitutional  government 
has  made  rapid  progress  in  the  last  half  century,  but 
the  next  fifty  years  should  show  an  unprecedented 
advance  toward  a  genuine  democracy.  The  responsi- 
bility of  the  United  States  in  this  world  service  has 
greatly  increased  since  the  enlargement  of  its  popu- 
lation and  wealth  has  brought  the  power  for  undisputed 
leadership.  Shall  the  power  be  that  simply  of  phys- 
ical fci'ce?  If  so,  what  do  we  more  than  others?  A 
bigger  navy  and  a  larger  army  than  any  of  the  rest  we 
may  be  able  to  create  and  maintain.  But  is  that  what 
the  Ruler  of  the  universe  has  brought  this  republic  into 
existence  to  do  ?  The  question  is  not,  What  is  God  do- 
ing for  our  country,  but  what  is  he  doing  with,  by, 
and  through  our  country?  The  mission  of  America 
must  be  interpreted  and  declared  by  the  prophets,  whose 
pulpits  are  thrones  of  power,  because  like  Isaiah  they 
have  vision  and  boldly  make  known  what  they  see. 
What  do  the  American  prophets  see  to-day  and  what 
instructions  can  they  give  their  nation  as  it  sweeps  out 
into  the  great  sea  of  international  service? 

Preparedness.     Preparedness  has  become  a  national 
/  theme  in  recent  months.   Why  preparedness  ?  To  repel 
invasion  and  to  maintain  the  nation's  honor.     These 
purposes  present  a  patriotic  appeal  to  which  no  citizen 
can  be  deaf.     Congress  is  charged  with  the  responsi- 
L  bility  of  putting  the  nation  in  a  proper  state  of  mate- 
rial preparedness,  but  the  Church  has  a  service  of  equal 
magnitude  and  importance  and  just  as  patriotic.    Does 


A  GREATER  NATION  207 

it  not  face  an  invasion  by  the  enemies  of  the  Kingdom 
for  which  it  is  responsible  ?  Oriental  thought,  with  its 
mystical  subtlety,  coming  in  philosophies  and  religious 
formularies  and  tenets,  is  an  insidious  foe.  Rational- 
ism, with  its  superman  and  its  mechanical  theories  of 
divine  things  bringing  its  harvest  of  skepticism  and 
agnosticism,  has  swept  in  across  the  Atlantic  with  the 
immigrant  tide.  Continentalism,  with  its  enslavement 
to  alcoholic  beverages,  its  disregard  of  the  holy  Sab- 
bath, its  indifference  to  the  worship  of  the  sanctuary, 
and  its  obstacles  to  social  assimilation,  has  wofully 
antagonized  the  sacred  principles  of  the  Puritan  fathers 
and  the  cavalier  settlers.  The  cities  of  the  nation  have 
already  succumbed  to  these  foreign  foes  and  are  held 
as  fortresses  against  the  offensive  movements  of  the 
Church  of  the  American  fathers.  Hyphenation  is 
more  prominent  in  the  moral  realm  than  in  the  social 
circle.  Can  the  Church  mobilize  a  force  of  sufficient 
strength  to  take  these  forts  and  drive  from  the  land 
these  enemies  of  the  common  good  and  the  religious 
life?  The  nation  has  stood  for  the  great  ideals  in 
morals  and  religion,  brought  in  the  Mayflower,  with 
Penn's  colony,  with  Oglethorpe,  and  in  every  ship  from 
Scottish-Ireland.  The  national  leaders  have  been  men 
of  exceptional  honor,  moral  integrity,  and  religious 
faith.  Fair  dealing  has  marked  our  relations  with  other 
nations.  Shall  not  the  greatest  nation  of  all  the  earth 
do  right?  The  preparedness  called  for  must  maintain 
the  nation's  honor  through  the  righteousness  of  its  citi- 
zenship, the  moral  motives  of  its  representatives,  and 


208  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

the  religious  integrity  of  its  leaders  at  home  and 
abroad.  The  God  of  our  fathers  must  be  the  God  of 
our  future. 

The  Southern  Advance.  The  South's  part  in  na- 
tional, moral,  and  religious  preparedness  is  by  no  means 
inconsiderable.  Illiteracy,  belatedness  of  large  sec- 
tions, the  immaturity  and  consequent  incompetency  of 
a  numerous  race,  the  backwardness  of  the  Church  life 
in  countless  communities  where  inflicted  poverty  and 
inadequate  leadership  have  been  widest,  all  have  put 
large  numbers  of  persons  into  a  state  of  unprepared- 
ness.  No  small  effort  will  be  sufficient  to  make  ready 
these  inhabitants  for  a  genuine  moral  and  religious 
advance.  But  the  nation  demands  it.  The  great  na- 
tional ideals  are  at  stake,  as  well  as  the  individual  inter- 
ests of  the  people  themselves  and  the  local  communities 
in  which  they  live.  Moral  disease  is  contagious  and  is 
rapidly  bred  in  neglected  homes  and  districts.  The 
thought,  life,  and  civilization  of  the  world  are  being 
revolutionized  by  the  American  currents,  and  the 
'sources  must  be  made  and  kept  pure.  As  health  bu- 
reaus command  the  physical  environments  of  those  they 
would  preserve  from  physical  disease,  so  the  Church 
must  command  the  moral  environment  to  insure  moral 
health  and  religious  vision.  Every  section  has  a  moral 
responsibility  to  the  nation  and  the  "world  which  can 
be  discharged  only  by  keeping  in  moral  health  and 
breathing  an  atmosphere  that  purifies  the  lungs  and 
thereby  insures  perfect  heart  action.  This  is  not  done 
by  sending  for  missionary  diagnosticians  and  practi- 


A  GREATER  NATION  209 

tioners  and  nurses.    The  best  missionary  work  is  that  \ 
done  by  a  conscientious,  devout  Christian  in  his  or  her 
own  community  with  the  people  who  by  a  competent  i  : 
survey  are  found  to  need  it.     The  South  should  put 
off  its  own  moral  ills  by  the  means  at  its  own  com- 
mand and  through  the  efforts  of  those  who  are  divinely, 
empowered.     This  does  not  mean  that  help  from  the\ 
outside  should  be  declined,  but  it  means  more  self-reli-  \ 
ance  in  facing  its  own  problems.    The  entire  Southern 
line  may  well  advance. 

j.  The  Program  of  Protestantism 
Preparation.  A  prevailing,  robust,  triumphant  relig- 
ious life  in  the  South,  as  elsewhere,  is  not  possible 
without  the  vigilant,  energetic,  and  intelligent  support 
of  a  progressive  and  well-girded  Protestantism.  Pro- 
testantism has  a  responsibility  too  great  for  any  neglect 
of  preparation  and  a  lack  of  program.  Some  may  feel 
that  Providence  will  care  for  Protestantism,  but  Provi- 
dence is  not  haphazard.  Providence  works  by  law.  The 
mountain  ministry  is  of  the  haphazard  variety.  Its 
sincerity  no  one  can  question  but  its  efficiency  is  at  the 
lowest  degree.  The  call  of  God  and  the  success  of  the 
past  are  vital,  but  the  man  who  relies  on  these  alone  is 
not  true  to  those  who  preceded  him  or  to  God  who  called 
him.  What  is  Protestantism's  task  and  what  equipment 
is  necessary  to  perform  that  task  are  two  questions  that 
should  be  answered  as  a  prerequisite  to  any  worthy 
constructive  Christian  work.  There  are  twenty  million1 

1  These  statistics  include  children  under  ten  years  of  age,  who  number  about 
23  per  cent,  of  the  total  population. 


210  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

in  the  South  and  fifty-eight  million1  in  the  nation  who 
have  no  personal  relation  to  any  religious  organization. 
Should  that  not  startle  religious  people  into  a  sense  of 
responsibility?  Where  is  the  trouble?  Why  has  the 
Christian  Church  failed  to  reach  this  immense  mass  of 
humanity?  How  can  they  be  reached?  Has  Protes- 
tantism the  preparation  and  the  program  for  such  a 
task? 

Pulpit  Leaders.  Preparedness  must  begin  with  the 
leaders.  The  leadership  demanded  by  the  conditions 
in  the  cities,  in  the  open  country,  and  in  the  industrial 
centers  must  be  virile,  animated,  intelligent,  courageous, 
and  marked  by  dash  and  towering  strength.  Theolog- 
ical schools  of  the  right  kind  were  never  so  much 
needed  as  to-day,  if  they  can  create  leadership  in  men. 
Theological  students  have  been  made  to  spend  too  much 
time  with  the  ancient  dead  and  not  enough  with  the 
vital  verities  of  the  here  and  now.  Theologs  should 
get  out  of  the  crypt  and  up  to  the  observatory  tower 
where  the  windows  open  upon  the  vast  world.  The 
theological  microscope  should  give  place  to  the  biolog- 
ical telescope,  capable  of  sweeping  the  whole  of  human 
life.  Religious  leadership  must  be  equipped  for  an 
advanced  humanity  and  a  scientific  age  of  recent  de- 
velopment if  it  is  to  show  power  in  advancing  hu- 
manity and  developing  the  age.  Can  it  be  done,  or 
must  the  ministry  bring  up  the  rear  where  the  mighty 
are  not  found  ?  This  depends  as  much  upon  the  Church 

1  These  statistics  include  children  under  ten  years  of  age,  who  mumber  about 
23  per  cent,  of  the  total  population. 


A  GREATER  NATION  211 

that  uses  men  as  upon  the  school  that  prepares  them. 
The  self -prepared  ministry  in  the  South  has  been  re- 
markably effective  in  certain  realms  and  deserves  great 
praise,  but  the  new  era  requires  an  ability  which  is 
beyond  that  which  was  formerly  sufficient.  The  city 
is  not  listening  to  the  pulpit,  the  town  is  indifferent,  the 
country  hears  no  commanding  voice.  The  religious' 
journal  is  poorly  circulated  and  little  read.  The  daily 
newspaper,  the  light  magazine,  and  the  indifferent 
novel  occupy  the  attention  of  the  majority  of  readers. 
Society  is  becoming  more  and  more  frivolous.  Luxury 
is  creating  more  and  more  softness,  fashion  continues 
its  onslaught  on  modesty  and  gentle  womanliness.  The 
rush  for  wealth  results  in  scrambled  society.  Our  cities 
need  a  Savonarola,  our  country  a  John  Knox,  and  our 
society  a  John  Wesley.  These  cannot  come  out  of  the 
past  but  out  of  the  living  present  with  the  message  of 
the  ages  to  their  age.  No  harking  to  the  past  will  get 
any  response.  The  voice  must  be  of  "this  grand  and 
awful  time"  to  this  "age  on  ages  telling"  when  "to  be 
living  is  sublime."  Such  leadership  must  be  more  than 
a  voice  however  commanding.  There  must  be  action. 
Just  as  latter-day  militarism  demands  the  organization 
of  the  nation's  resources,  social,  economic,  and  polit- 
ical, as  well  as  the  mobilization  of  fighting  aggregates, 
so  must  the  Church  extend  its  organization  into  the 
forces  of  society  and  command  the  entire  social  order 
for  Christ  and  the  kingdom  of  God.  That  contem- 
plates a  service  of  which  many  have  little  conception, 
but  if  the  kingdoms  of  this  world  are  to  become  the 


212  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

kingdoms  of  our  Lord  and  his  Christ,  a  mightier  sweep 
to  Christian  action  must  characterize  the  future  than 
that  which  has  marked  the  past.  The  victories  of  the 
Church  have  been  glorious  but  the  overwhelming  losses 
have  been  appalling.  May  not  these  be  saved  also? 
For  this  the  Church  is  called  to  make  preparation. 

Power  in  the  Pulpit.  Protestantism  must  have  a  pul- 
pit. Great  preaching  has  not  been  wanting  in  any  great 
age.  A  great  age  is  inconceivable  without  a  great 
pulpit.  What  makes  a  great  pulpit  ?  Paul  made  a  great 
pulpit,  and  Savonarola,  Luther,  Knox,  Wesley,  Ed- 
wards, and  Phillips  Brooks.  A  great  message  greatly 
delivered  by  a  great  messenger  makes  a  great  pulpit. 
These  three  elements — matter,  manner,  man — lift  the 
pulpit  out  of  the  commonplace,  because  they  lift  the 
commonplace  out  of  the  pulpit.  It  is  not  only  the 
province  but  the  duty  of  Protestantism  to  create,  sus- 
tain, and  exalt  a  virile,  life-interpreting,  God- revealing, 
and  Spirit-empowering  pulpit  in  order  to  the  profound 
spiritual  leadership  in  the  life  of  the  nation.  Such  a 
pulpit  will  not  be  turned  aside  by  trifles,  nor  degraded 
to  worldly,  political  partisanship,  nor  be  brought  to  the 
rhetorical  expression  of  beautiful  nothings.  Such  a 
pulpit  will  have  a  theology,  and  one  well  founded,  but 
life  and  not  theology  will  be  the  great  objective  in 
preaching.  Theological  preaching  is  usually  metaphysi- 
cal or  sectarian;  the  one  is  intellectually  dismal  to  the 
average  hearer,  and  the  other  is  practically  baneful  to 
the  American  Church  life.  Petty  preaching  on  doc- 
trinal differences  is  responsible  for  the  painful  divi- 


A  GREATER  NATION  213 

sions  so  common  in  rural  church  life.  Many  commu- 
nities never  come  together  for  a  religious  service  except 
on  revival  occasions  when  life  and  not  theology  will 
receive  the  emphasis.  The  South  has  suffered,  and  still 
suffers  in  some  places,  from  the  preacher  whose  limited 
sermons  are  narrowly  denominational  in  doctrine, 
highly  emotional  in  illustration,  and  severely  denunci- 
atory in  dealing  with  the  delinquencies  of  men  or  opin- 
ions, by  whomsoever  held,  that  are  contrary  to  his  own. 
The  pulpit  with  insight,  outlook,  vision,  purpose,  and 
plan  is  a  pulpit  with  power.  The  Southern  pulpit  in 
its  higher  realms  has  been  marked  by  its  power  of  effec- 
tive utterance,  its  sweep  of  refined  religious  emotion, 
and  its  power  of  public  influence.  Politics  and  illus- 
trations of  possible  political  or  sectional  offense  have 
been  studiously  avoided.  Christ  has  been  the  theme  of 
all  themes.  From  these  the  future  will  not  turn,  but 
the  new  power  is  to  come  with  a  new  program  of  lead- 
ership and  service  in  all  the  life  interests  of  the  people. 
Life,  Life — is  the  theme  for  an  emphasis  scarcely 
known  hitherto. 

Financiers.  Preparation  must  extend  beyond  the 
pulpit.  How  many  official  boards  show  real  com- 
petency in  financing  the  kingdom  of  God?  There  is 
indifference,  slovenliness,  penuriousness,  frequently  to 
the  embarrassment  of  the  church  and  the  great  causes 
which  it  is  set  to  promote.  The  minister  in  most  cases 
is  essential  to  any  financial  achievement  or  advance 
movement.  A  school  for  stewards  and  deacons  has 
become  a  necessity  if  the  churches  are  to  have  compe- 


214  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

tent  skilled  service  reaching  to  every  member  and  equal 
to  the  claims  of  the  Christianization  of  society  and  the 
evangelization  of  the  world.  Ministers  in  many  places 
are  compelled  to  exist  on  less  than  a  living  wage,  to 
come  to  old  age  with  nothing  laid  aside,  and  the  hope 
of  only  a  pittance  from  the  superannuate  fund;  many 
communities  go  almost  without  the  gospel,  and  non- 
Christian  peoples  inviting  the  ministry  go  unsupplied, 
all  because  the  department  of  finance  is  poorly  organ- 
ized and  carelessly  administered.  The  Church  has  big 
business  on  hand  and  calls  loudly  for  men  who  can 
and  will  finance  the  Kingdom.  The  gospel  brings  obli- 
gation rather  than  ease.  The  sense  of  obligation  is  too 
little  developed  in  church-membership.  Preparedness 
halts  before  this  state.  The  advance  cannot  be  begun 
until  the  treasury  comes  into  more  capable  and  con- 
scientious hands. 

Sunday-School.  ~  Is  the  average  Sunday-school  a 
school?  Is  the  Sunday-school  teacher  a  teacher?  Is 
the  Adult  Bible  Class  a  Bible  class?  Fortunate  is  any 
pastor  who  can 'answer  affirmatively.  School,  teacher, 
Bible,  are  three  great  words,  and  their  real  meanings 
are  not  obscure,  but  they  are  frequently  misused  in 
connection  with  the  Sunday-school.  The  immediate 
problem  before  the  Church  is  how  to  make  the  Sunday- 
school  everywhere  a  real  school,  with  a  real  teacher, 
really  using  the  Holy  Bible.  Superintendents  should 
be  made  before  chosen,  just  as  public  school  superin- 
tendents should  be  made  before  chosen.  Normal 
schools  and  colleges  must  be  sought  by  those  who  would 


A  GREATER  NATION  215 

teach  mathematics,  history,  and  the  rest.  What  is 
required  of  a  Sunday-school  teacher?  Who  wants  to 
be  a  Sunday-school  teacher  to  such  an  extent  as  to 
make  the  proper  preparation-?  Missionary  candidates 
must  submit  to  courses  of  training  to  prepare  for  Chris- 
tian work  abroad,  but  anybody,  of  any  age,  with  any 
or  no  equipment  may  be  thrust  into  any  Sunday-school 
teacher's  position.  Is  it  any  wonder  that  an  appalling 
percentage  of  the  children  drop  out  of  the  Sunday- 
school  before  they  pass  halfway  through  their  teens? 
No  leakage  of  the  Church  is  so  great  as  that  which  re- 
sults from  inefficiency  in  the  Sunday-school.  Girding 
up  there  means  a  great,  great  advance  in  all  religious 
life.  This  should  be  a  school  of  the  Church  giving  in- 
struction in  its  purpose,  mission,  and  work  as  well  as  in 
the  Bible.  It  has  incomparable  facilities  as  an  evangel- 
istic agency  and  as  a  missionary  force  in  the  com- 
munity. To  exploit  it  for  missions  and  allow  it  to 
remain  void  of  missionary  endeavor  in  the  community 
in  which  it  exists  is  a  travesty  on  consistency.  A  com- 
prehensive advance  in  the  Sunday-school  will  mean  an 
advance  for  all  the  South. 

Mobilization.  Religious  agencies  are  adjusting 
themselves  in  a  statesmanlike  way  to  the  demands  of 
the  new  order.  The  church  school  is  realizing  anew 
its  mission  in  preparing  church  leaders  and  religious 
workers.  In  the  past  it  has  not  been  unusual  for  the 
young  men  and  young  women  to  graduate  from  Church 
colleges  without  any  equipment  for  teaching  in  the 
Sunday-school,  acting  as  a  steward  or  deacon  in  a 


216  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY 

church,  or  doing  any  other  specific  and  worthy  church 
work.  Some  have  gone  away  without  having  gained 
any  knowledge  of  the  history  of  the  Christian  Church 
or  of  the  great  missionary  work  which  is  being  so 
extensively  done  throughout  the  world.  The  Southern 
Church  colleges  are  beginning  to  remedy  this  serious 
defect  by  putting  in  professors  who  will  give  instruc- 
tion in  missions,  Sunday-school  work,  and  allied  sub- 
jects that  will  give  some  equipment  for  church  work 
in  the  community  to  which  the  student  will  go  after 
graduation.  The  mission  boards  are  employing  more 
and  more  young  theological  students  during  the  sum- 
mer months  in  house-to-house  missionary  work  in  the 
hills  and  in  factory  districts.  The  Bible  visitor,  some- 
thing after  the  order  of  the  Bible  woman  used  in  the 
Orient,  is  being  used  in  city  and  country  districts.  The 
Church  must  reach  those  who  do  not  attend  its  worship. 
Every  agency,  vocal  and  written,  must  be  employed  if 
salvation  is  brought  to  all  the  people.  This  is  the  day 
for  the  mobilization  of  all  moral  and  religious  forces, 
educational  and  evangelistic,  social  and  missionary,  in 
order  to  repel  all  invasions  of  disintegrating  foes,  to 
capture  and  hold  secure  all  points  of  vantage  in  our 
own  non-christianized  sections,  and  to  maintain  the 
honor  of  our  Lord  and  King  in  his  glorious  and  tri- 
umphant march  to  the  conquest  of  the  world. 

A  New  Day.  The  South's  great  day  is  in  the  dawn- 
ing. Over  the  eastern  sky  the  signs  of  golden  promise 
spread  with  fascinating  beauty  and  illuminating  hope. 
The  long,  helpless  years  of  dreary  toil  and  meager 


A  GREATER  NATION  217 

returns  have  found  their  ending.  There  is  daybreak 
everywhere.  The  song  of  the  new  morning  has  the 
note  of  good-will  and  the  cheer  of  buoyant  hopefulness. 
The  big  task  is  just  ahead,  but  the  power  to  meet  it 
is  also  at  hand.  Problems  may  multiply,  and  their  diffi- 
culties increase,  but  light  will  appear.  The  new  South 
is  confident  of  developed  ability  to  carry  forward  the 
interests  committed  to  it.  The  Church  of  the  South, 
whatever  its  name  and  order,  was  never  more  hopeful, 
more  aggressive,  more  progressive,  nor  more  engaged. 
The  great  fundamentals  in  faith  and  the  essentials  in 
experience  receive  just  emphasis.  The  missionary  en- 
deavor was  never  so  keen  nor  so  joyous.  Whatever 
the  deficiencies  in  the  ministry,  in  the  Church  life  and 
program,  in  the  missionary  propaganda,  these  are  in 
their  best  day.  It  is  the  ongoing  of  the  world  that 
brings  the  new  sense  of  greater  responsibilities. 
Greater  Nation  is  now  a  necessity  by  the  claims  of 
awakened  humanity.  A  better  and  a  greater  South, 
stronger  in  loyalty,  keener  in  patriotism,  holier  in  pur- 
pose, and  fuller  in  life,  must  stand  forth  to  meet  the 
demands  of  the  greater  nation  of  which  it  is  an  indis- 
soluble and  worthy  part.  Only  by  Him  to  whom  all 
authority  hath  been  given  in  heaven  and  earth  shall  this 
come  to  pass.  "Blessed  is  the  nation  whose  God 
Jehovah,  the  people  whom  he  hath  chosen  for  his 
inheritance." 


Q 


Ml"i 
1|1 

§4! 
"I  a 


!1 


111 

"1 02  ^ 
I     f 


^co  -?-H 
So 


i-iOco-^f 

CO^IM 


)  >O  <M  >O  O5  C 

!5$3S£ 


»  C<l  OO  O  >O  Is-  -rj*  ( 


Illllllllllllllll 


I  S 


219 


OCi        COO5 

o      ^^ 


SI' 


o      oeot^i 

s   §     : 


38 


foeo  r^-cotfs  osc^os 
COr-t  CO  •»— I  ^^  CO-^»CC« 
oo»^  -^  •*—*  o  cs  o GO 


8SS' 


s  ss  £<°s  ssss 
a  283  -"  g  s^"«i 


SI    S^ 


<t^        t^»  OO  CO  OO  tf5         «O  C*5  iO  O         OO  CO  >O         O  1C  C<J  IO  C 

ib-      os  -3<  t--  crs  ^4      r^.^i^.35      ooeo^S      oo  to  co  c^J 


II 

H    9 


SS 


iJiil 


L»| 

J"S   ^ 


1  °  i  a  yiii  "-s 
PlilfFw 


m**{  llaliii 

3      Illllldl      ioA 


220 


o  »-t  *-«  eo  o  o  *o  «e>         eo     o  o  o  t^- 


!<MOOCOO»««O5OiO-HCOO'-H<M 

i&sSSSIailsRSsB. 

r  r-T  I-H"T-T          c<r        e<r 


-a  s- 

iiiii 


221 


232S5SS8S; 


<!Qi-l«Oi*t>>OO»^4<&C^tQ< 


I 


llliiUlii 


222 


3S8i8 s sags assess  w  ,o 
a 

s 

^«eo« 

kcTc^Tc^    ^    0* 

:@ScSsssas&ii  ^ 

sS 

a 

I 
<r 

2 


223 


s 


g  s 
s 


ill! 


^'*<O'-H 


c^raooxooor 


c&<oooi>"-ioe*^<eo»f>«ot-«oc5e^eo 


224 


225 


e»  e»  « t>-  o  eo  i>-  o  «5  fr»  CB  to  oo  «o  -<ti  t^  to  «s  co  e<i  o         t»  o  CM  •*  os  •<->  t 

t^lCO»0»(Me<li-(C^O2^t>.OiO5OOr-OOOCO<NB5  T-lOCO(M)f^O< 

rH  t-  »0        CO^OW 


ct^§SS^S 
<N  ejc^" 


Itsill2srassi 

co"    oii-Tt^ 


1      :-§      :      •  -±  '•  :  :  :  :     E*84ft«  :  :«g  IT? 

43    -b    '  p  ;i  M  i ; 

:Ss|  :  : 

i'-S'i-B  :-  :  I    l^'l-glH  : 

1  '1Sj  !  11!    A  Sift    : 

<-5^w6GS5wQQ^S^^SHP!>o       <j^BWO(^H6< 

\  t    *          \          T 

226 


APPENDIX  B 
VALUE  OF  MINERAL  PRODUCTS 

In  1911  West  Virginia  led  with  $105,958,493,  followed  by 
Missouri  with  $53,591,612,  Oklahoma  with  $42,678,446,  Alabama 
with  $40,508,343,  Tennessee  with  $20,709,756,  Kentucky  with 
$19,703,061,  Texas  with  $18,817,304,  Virginia  with  $16,361,461, 
Maryland  with  $12,840,892,  Louisiana  with  $12,710,958,  Florida 
with  $10,250,228,  Georgia  with  $5,007,723,  Arkansas  with  $5,829,606, 
North  Carolina  with  $2,648,786,  South  Carolina  with  $1,804,115, 
and  Mississippi  with  $1,052,092. 

Growth  of  Mineral  Output.  The  South's  mineral  output  has 
grown  at  a  phenomenal  rate.  In  1880  its  value  was  $18,226,000, 
in  1890  $60,218,000,  in  1900  $129,857,000,  in  1910  $369,678,000.  That 
for  the  United  States  in  those  years  was  $304,928,000, 
$606,476,000,  $1,107,031,000,  and  $2,003,745,000  respectively.  The 
South's  coal  output  in  1880  was  7,002,000  tons,  in  1890  24,925,000 
tons,  in  1900  54,590,000  tons,  and  1910  120,856,000  tons.  That 
for  the  United  States  was  71,482,000  tons,  157,771,000  tons, 
269,684,000  tons,  and  501,577,000  tons  respectively.  The  South's 
output  of  iron  ore  in  1880  was  703,000  tons,  in  1890  3,516,000  tons, 
in  1900  4,749,000  tons,  and  in  1910  7,002,000  tons.  For  the  United 
States  the  output  was  7,100,000  tons,  16,036,000  tons,  27,553,000 
tons,  and  56,890,000  tons  respectively.  The  South's  output  of 
petroleum  in  1880  was  179,000  barrels,  in  1890  499,000  barrels, 
in  1900  17,102,000  barrels,  and  in  1910  79,094,000  barrels.  The 
output  for  the  United  States  was  26,286,000  barrels,  45,824,000 
barrels,  63,621,000  barrels,  and  209,556,000  barrels  respectively. 
The  South's  output  of  phosphate  rock  grew  from  210,000  tons 
to  2,655,000  tons  in  the  thirty  years.  These  mineral  products 
have  greatly  increased  the  South's  wealth. 


227 


APPENDIX  C 
DENOMINATIONAL  COLLEGES  AND  SCHOOLS 

The  Methodists  and  Baptists  became  as  active  as  the  Presby- 
terians and  by  virtue  of  their  later  superior  numbers  have  been 
able  to  found  and  maintain  a  larger  number  of  schools.  The 
Presbyterians  founded  Center  College,  Kentucky  (1819) ; 
Davidson  College,  North  Carolina  (1837);  and  Erskine  College, 
South  Carolina  (1839).  The  Baptists  established  Columbia  Col- 
lege, District  of  Columbia  (1821)  ;  Georgetown  College,  Kentucky 
(1829);  Richmond  College,  Virginia  (1832);  Wake  Forest  Col- 
lege, North  Carolina  (1834)  ;  Mercer  University,  Georgia  (1837)  ; 
Howard  College,  Alabama  (1841) ;  Furman  College,  South  Caro- 
lina (1852) ;  Baylor  University,  Texas  (1845)  ',  Southwestern 
Baptist  University,  Tennessee  (1847).  The  Methodist  Episcopal 
Church,  South,  founded  Randolph-Macon  College,  Virginia 
(1832);  Emory  College,  Georgia  (1837);  Emory  and  Henry 
College,  Virginia  (1838);  Centenary  College,  Louisiana  (1841); 
Trinity  College,  North  Carolina  (1851);  Wofford  College,  South 
Carolina  (1854)  ;  Central  College,  Missouri  (1857),  and  Southern 
University,  Alabama  (1859).  The  Lutherans  founded  Roanoke 
College,  Virginia  (1851)  ;  and  Newberry  College,  South  Carolina 
(1856).  The  Reformed  Church  in  the  United  States  founded 
Catawba  College,  North  Carolina  (1851);  and  Hood  College, 
Maryland  (1893).  All  these  are  now  well-attended,  high-grade 
colleges. 

The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  South,  now  has  twenty-six 
colleges  which  require  not  less  than  fourteen  units  for  admission, 
nine  junior  colleges  which  complete  two  years  of  college  work, 
twenty-four  schools  that  bear  the  name  of  college  but  whose 
courses  of  study  leave  them  in  an  unclassified  list,  and  thirty 
first-class  academies.  The  total  value  of  the  property  is  $12,332,539 
and  the  endowment  is  $6,304,000.  The  total  enrolment  in  the 
colleges  is  7,033  of  whom  4,857  are  in  college  courses.  The  total 

228 


APPENDIX  C  229 

enrolment  in  the  other  schools  is  11,168.  Two  new  institutions 
of  high  college  grade  and  with  university  aspirations  are  in 
their  first  year  with  600  and  700  students  respectively.  One 
starts  with  $1,250,000  endowment  and  property  valued  at  more 
than  $1,000,000.  The  other  has  $1,000,000  of  property  and  a 
nucleus  of  $200,000  and  a  large  sum  subscribed.  The  following 
statistics  were  compiled  from  the  report  of  the  United  States 
Commissioner  of  Education :  The  Southern  Baptists  have  twenty- 
eight  colleges  whose  property  value,  counting  grounds,  buildings, 
and  libraries,  is  $7,500,000  and  with  large  and  growing  endow- 
ment. These  schools  have  an  enrolment  of  9,200  of  whom  4,600 
are  in  college  courses.  The  Presbyterians  of  three  varieties  have 
twenty-three  colleges  in  the  Southern  States  with  a  property 
value  of  $4,210,000  and  an  endowment  of  $3,091,000.  The  student 
enrolment  is  5,200  of  whom  2,700  are  in  college  courses.  The 
Church  of  the  Disciples,  or  Christian  Church,  has  seven  colleges 
valued  at  $2,115,000  with  an  endowment  of  $1,115,000.  The 
student  enrolment  is  2,034  of  whom  916  are  in  college  courses. 
The  Moravians  have  a  very  old  school  for  women  founded  in 
1802  at  Winston-Salem,  North  Carolina,  which  has  518  students 
of  whom  120  are  in  college  classes.  The  property  is  valued  at 
$170,000  and  the  endowment  is  $170,000. 


APPENDIX  D 

WORK  OF  THE  DENOMINATIONAL  MISSION  BOARDS 
IN  THE  SOUTH 

The  American  Baptist  Home  Mission  Society  has  expended 
for  the  Negroes  of  the  South  five  and  a  half  million  dollars. 
It  maintains  twenty-four  institutions,  of  which  thirteen  are 
colleges,  with  280  teachers,  of  whom  120  are  white,  with  3,845 
pupils — 1,717  male  and  2,128  female.  Of  the  pupils  346  are  in 
college  courses,  950  are  preparing  to  teach,  105  are  in  minis- 
terial courses,  and  342  are  preparing  for  the  ministry,  9  pursuing 
missionary  training  course,  24  the  nurses  training  course  and 
2,193  are  receiving  instruction  in  industrial  work.  The  n 
secondary  schools  have  115  teachers,  all  colored,  2,142  pupils— 
909  male,  1,233  female — 70  preparing  for  college,  84  for  the 
ministry,  and  597  receiving  industrial  training.  These  schools 
have  a  property  value  of  $1,900,000  and  an  endowment  of  $430,000. 
They  have  fifty  substantial  buildings,  spacious  grounds,  and 
50,000  volumes  in  the  libraries.  They  are  maintained  at  an 
annual  expense  to  the  Board  of  about  $95>ooo,  while  other  funds 
are  supplied  from  private  sources.  A  summer  school  is  main- 
tained at  Shaw  University,  Raleigh,  North  Carolina,  a  hospital 
has  been  built  at  Benedict  College,  Columbia,  South  Carolina, 
and  Spelman  Seminary,  Atlanta,  Georgia,  is  fostering  rural  work. 
Many  of  the  leading  Negro  pastors  in  the  1,000  congregations  in 
the  bounds  of  the  Northern  Baptist  Convention  were  educated 
in  these  schools.  Several  of  these  institutions  are  centers  of 
manifold  activities  for  the  betterment  of  Negroes.  For  several 
years  at  the  Virginia  Union  University  at  Richmond  a  summer 
convocation  of  Negroes  at  the  head  of  public  schools  of  the  state 
have  been  held  annually.  Bishop  College  in  Texas  and  More- 
house  College  in  Atlanta  are  also  doing  much  fine  work. 
At  a  meeting  of  the  Negro  National  Baptist  Convention  in 
Philadelphia  in  1914  about  nine  tenths  of  the  nearly  1,000 

230 


APPENDIX  D  231 

present,  by  a  rising  vote,  expressed  their  appreciation  of  the 
benefit  which  they  had  received  from  the  schools  aided  by  this 
society.  Well  may  the  entire  race  make  a  similar  acknowledg- 
ment. 

The  Church  of  the  Disciples  through  its  Woman's  Board  of 
Missions  maintains  six  schools  for  Negroes  at  an  annual  ex- 
penditure of  about  $50,000.  This  work  has  been  in  operation 
for  about  thirty  years.  These  schools  are  of  the  elementary  and 
secondary  grades.  They  had  about  600  pupils  in  1915.  The 
Protestant  Episcopal  Church  through  its  American  Church 
Institute  maintains  eight  secondary  schools  with  about  2,000 
pupils  and  135  teachers  at  an  annual  expenditure  of  about 
$70,000.  The  United  Presbyterian  Church  through  its  Board  of 
Missions  for  Freedmen  maintains  16  schools,  one  a  college,  at 
an  annual  expenditure  of  about  $85,000.  They  have  161  mis- 
sionary teachers  and  3,600  pupils.  They  maintain  religious, 
literary,  and  industrial  departments.  Five  of  these  schools  are 
in  Tennessee,  six  in  Alabama,  three  in  Virginia,  and  two  in  North 
Carolina.  This  great  Board,  with  fifty  years  of  honorable 
history,  supported  in  its  work  by  a  strong  woman's  department, 
carries  on  a  fine  evangelistic  propaganda  in  connection  with  its 
educational  work  and  now  has  26,376  communicants  and  23,000 
Sunday-school  members  in  its  Negro  churches. 

The  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States  of  America 
through  its  Board  of  Missions  for  Freedmen,  assisted  by  the 
Freedmen's  Department  of  the  Woman's  Home  Mission  Society 
maintains  143  schools  of  which  20  are  coeducational  boarding- 
schools  and  116  are  day-schools,  while  two  are  high-grade 
institutions  for  young  men  and  five  are  similar  institutions  for 
young  women.  Originally  the  teachers  were  practically  all 
white  but  as  graduates  multiply  they  are  employed,  and  now  o£ 
the  480  employed  only  78  are  white.  Biddle  University,  Char- 
lotte, North  Carolina,  with  its  college,  preparatory,  and  theo- 
logical departments,  has  16  teachers,  all  colored.  Of  the  17,000 
pupils  in  the  143  schools  more  than  13,000  are  in  the  elementary 
grades,  nearly  3,000  are  in  the  secondary  grades,  and  125  in 
college  departments,  with  50  to  60  in  the  ministerial  department 
The  school  property  is  valued  at  $950,000,  vrith  a  farm  worth 
$30,000  and  other  property  worth  $10,000.  During  the  fifty 


232  APPENDIX  D 

years  of  the  Board's  activities  this  Church  has  expended 
$6,839,000  in  the  education  of  the  Negroes  of  the  South.  In 
1914-15  the  gifts  to  this  work  amounted  to  $288,480,  of  which 
$68,175  were  in  legacies.  The  gifts  on  the  field  for  building 
repairs  and  contingent  expenses  were  $73,700,  while  those  by 
patrons  and  friends  amounted  to  $72,800.  During  the  fifty 
years  500,000  pupils  have  been  enrolled  in  the  schools  of  this 
Church.  This  is  a  record  of  which  any  Church  might  well  be 
proud.  The  chief  schools  are  Biddle  University,  Harbison  Agri- 
cultural College,  North  Carolina;  Scotia  Seminary,  West  Point, 
Mississippi;  Barber  Memorial,  Anniston,  Alabama;  and  Ingleside 
Seminary,  Burkeville,  Virginia. 

The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  through  its  Freedmen's  Aid 
Society  in  the  last  fifty  years  has  had  300,000  pupils  in  its 
schools  and  many  of  the  graduates  are  to-day  leaders  in  the 
ministry,  in  medicine,  in  law,  and  in  business,  among  the  Negroes 
of  this  country.  Of  their  pupils  13,200  have  graduated  as 
teachers,  3,100  as  ministers,  1,200  as  physicians,  surgeons,  and 
dentists,  and  hundreds  as  nurses.  Five  graduates  of  Gammon 
Theological  Seminary  have  been  elected  Methodist  bishops  and 
many  others  are  leading  pastors  in  the  Negro  Methodist  Churches. 
The  Society  now  maintains  n  colleges,  8  academies,  one  theo- 
logical school,  one  medical  school,  and  one  hospital  and  nurse 
training  school.  The  total  value  of  the  school  property  is 
$2,000,000.  The  student  body  numbers  7,000  of  whom  80  are 
theological  and  570  medical  students.  The  annual  appropriation 
to  the  schools  made  by  the  society  is  about  $125,000.  The 
Negroes  give  about  $50,000  annually  to  the  support  of  the 
institutions  and  $275,000  more  in  tuition,  board,  and  room  rent. 
Industrial  and  domestic  training  is  given  along  with  the  literary 
courses.  This  Church  has  wrought  well  for  the  Negroes  of  the 
South  and  the  nation.  The  chief  schools  are  Clark  University 
and  Gammon  Theological  Seminary,  Atlanta,  Georgia;  Claflin 
University,  Orangeburg,  South  Carolina;  Rust  University,  Holly 
Springs,  Mississippi;  Samuel  Huston  College,  Austin,  Texas; 
Walden  University,  Nashville,  Tennessee;  Philander  Smith  Col- 
lege, Little  Rock,  Arkansas;  New  Orleans  University;  and 
Bennett  College,  Greensboro,  North  Carolina. 

The  American  Missionary  Association  of  the  Congregational- 


APPENDIX  D  233 

ists  administers  the  income  of  a  permanent  fund  of  more  than 
$2,000,000.  Of  this  amount  $1,581,861  is  the  Daniel  Hand  Fund 
which  was  founded  in  1888  by  a  gift  of  $1,000,000  by  Daniel 
Hand,  of  Guilford,  Connecticut,  and  was  augmented  by  a  legacy 
of  $500,000  from  his  estate.  This  fund  has  been  of  great 
assistance  to  the  American  Missionary  Association  in  its  splendid 
work  for  Negro  education  in  the  South.  The  Association  main- 
tains 35  schools,  of  which  7  are  colleges,  22  secondary  schools, 
and  6  are  elementary  schools.  The  student  body  reached  8,795 
in  1915,  of  whom  262  are  collegiate,  189  theological,  and  3,040 
are  in  secondary  grades.  The  school  plants  are  valued  at  about 
$1,275,000,  while  the  annual  expenditures  are  about  $300,000.  The 
chief  institutions  are  Fisk  University,  Nashville,  Tennessee; 
Talladega  College,  Alabama;  Straight  University,  New  Orleans, 
Louisiana;  Tougaloo  University,  Mississippi;  Tilloston  College, 
Austin,  Texas. 

The  Southern  Churches.  The  Southern  Baptists  carry  on 
their  educational  work  for  the  Negroes  in  cooperation  with  the 
Negro  National  Baptist  Convention.  The  Secretary  of  the 
Home  Mission  Board  of  the  Southern  Baptist  Convention  in  his 
recent  report  said:  "Southern  Baptists  have  done  far  more  for 
the  black  people  than  the  record  of  the  Mission  Board  and  of 
all  other  Baptist  organizations  show.  The  greatest  good  has 
been  done  by  local  churches  and  individual  men  and  women 
who  have  encouraged  and  helped  the  black  people  in  their  lives 
and  strengthened  their  churches.  But  formal  efforts  of  our 
body  to  aid  the  Negroes  have  been  constant  and  of  incalculable 
value.  During  the  last  year  the  Home  Board  has  aided  in  sup- 
porting thirty-nine  Negro  missionaries  who  have  labored  among 
their  people  and  in  addition  employed  two  Negro  evangelists 
who  have  received  for  baptism  more  than  4,000."  A  movement 
is  now  being  prosecuted  by  the  Southern  Baptists  to  establish 
a  theological  school  for  Negroes.  The  Southern  Presbyterians 
support  five  schools  for  Negroes  of  which  the  chief  is  Stillman 
Institute  at  Tuscaloosa,  Alabama,  in  which  there  are  32  minis- 
terial candidates.  The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  South,  does 
the  major  portion  of  its  educational  work  in  cooperation  with  the 
Colored  Methodist  Episcopal  Church.  It  supports  the  presidents 
of  their  five  colleges  and  maintains  entirely  Paine  College  at 


234  APPENDIX  D 

Augusta,  Georgia,  which  it  owns  and  which  has  a  white  president 
and  six  white  teachers  along  with  seven  colored  teachers.  The 
African  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  has  ten  and  the  African 
Methodist  Episcopal  Zion  Church  has  three  strong  schools  in 
the  South.  The  Southern  Churches  are  realizing  more  and  more 
their  obligation  to  give  to  the  Negro  at  their  doors,  yea,  in 
their  very  homes,  all  the  light  and  blessedness  which  the  gospel 
and  a  Christian  civilization  have  for  any  people,  and  they  are 
meeting  this  obligation  with  increased  earnestness  and  devotion. 


APPENDIX  E 

THE  WORK  OF  THE  MAIN  DENOMINATIONS   IN 
THE  SOUTH 

Episcopal.  The  Church  of  England  in  the  colonies  became 
in  1789  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Church  in  the  United  States. 
The  influence  of  this  religious  body  in  the  early  life  of  the 
nation  was  very  great,  as  is  indicated  by  the  fact  that  such  men 
as  Washington,  Jefferson,  Hamilton,  Madison,  John  Marshall, 
Pendleton,  Patrick  Henry,  Richard  Henry  Lee,  Peyton  Randolph, 
and  George  Mason  were  among  its  communicants.  Thirty-four 
of  the  fifty-six  signers  of  the  Declaration  of  Independence,  and 
twenty-five  of  the  thirty-nine  signers  of  the  Constitution  of  the 
United  States  were  members.  But  at  the  close  of  the  Revolu- 
tionary War  there  were  only  twenty-eight  of  the  ninety-one 
clergymen  left,  as  many  had  returned  to  England.  During  the 
Civil  War  the  dioceses  had  to  act  in  two  bodies  but  they 
declared  for  the  maintenance  of  the  unity  of  the  Church.  To-day 
the  denomination  has  in  the  United  States  1,040,896  communi- 
cants, 5,538  ministers,  8,061  parishes,  and  514,575  enrolled  in  the 
Sunday-schools;  in  the  sixteen  Southern  States  it  has  198,125 
communicants,  1,157  ministers,  2,480  parishes,  and  112,802  en- 
rolled in  the  Sunday-school. 

Presbyterians.  The  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States 
is  a  Southern  religious  body.  It  was  organized  in  1861,  with 
about  75,ooo  members,  out  of  the  Presbyterians  in  the  Southern 
States.  Two  years  later  another  body  was  absorbed,  adding 
35,000  members.  The  membership  in  1915  was  332,339,  with  1,850 
ministers,  3438  churches,  85  Presbyteries,  and  310,278  persons 
enrolled  in  the  Sunday-school.  The  contributions  to  foreign 
missions  were  $544,162,  for  Assembly's  home  missions  $165,718, 
for  local  home  missions  $363,129.  The  Woman's  Auxiliary  con- 
tributed $105,570  for  foreign  missions,  $21,663  for  Assembly's 
home  missions,  and  $33,437  for  local  home  missions,  and 

235 


236  APPENDIX  E 

$442,982  for  all  purposes.  The  church  has  five  theological 
seminaries  with  a  total  attendance  of  about  300  students.  The 
missionaries  in  seven  foreign  lands  are  339,  and  the  total  native 
helpers  1,227.  The  missionaries  employed  in  the  home  field, 
including  200  wives,  number  607. 

Baptists.  The  Southern  Baptist  Convention  was  organized  in 
1845.  It  includes  the  white  Baptist  churches  in  the  sixteen 
Southern  States,  the  District  of  Columbia,  and  a  portion  of 
southern  Illinois.  The  statistics  reported  in  1915  are:  total 
membership  2,588,633,  churches  24,338,  Sunday-school  enrolment 
1,705,871,  value  of  church  property  $56,861,492,  the  total  receipts 
for  foreign  missions  $537,073,  foreign  missionaries  318,  native 
helpers  651,  home  missions  $343,126,  disbursements  to  home 
missionaries  $165,874,  salaries  and  expenses  in  department  of 
evangelism  $52,470,  evangelists  employed  27,  home  missionaries 
1,302,  Negro  missionaries  39,  state  missions  $450,000.  The 
Convention  has  two  theological  seminaries;  one  at  Louisville 
with  an  enrolment  of  330,  and  one  at  Fort  Worth  with  122 
students.  The  Sunday  School  Board  owns  and  conducts  a 
publishing  house  in  Nashville,  Tennessee.  The  number  of  com- 
municants in  the  churches  of  the  Convention  has  doubled  in 
twenty-five  years. 

Lutherans.  The  Lutheran  Church  has  been  doing  work  in 
the  South  since  the  Salzburgers  arrived  in  Georgia  early  in  the 
eighteenth  century.  The  denomination  is  one  in  its  doctrinal 
teachings  but  in  its  practical  operations  in  the  United  States  is 
divided  into  a  number  of  general  bodies,  some  of  which  cooperate 
fully  while  others  work  more  or  less  independently.  There  are 
no  sectional  divisions  and  accordingly  more  than  one  of  the 
general  bodies  are  doing  work  in  the  Southern  States. 

The  denomination  as  a  whole  has  in  North  America  2,437,706 
communicant  members,  15,112  congregations,  and  9,688  ministers, 
maintaining  29  theological  seminaries,  41  colleges,  55  academies, 
10  young  ladies'  seminaries,  9  deaconess'  motherhouses,  14  immi- 
grant missions,  57  orphans'  homes,  43  hospitals,  44  homes  for 
the  aged,  and  issues  270  periodicals.  Separate  statistics  for  the 
South  are  not  available  except  that  there  are  941  ministers  and 
approximately  190,000  communicant  members. 

Methodists.     The  Methodist  Episcopal   Church,   South,   was 


APPENDIX  E  237 

organized  in  1846  in  accordance  with  what  the  Southern  Con- 
ferences of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  in  1844  considered 
a  "plan  of  separation"  which  was  adopted  by  the  General  Con- 
ference of  that  year.  At  the  close  of  the  Civil  War  the  mem- 
bership was  427,000.  In  1870  its  Negro  membership  amounting 
to  70,000  was  organized  into  the  Colored  Methodist  Episcopal 
Church.  The  Church  now  has  7,440  itinerant  preachers,  5,263 
local  preachers,  1,698,163  enrolled  in  Sunday-schools,  133,063  in 
Epworth  Leagues,  19,806  church  organizations,  17,232  church 
houses  valued  at  $59,050,200,  5,656  parsonages  valued  at 
$12,514,196,  contributed  to  foreign  missions  $770,000,  to  home 
and  Conference  missions  $776,000,  to  church  extension  $209,341. 
It  has  360  missionaries  in  the  foreign  fields,  325  supported 
entirely  or  in  part  by  the  home  funds,  and  2,161  that  receive  some 
aid  from  Conference  mission  funds.  The  Church  has  two 
theological  schools  with  an  enrolment  of  170. 

Other  Churches.  The  Church  of  the  Disciples  of  Christ  has 
in  the  United  States  1,363,163  members,  8,498  churches,  and  6,161 
ministers.  No  statistics  can  be  given  for  the  South  except  that 
the  membership  is  481,000.  This  Church  has  no  sectional  marks. 
The  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States  of  America  and 
the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  are  looked  upon  by  the  Southern 
people  as  Northern  churches.  Since  the  union  of  the  Cumber- 
land Presbyterian  Church  with  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the 
U.  S.  A.,  in  1907,  many  Southern  people  have  become  mem- 
bers of  that  Church.  The  membership  in  the  South  is  now 
161,943,  with  1,397  ministers,  2,028  churches,  and  an  enrolment  of 
147,043  in  the  Sunday-schools.  The  home  mission  activities  are 
numerous  and  effective.  The  Cumberland  Presbyterian  Church 
had  its  origin  in  the  South.  A  large  portion  of  the  membership 
refused  to  go  into  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  U.  S.  A.  in 
1907  when  union  was  consummated,  and  reorganized  the  Cum- 
berland Church  which  now  has  a  membership  of  60,000  to  65,000. 
The  Methodist  Episcopal  Church  has  316,733  white  members  in 
the  sixteen  Southern  States  and  336,577  Negro  members.  Of 
the  white  members  84,136  are  in  Missouri,  36,733  in  Oklahoma, 
and  76,542  in  West  Virginia.  The  Methodist  Protestant  Church 
has  about  110,000  members  in  the  South.  The  United  Brethren 
have  715  churches  with  56,893  members  in  the  South.  The 


238  APPENDIX  E 

Reformed  Church  in  the  United  States  has  182  churches  with 
26,223  members.  The  Christian  Church  has  215  churches  and 
22,988  members.  The  United  Presbyterian  Church  has  some 
members  in  the  South  but  not  a  large  number.  The  Congre- 
gationalists  in  the  South  number  10,300.  There  are  some 
Adventists  of  various  kinds,  Baptists  of  the  smaller  sects, 
Methodists  of  the  lesser  communions,  some  others  who  form 
small  churches  in  various  communities. 

Negro  Churches.  Forty  per  cent,  of  the  Negro  population 
of  the  United  States  belong  to  some  Methodist  or  Baptist 
Church,  while  the  Baptist  and  Methodist  constituency  of  that 
race  will  reach  ninety-five  per  cent,  in  the  South.  The  Negro 
Baptists,  largely  members  of  the  churches  in  the  Negro  National 
Baptist  Convention,  number  2,018,868.  At  least  ninety  per  cent, 
of  these  are  in  the  South.  The  Negro  Methodists  are  in  four 
main  groups :  350,000  in  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  280,000 
in  the  Colored  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  620,000  in  the 
African  Methodist  Episcopal  Church,  and  568,000  in  the  African 
Methodist  Episcopal  Zion  Church,  a  total  of  1,818,000.  There  are 
other  smaller  bodies  that  bring  the  number  to  1,900,000.  There  are 
some  Negro  members  in  other  Protestant  bodies  and  a  few  in  the 
Roman  Catholic  Church,  but  no  statistics  have  been  tabulated. 


APPENDIX  F 
INTERCHURCH   MOVEMENTS   AND   ORGANIZATIONS 

Young  Men's  Christian  Association.  The  first  student 
Young  Men's  Christian  Association  in  the  world  was  organized 
at  the  University  of  Virginia,  October  12,  1858.  There  are  in 
the  United  States  612  city  Young  Men's  Christian  Associations, 
218  railroad,  659  college.  In  the  South  there  are  123  city,  70  rail- 
road, and  242  college  Y.  M.  C.  A's.  Among  the  Negroes  of  the 
South  there  are  21  city  and  86  college  associations.  That  the 
Association  has  made  and  is  making  distinct  contributions  to 
the  development  of  the  religious  life  of  the  South  no  one 
will  for  a  moment  successfully  gainsay.  It  has  helped  to 
unify  the  workers  of  the  churches  in  the  city;  it  has  trained 
many  young  laymen  as  personal  workers  in  soul-winning.  In 
the  colleges  and  universities  the  Young  Men's  Christian  Asso- 
ciation has  been  the  unifying  element  in  the  religious  work 
of  students  and  in  many  instances  has  been  the  evangelistic 
agency  for  bringing  young  students  into  a  personal  religious 
experience  and  activity.  From  these  associations  have  largely 
come  the  missionaries  who  have  gone  to  the  foreign  lands 
during  the  last  twenty  years.  The  Student  Volunteer  Move- 
ment came  out  of  the  college  Associations,  and  to-day  it  is  a 
mighty  force  calling  the  Church  to  its  wide  responsibility  for 
the  evangelization  of  non-Christian  peoples.  The  Association  is 
not,  however,  as  strong  to-day  as  a  missionary  agency  in  the 
city,  as  its  position,  list  of  workers,  and  support  of  the  churches 
would  warrant  one  in  expecting.  It  lacks  some  of  the  religious 
zeal  and  force  which  marked  it  in  the  days  of  Sir  George 
Williams.  The  Young  Men's  Christian  Association  should  be  a 
robust,  positive  down-town  missionary  power  in  every  city  in 
which  it  is  located  and  when  it  is  not  such  it  should  be  given 
attention  to  make  it  that.  It  should  be  more  than  a  club-house. 
It  would  do  well  to  be  as  effective  in  its  evangelistic  appeal  as  it  is 

239 


240  APPENDIX  F 

comprehensive  in  its  social  service.  Its  passion  for  men  must  be 
the  Christ  passion  that  seeks  salvation  through  faith  in  a  divine 
Savior. 

The  Young  Women's  Christian  Association.  The  Young 
Women's  Christian  Association  has  just  celebrated  its  fiftieth 
anniversary.  During  all  these  years  it  has  stood  as  a  great  inter- 
denominational force  working  among  young  women  in  all  walks 
of  life,  having  as  its  ultimate  purpose  "to  bring  young  women 
to  such  a  knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ  as  Savior  and  Lord  as  shall 
mean  for  the  individual  young  woman  fulness  of  life  and  de- 
velopment of  character." 

To-day  there  are  988  Associations  in  cities,  towns,  counties, 
schools,  and  colleges  with  a  total  membership  of  over  360,000. 

In  the  South  "Eight  Week  Clubs"  are  demonstrating  the  value 
of  Christian  leadership  in  the  country.  Leaders  trained  in  the 
college  through  the  Young  Women's  Christian  Association  are 
going  home  for  the  summer  vacation  to  bring  together  the 
girls  and  young  women  of  a  community  "to  learn  some  of  the 
things  that  mean  a  happier,  more  abundant  life;  and  to  unite 
them  in  definite  service  to  their  home  neighborhood." 

The  religious  life  of  the  Association  finds  expression  through 
fifteen  summer  conferences  and  eight  high  school  and  club  girls' 
councils  held  in  various  parts  of  the  country.  The  programs 
include  Bible  and  mission  study  classes,  councils  regarding  the 
technique  of  Association  work,  addresses  on  Christian  funda- 
mentals and  various  phases  of  Christian  life  and  service.  The 
fact  that  over  five  thousand  girls  came  together  last  summer 
attests  the  place  of  these  gatherings  in  the  life  of  young  women. 

The  Association  born  in  the  Church  has  chosen  to  work  with 
the  Church  with  the  one  fundamental  object,  Christian  character. 
Through  the  Bible  and  mission  study  classes  and  religious  meet- 
ings of  the  Association,  many  girls  have  come  to  their  first 
knowledge  of  Jesus  Christ,  while  others  have  had  their  faith 
deepened.  "I  am  come  that  ye  might  have  life  and  have  it  more 
abundantly,"  the  motto  of  the  Young  Women's  Christian  Asso- 
ciation has  been  made  a  reality  in  the  lives  of  thousands  of  girls 
and  women. 

Laymen's  Missionary  Movement.  The  Laymen's  Missionary 
Movement  was  born  in  the  mind  of  Mr.  John  B.  Sleman,  Jr., 


APPENDIX  F  241 

a  layman  of  Washington,  D.  C,  while  in  attendance  upon  the 
International  Convention  of  the  Student  Volunteer  Movement  in 
Nashville,  Tennessee.  He  was  seated  in  the  gallery  of  the 
Ryman  Auditorium  where  more  than  three  thousand  students 
who  were  volunteers  had  assembled  and  where  the  great  plat- 
form was  filled  with  returned  missionaries  and  another  two 
thousand  eager  Christian  workers  were  in  attendance.  It  was  a 
meeting  of  great  spiritual  power.  The  thought  came  to  him: 
"If  students  will  offer  themselves  by  the  thousands  for  mis- 
sionary service,  why  may  not  Christian  business  men  inaugurate 
an  advance  movement  that  would  insure  the  ready  support  of 
all  who  would  agree  to  go?"  The  idea  met  with  instant  favor 
from  the  missionary  leaders  and  on  November  16,  1906,  on  the 
occasion  of  the  Centennial  celebration  of  the  Haystack  Prayer 
Meeting  that  inaugurated  the  first  American  foreign  missionary 
board,  the  Laymen's  Missionary  Movement  was  launched. 

The  churches  with  headquarters  in  the  South,  like  those  with 
headquarters  in  the  North,  gave  their  cordial  approval  to  the 
movement  and  adopted  it  as  an  agency  for  enlisting  with  fresh 
zeal  and  renewed  energy  the  laymen  in  the  greatest  of  all  work, 
the  evangelization  of  the  world.  In  fact,  in  no  part  of  the 
country  was  there  a  more  ready  and  prompt  response  to  the 
underlying  principles  of  the  Movement  than  in  the  Southern 
States.  The  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  United  States  led  with 
a  great  meeting  in  Birmingham,  May  15-18,  1907,  and  the 
increase  in  the  collections  during  the  following  year  was 
phenomenal.  The  Southern  Baptists  in  their  Convention  in 
May,  1907,  took  favorable  action,  appointed  an  executive  com- 
mittee to  give  direction  and  later  appointed  a  field  secretary. 
This  body  was  perhaps  the  first  to  include  home  as  well  as 
foreign  missions  as  the  object  to  be  advanced  by  the  Movement. 
The  Southern  Methodists  organized  their  Movement,  pursuant  to 
the  action  of  the  Board  of  Missions,  at  Knoxville,  Tennessee, 
October  7,  1907,  at  a  meeting  of  laymen  directed  by  the  mis- 
sionary secretaries.  The  principles  of  the  Movement  have  taken 
firm  hold  of  the  hearts  and  consciences  of  the  leading  laymen 
of  the  three  denominations  that  are  distinctively  Southern.  The 
Lutherans  of  the  South  have  also  kept  a  secretary  in  the  field 
for  these  ten  years. 


242  APPENDIX  F 

Missionary  Education  Movement.  The  Missionary  Educa- 
tion Movement  had  been  in  the  minds  of  several  missionary 
workers  scattered  over  the  United  States  and  Canada  for  a 
number  of  years  before  representatives  of  Southern  and  Northern 
mission  boards  in  the  United  States  and  Canada  met  at  Silver 
Bay,  on  Lake  George,  New  York,  in  1902,  and  organized  this 
Movement. 

The  following  year  a  summer  conference  was  established  in 
the  South  which  has  been  continued  ever  since,  meeting  annually 
now  at  Blue  Ridge,  North  Carolina.  Every  one  of  the  denom- 
inations represented  in  the  Southern  States  has  organized  educa- 
tional departments  for  the  promotion  of  missionary  education  in 
thousands  of  churches.  Institutes  have  been  held  in  various 
cities  and  towns,  and  the  contributions  for  missions  have  in- 
creased as  a  direct  result  of  this  organization. 

As  a  result  of  the  educational  departments  of  the  mission 
boards  and  the  Missionary  Education  Movement,  individuals  in 
various  Southern  States  have  undertaken  specific  local  missionary 
service.  Some  have  gone  to  the  foreign  field ;  and  there  has  been 
a  constant  growth  in  the  spirit  of  missionary  endeavor  and 
missionary  zeal,  until  more  than  fifty  assemblies  in  the  Southern 
States  are  following  in  part  the  program  that  has  been  outlined 
by  this  Movement. 

Woman's  Work.  While  the  missionary  movement  among 
the  women  is  not  like  that  among  the  men  yet  it  is  a  very 
decided  movement  and  one  that  is  strong,  effective,  well- 
organized,  and  well-directed.  The  women's  societies  of  the 
Southern  Churches  are  affiliated  with  the  Federation  of  Woman's 
Boards  of  Foreign  Missions  of  North  America  and  with  the 
Council  of  Women  for  Home  Missions  and  keep  in  vital  rela- 
tions with  the  great  missionary  movements  of  this  country. 
The  following  facts  will  indicate  how  well  their  work  is  being 
done.  The  Southern  Presbyterian  Woman's  Auxiliaries  number 
2,684,  with  a  total  membership  of  67,643.  They  raised  last  year 
$442,982  for  various  benevolences,  of  which  $105,570  went  to 
foreign  missions,  $87,854  to  various  home  missions,  $10,379  to 
Christian  Education,  $2,348  for  Sunday  School  Extension,  $9,907 
for  schools  and  colleges,  $654  for  Bible  causes,  $80,368  for  Or- 
phans' Homes,  and  $146,502  for  miscellaneous  benevolences.  The 


APPENDIX  F  243 

Woman's  Society  does  not  administer  the  funds  raised,  but  turns 
them  over  to  the  proper  general  boards  of  the  Church  to  be 
administered  in  connection  with  the  funds  raised  by  the  Church 
as  a  whole.  The  Southern  Baptist  women  have  a  Woman's 
Missionary  Union,  auxiliary  to  the  Southern  Baptist  Convention, 
with  13,424  auxiliary  organizations  and  a  total  membership  of 
nearly  a  quarter  of  a  million.  The  total  amount  contributed  last 
year  was  $315,102.  The  funds  raised  in  a  congregation  are 
turned  over  to  the  respective  state  or  general  boards  to  be 
administered  by  them  along  with  the  funds  from  other  sources, 
a  special  account  being  kept  of  the  amounts  collected  by 
the  women.  The  Woman's  Missionary  Union  conducts  at 
Louisville  a  training  school  with  about  75  students  who  are 
being  prepared  for  home  and  foreign  missionary  service.  Dur- 
ing 1915  they  distributed  240,000  leaflets  and  pamphlets.  They 
have  an  organ,  Royal  Service,  with  a  subscription  of  19,000. 
The  societies  are  formed  not  only  for  women,  but  the  union 
also  posters  societies  for  young  ladies,  girls,  and  boys.  The 
Southern  Methodist  women  have  4,529  adult  auxiliaries  with 
106,783  members,  1,293  young  people's  societies  with  24,683 
members,  and  1,726  children's  societies  with  42,012  members, 
or  7,558  organizations  with  a  total  membership  of  173,478. 
They  collected  last  year  for  foreign  missions  $295,000,  for 
connectional  home  missions  $267,646,  and  for  local  church  work 
$378,617.  Up  to  1910  there  were  two  organizations,  home 
and  foreign.  They  were  then  combined  into  the  Woman's 
Missionary  Society  with  the  two  departments.  The  entire 
organization  was  made  a  part  of  the  general  missionary  work 
of  the  Church  under  the  general  Board  of  Missions.  The 
Society,  however,  was  given  a  Woman's  Missionary  Council 
made  up  of  representatives  from  the  forty  Conference  organiza- 
tions. The  Council  has  an  executive  committee  that  directs  the 
work  during  the  year.  The  Society  has  two  administrative  secre- 
taries in  charge  of  the  home  and  foreign  departments  respectively,, 
a  treasurer  who  handles  all  its  funds,  an  educational  secretary, 
and  a  home  base  secretary.  The  Council  sits  annually  and 
is  in  session  six  or  eight  days.  It  makes  the  appropriations 
to  the  fields,  appoints  its  missionaries,  elects  its  officers,  and 
transacts  such  business  as  pertains  to  the  work  of  the  Society, 


244  APPENDIX  F 

but  its  appropriations  and  appointments  are  subject  to  the 
approval  of  the  Board  of  Missions.  The  Society  has  147  mis- 
sionaries in  foreign  fields,  80  deaconesses,  and  50  other  salaried 
workers  in  the  home  field.  In  the  home  field  it  has  thirteen 
schools  with  2,168  pupils  and  in  the  foreign  field  23  boarding- 
schools  with  3,600  pupils,  and  67  day-schools  with  1,784  pupils. 
The  Home  Department  carries  on  23  settlement  homes  for 
white  people  called  Wesley  Houses,  and  two  for  Negroes 
called  Bethlehem  Houses.  There  are  18  other  social  centers 
through  which  social  service  is  rendered.  The  Society  has 
the  Scarritt  Bible  and  Training  School  in  Kansas  City  which 
has  an  annual  attendance  of  90  to  95,  or  a  total  enrolment  since 
1892  of  1,225  and  260  graduates  who  have  been  prepared  for 
the  various  phases  of  mission  work. 

The  women  of  the  South  who  are  members  of  the  Churches 
whose  headquarters  are  not  in  the  South  are  just  as  active  and 
efficient  as  those  mentioned.  No  greater  moral  and  religious 
influence  is  known  or  felt  in  the  Southern  States  than  that 
emanating  from  and  supported  by  the  loyal,  devoted  and  conse- 
crated women  who  labor  in  and  through  the  women's  missionary 
societies  of  the  Churches. 

Sunday-School.  The  Sunday-school  is  not  specifically  an 
interchurch  movement  but  it  has  received  vast  impetus  and 
power  through  the  interdenominational  associations  which  have 
promoted  it.  The  union  Sunday-school  is  rare,  and  when  found 
it  is  weak  and  of  limited  value  and  is  usually  in  the  rural 
districts.  The  American  Sunday  School  Union  of  Philadelphia 
was  a  potent  agency  in  inaugurating  Sunday-school  work  in 
many  communities.  Up  to  1860  the  great  country  churches  com- 
mon to  the  South  did  not  furnish  a  ready  field  for  Sunday-school 
workers.  Stress  at  that  time  was  laid  upon  preaching,  and  the 
country  preachers  were  men  of  great  ability  and  far-reaching 
influence.  In  recent  years  the  Sunday-school  has  come  into  its 
own.  Dr.  John  A.  Broadus,  a  distinguished  Baptist  minister, 
and  Dr.  Atticus  G.  Haygood,  afterward  a  Methodist  bishop, 
were  pioneers  in  developing  the  new  Sunday-school  interest  in 
these  two  strong  churches.  While  no  Southern  man  was  given 
a  place  on  the  first  lesson  committee  of  the  International 
Uniform  Lesson  System,  which  was  adopted  in  1872,  yet  the 


APPENDIX  F  245 

uniform  lessons  were  soon  adopted  by  all  the  denominations  of 
the  South.  The  International  Sunday  School  Association,  work- 
ing through  international  organizations  in  the  states,  has  never 
gained  the  hold  in  the  South  that  it  has  in  the  West  and  even  in 
the  East.  Denominational  feeling  is  more  intense  and  vital,  and 
the  beautiful  spirit  of  solidarity  that  marks  the  spirit  of  the 
South  did  not  extend  to  organizations  whose  chief  direction  was 
Northern  or  Eastern.  This  feeling  may  have  retarded  the 
growth  of  Sunday-school  work  in  the  South  for  a  while,  but  a 
new  era  has  already  opened.  The  Methodists  created  a  depart- 
ment of  Sunday-schools  in  1870,  the  Baptists  in  1890,  and  the 
Presbyterians  in  1901,  and  to-day  these  three  churches  are 
making  marvelous  progress  in  the  enrolment  of  pupils  and  in 
the  superb  literature  with  which  they  are  supplying  their  con- 
stituencies. The  Southern  representatives  to-day  have  generous 
recognition  in  the  interdenominational  Sunday-school  councils 
and  the  work  of  the  Southern  Sunday-school  boards  is  modern, 
progressive,  and  aggressive.  All  the  denominations  in  the  South 
are  putting  supreme  emphasis  on  the  Sunday-school.  While 
there  are  many  Southern  children  and  youths  still  out  of  the 
Sunday-schools,  yet,  with  the  extensive  organizations  which  are 
now  doing  intensive  work  in  all  parts  of  the  field,  this  condition 
will  not  last  long.  The  Sunday-school  of  the  South  has  become 
a  great  educational,  missionary,  and  evangelistic  agency  whose 
possibilities  have  scarcely  been  recognized.  The  successful  opera- 
tion of  the  Sunday-school  system  will  remove  moral  illiteracy 
and  religious  delinquency  from  the  hitherto  neglected  sectiong 
of  the  country,  city,  and  town. 


APPENDIX  G 
Historical  and  General 

Brown,  William  G.     The  Lower  South  in  American  History. 

1902.     Macmillan  Company,  New  York.     $1.50. 
Dyer,  G.  W.     Democracy  in  the  South  Before  the  Civil  War. 

1905.     Smith  &  Lamar,  Nashville.    $i.oq. 
Fiske,  John.    Old   Virginia  and  Her  Neighbors.    2  vols.    1897. 

Houghton,  Mifflin  &  Co.,  Boston.    $2.00  each. 
Ford,  Henry  Jones.    Scotch  Irish  in  America.    1915.    Princeton 

University  Press,  Princeton,  N.  J.    $2.00. 
Hart,  Albert  B.    The  Southern  South.    1910.    D.  Appleton  &  Co., 

New  York.    $1.50. 
Murphy,   Edward   G.     Problems  of  the  Present  South.     1909. 

Longmans,  Green  &  Co.,  New  York.    $1.50,  net. 
Page,  Thomas  N.     The  Old  South.     1892.     Charles   Scribner's 

Sons,  New  York.    $1.25. 

Education  and  Religion 

Butterfield,  K.  L.    The  Country  Church  and  the  Rural  Problem. 

1911.     University  of  Chicago  Press,   Chicago.     $1.00. 
Douglass,  H.  Paul.    Christian  Reconstruction  in  the  South.    1909. 

Pilgrim  Press,  Boston.    $1.50. 

Fiske,  G.  Walter.    The  Challenge  of  the  Country.    1912.    Asso- 
ciation Press,  New  York.    $1.25,  net. 
Foght,  H.  W.     The  American  Rural  School.     1910.     Macmillan 

Company,  New  York.    $1.25,  net. 
Gill,  C.  O.,  and  Gifford  Pinchot.     The  Country  Church.     1913. 

Macmillan  Company,  New  York.    $1.25. 
Kirbye,  J.  Edward.     Puritanism  in  the  South.     1908.     Pilgrim 

Press,  Boston.    75  cents. 
Report  of  United  States  Commissioner  of  Education,   1914-15. 

Washington,  D.  C. 

The  General  Education  Board,  1902-1914. 
Wilson,  Warren  H.     The  Church  of  the  Open  Country.     1911. 

Missionary  Education  Movement,  New  York.    60  cents. 

Industry  and  Agriculture 

" After  Fifty  Years  in  the  South,"  Manufacturer's  Record,  Balti- 
more.   April  8,  1915. 

Bailey,  L.  H.    The  Country  Life  Movement  in  the  United  States. 
1911.    Macmillan  Company,  New  York.    $1.25,  net. 

246 


APPENDIX  G  247 

Bruce,  P.  A.  The  Rise  of  the  New  South.  1905.  (Vol.  XVII, 
History  of  North  America.)  George  Barrie  &  Sons,  Phila- 
delphia. $7.50  and  $10.00. 

Butterfield,  K.  L.  Chapters  in  Rural  Progress.  1908.  University 
of  Chicago  Press,  Chicago.  $1.00. 

Carver,  T.  N.  Principles  in  Rural  Economics.  1911.  Ginn  &  Co., 
Boston.  $1.30. 

"Constant  Call  of  the  South,"  Manufacturer's  Record,  Baltimore. 
May  13,  1915. 

"Increase  in  the  South's  Wealth,"  Manufacturer's  Record,  Balti- 
more. June  10,  1915. 

Plunkett,  Sir  Horace.  The  Rural  Life  Problem  in  the  United 
States.  1910.  Macmillan  Company,  New  York.  $1.25. 

Report  of  the  Department  of  Agriculture,  1914-15.    Washington. 

The  South  in  the  Building  of  the  Nation.  12  vols.  Southern 
Historical  Publication  Society,  Richmond,  Va. 

"The  South  the  Nation's  Asset,"  Manufacturer's  Record,  Balti- 
more. March  27,  1913. 

Negro,  Mountaineer,  and  American  Indian 

Baker,  R.  S.    Following  the  Color  Line.    1908.    Doubleday,  Page 

&  Co.,  New  York.    $2.00,  net. 
Hammond,   Mrs.   L.   H.     In  Black   and   White.     1914.     F.   H. 

Reyell  Co.,  New  York.    $1.25,  net. 
Harrison,  W.  P.,  Editor.     The  Gospel  Among  the  Slaves.     1893. 

Smith  &  Lamar,  Nashville.    $1.25. 
Hughson,  Walter.    The  Church's  Mission  to  the  Mountaineers  of 

the  South.     1908.     Church  Missions  Publishing  Co.,  Hartford, 

Conn.     75  cents. 
Kephart,   Horace.     Our  Southern  Highlanders.     1913.     Outing 

Publishing  Co.,  New  York.    $2.50. 
Merriam,  George  S.     The  Negro  and  the  Nation.     1906.    Henry 

Holt  &  Co.,  New  York.    $1.75,  net. 
Page,  Thomas  N.    The  Negro;  the  Southerner's  Problem.    1904. 

Charles  Scribner's  Sons,  New  York.    $1.25,  net. 
Thompson,   Samuel  H.     The  Highlanders  of  the  South.     1910. 

Eaton  &  Mains,  New  York.    50  cents. 
Washington,  Booker  T.     The  Future  of  the  American  Negro. 

1907.    Small,  Maynard  &  Co.,  Boston.    $1.50. 
Washington,  Booker  T.     The  Negro  in  Business.    1907.    Hertel, 

Jenkins  &  Co.,  Boston.    $1.50. 

Weatherford,  W.  D.  Negro  Life  in  the  South.  1910.  Associa- 
tion Press,  New  York.  50  cents. 

Wilson,  Samuel  T.    The  Southern  Mountaineers.    1906.    Presby- 
terian Board  of  Home  Missions,  New  York.    60  cents. 
Work,  Marvin  N.     The  Negro  Year  Book.     1915.     Negro  Year 

Book  Publishing  Company,  Tuskegee,  Alabama.    25  cents. 


MISSION  STUDY  COURSES 


f  Any  where,  provided  it  be  FORWARD." — David  Livingstone 


Prepared  under  the  direction  of  the 
MISSIONARY  EDUCATION  MOVEMENT 

OF    THE    UNITED    STATES    AND    CANADA 


EDUCATIONAL  COMMITTEE:  G.  F.  Sutherland,  Chairman; 
A.  E.  Armstrong,  J.  I.  Armstrong,  Hugh  L.  Burleson, 
E.  C.  Cronk,  W.  E.  Doughty,  H.  Paul  Douglass,  Arthur 
R.  Gray,  R.  A.  Hutchison,  B.  Carter  Millikin,  John  M. 
Moore,  John  H.  Poorman,  James  K.  Quay,  T.  Bronson  Ray. 


The  aim  of  the  Movement  is  to  publish  a  series  of  text- 
books covering  the  various  home  and  foreign  mission  fields 
and  problems  and  written  by  leading  authorities. 

The  following  text-books  having  a  sale  of  over  1,750,000 
have  been  published: 

1.  THE  PRICE  OF  AFRICA.     Biographical.     By   S.   Earl 
Taylor. 

2.  INTO  ALL  THE  WORLD.    A  general  survey  of  missions. 
By  Amos  R.  Wells. 

3.  PRINCELY  MEN  IN  THE  HEAVENLY  KINGDOM.     Bio- 
graphical.    By  Harlan  P.  Beach. 

4.  SUNRISE  IN  THE  SUNRISE  KINGDOM.    Revised  Edition. 
A  study  of  Japan.    By  John  H.  DeForest. 

5.  HEROES  OF  THE  CROSS  IN  AMERICA.    Home  Missions. 
Biographical.     By  Don  O.  Shelton. 

6.  DAYBREAK  IN  THE  DARK  CONTINENT.     Revised  Edi- 
tion.   A  study  of  Africa.     By  Wilson  S.  Naylor. 

7.  THE   CHRISTIAN   CONQUEST  OF  INDIA.     A   study  of 
India.    By  James  M.  Thoburn. 

8.  ALIENS  OR  AMERICANS  ?  A  study  of  Immigration.  By 
Howard  B.  Grose. 

249 


25o       MISSION  STUDY  COURSES 

9.  THE  UPLIFT  OF  CHINA.    Revised  Edition.    A  study  of 
China.    By  Arthur  H.  Smith. 

10.  THE  CHALLENGE  OF  THE  CITY.    A  study  of  the  City. 
By  Jesiah  Strong. 

n.  THE  WHY  AND  How  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS.  A  study 
of  the  relation  of  the  home  Church  to  the  foreign  mis- 
sionary enterprise.  By  Arthur  J.  Brown. 

12.  THE  MOSLEM  WORLD.    A  study  of  the  Mohammedan 
world.    By  Samuel  M.  Zwemer. 

13.  THE  FRONTIER.     A  study  of   the   New  West.     By 
Ward  Platt. 

14.  SOUTH  AMERICA  :  Its  Missionary  Problems.    A  study 
of  South  America.     By  Thomas  B.  Neely. 

15.  THE  UPWARD  PATH  :  The  Evolution  of  a  Race.    A 
study  of  the  Negro.    By  Mary  Helm. 

16.  KOREA   IN    TRANSITION.     A   study    of    Korea.      By 
James  S.  Gale. 

17.  ADVANCE  IN  THE  ANTILLES.     A  study  of  Cuba  and 
Porto  Rico.    By  Howard  B.  Grose. 

18.  THE   DECISIVE   HOUR  OF   CHRISTIAN   MISSIONS.     A 
study  of  conditions  throughout  the  non-Christian  world. 
By  John  R.  Mott. 

19.  INDIA  AWAKENING.     A  study  of  present  conditions 
in  India.     By  Sherwood  Eddy. 

20.  THE  CHURCH  OF  THE  OPEN  COUNTRY.     A  study  of 
the  problem  of  the  Rural  Church.    By  Warren  H.  Wilson. 

21.  THE  CALL  OF  THE  WORLD.     A  survey  of  conditions 
at  home  and  abroad  of  challenging  interest  to  men.     By 
W.  E.  Doughty. 

22.  THE  EMERGENCY  IN  CHINA.    A  study  of  present-day 
conditions  in  China.    By  F.  L.  Hawks  Pott. 

23.  MEXICO  TO-DAY  :  Social,  Political,  and  Religious  Con- 
ditions.    A   study   of   present-day   conditions    in    Mexico. 
By  George  B.  Winton. 

24.  IMMIGRANT  FORCES.   A  study  of  the  immigrant  in  his 
home  and  American  environment.    By  William  P.  Shriver. 

25.  THE   NEW   ERA  IN   ASIA.     Contrast   of   early   and 
present  conditions  in  the  Orient.     By  Sherwood  Eddy. 

26.  THE  SOCIAL  ASPECTS  OF  FOREIGN  MISSIONS.    A  study 
of    the    social    achievements    of    foreign    missions.      By 
W.  H.  P.  Faunce. 

27.  THE  NEW  HOME  MISSIONS.    A  study  of  the  social 
achievements  and  social  program  of  home  missions.     By 
H.  Paul  Douglass. 

28.  THE   AMERICAN   INDIAN   ON   THE   NEW   TRAIL.     A 
story  of  the  Red  Men  of  the  United  States  and  the  Chris- 
tian gospel.    By  Thomas  C.  Moffett. 


MISSION  STUDY  COURSES        251 

2g.  THE  INDIVIDUAL  AND  THE  SOCIAL  GOSPEL.  A  study 
of  the  individual  in  the  local  church  and  his  relation  to  the 
social  message  of  the  gospel.  By  Shailer  Mathews. 

30.  RISING   CHURCHES   IN   NON-CHRISTIAN   LANDS.     A 
study  of  the  native   Church  and   its   development  in  the 
foreign  mission  field.    By  Arthur  J.  Brown. 

31.  THE    CHURCHES    AT   WORK.     A    statement    of   the 
work  of  the  churches  in  the  local  community  in  the  United 
States.     By  Charles  L.  White. 

32.  EFFICIENCY    POINTS.      The    Bible,    Service,    Giving, 
Prayer — four  conditions  of  efficiency.    By  W.  E.  Doughty. 

33.  SOUTH  AMERICAN   NEIGHBORS.     A   study  of   South 
America,  including  the  results  of  the  Panama  Conference. 
By  Homer  C.  Stuntz. 

34.  THE  SOUTH  TO-DAY.    A  study  of  the  religious  life 
of  the  Southern  States.    By  John  M.  Moore. 

35.  THE  UNITY  OF  THE  AMERICAS.    A  discussion  of  the 
relations    of    commerce,    education,    politics,    and    religion 
between  the  Americas.    By  Robert  E.  Speer. 

In  addition  to  the  above  courses,  the  following  have  been 
published  especially  for  use  among  younger  persons : 

1.  UGANDA'S    WHITE   MAN   OF   WORK.     The    story    of 
Alexander  M.  Mackay  of  Africa.    By  Sophia  Lyon  Fans. 

2.  SERVANTS  OF  THE  KING.    A  series  of  eleven  sketches 
of  famous  home  and  foreign  missionaries.    By  Robert  E. 
Speer. 

3.  UNDER  MARCHING  ORDERS.    The  story  of  Mary  Porter 
Gamewell  of   China.     By  Ethel  Daniels   Hubbard. 

4.  WINNING  THE  OREGON  COUNTRY.  The  story  of  Marcus 
Whitman   and   Jason   Lee    in   the    Oregon    country.     By 
John  T.  Paris. 

5.  THE    BLACK    BEARDED    BARBARIAN.      The    story    of 
George  Leslie  Mackay  of  Formosa.     By  Marian  Keith. 

6.  LIVINGSTONE  THE  PATHFINDER.    The  story  of  David 
Livingstone.     By  Basil  Mathews. 

7.  ANN  OF  AVA.    The  story  of  Ann  Hasseltine  Judson 
of  Burma.    By  Ethel  Daniels  Hubbard. 

8.  COMRADES  IN  SERVICE.     Eleven  brief  biographies  of 
Christian  workers.    By  Margaret  E.  Burton. 

9.  MAKERS   OF   SOUTH   AMERICA.     Sketches   of   twelve 
epoch-making   leaders    in    South    American   history.     By 
Margarette  Daniels. 

These  books  are  published  by  mutual  arrangement  among 
the  home  and  foreign  mission  boards,  to  whom  all  orders 
should  be  addressed.  They  are  bound  uniformly  and  are 
sold  at  60  cents  in  cloth,  and  40  cents  in  paper;  prepaid. 
Nos.  21,  29,  32,  and  35  are  25  cents  in  cloth,  prepaid. 


of 


and 


INASMUCH  as  the  publishing  business  of  the  Missionary  Edu- 
cation Movement  is  conducted  in  behalf  of  the  Foreign  and 
Home  Mission  Boards  and  Societies  of  the  United  States  and 
Canada,  the  Movement  conducts  no  retail  business,  but  directs 
all  orders  to  the  Mission  Boards. 

Orders  for  literature  on  foreign  and  home  missions  should  be 
addressed  to  the  secretaries  representing  those  organizations,  who 
are  prepared  to  furnish  special  helps  to  leaders  of  mission  study 
classes  and  to  other  missionary  workers. 

If  the  address  of  the  secretary  of  the  foreign  or  home  mission 
board  or  society  of  your  denomination  is  not  included  within, 
orders  may  be  sent  to  the  Missionary  Education  Movement,  but 
in  no  case  will  the  Movement  fill  orders  from  persons  who  be- 
long to  the  Churches  indicated  in  this  list.  All  persons  ordering 
directly  from  the  Missionary  Education  Movement  are  requested 
to  indicate  their  denomination  when  ordering. 

ADVENT    CHRISTIAN  —  American    Advent    Mission    Society,    Rev. 

George  E.  Tyler,  160  .Warren  Street,  Boston,  Mass. 
ASSOCIATE  REFORMED  PRESBYTERIAN  —  Young  People's  Christian 

Union  and  Sabbath  School  Work,  Rev.  J.  W.  Carson,  New- 

berry,  S.  C. 

BAPTIST  (NORTH)  —  Department  of  Missionary  Education  of  the 
Cooperating  Organizations  of  the  Northern  Baptist 
Convention,  Rev.  John  M.  Moore,  23  East  26th  Street, 
New  York  City. 

BAPTIST  (SOUTH)  —  Foreign  Mission  Board  of  the  Southern  Bap- 
tist Convention,  Rev.  T.  B.  Ray,  1103  Main  Street,  Rich- 
mond, Va.  (Correspondence  concerning  both  foreign  and 
home  missions.) 

BAPTIST  (COLORED)  —  Foreign  Mission  Board  of  the  National  Bap- 

tist Convention,  Rev.  L.  G.  Jordan,  624  South  Eighteenth 

Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
CHRISTIAN  —  The  Mission  Board  of  the  Christian  Church  :  Foreign 

Missions,   Rev.   M.   T.   Morrill  ;   Home  Missions,   Rev.   Omar 

S.  Thomas,  C.  P.  A.  Building,  Dayton,  Ohio. 

CHURCH  OF  THE  BRETHREN  —  General  Mission  Board  of  the  Church 
of  the  Brethren,  Rev.  Galen  B.  Royer,  Elgin,  111. 

CONGREGATIONAL  —  American  Board  of  Commissioners  for  Foreign 
Missions,  Rev.  D.  Brewer  Eddy,  14  Beacon  Street,  Boston, 


American  Missionary  Association,  Rev.  C.  J.  Ryder,  287  Fourth 

Avenue,  New  York  City. 
The  Congregational  Home  Missionary  Society,  Rev.  William  S. 

Beard,  287  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York  City. 


DISCIPLES   OP    CHRIST — Foreign    Christian   Missionary    Society, 

Rev.  Stephen  J.  Corey,  Box  884,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 
The  American  Christian  Missionary  Society,  Mr.  R.  M.  Hop- 
kins, Carew  Building,  Cincinnati,  Ohio. 

EVANGELICAL  ASSOCIATION — Missionary  Society  of  the  Evangel- 
ical Association,  Rev.  George  Johnson,  1903  Woodland  Ave- 
nue, S.  E.,  Cleveland,  Ohio. 

EVANGELICAL  LUTHERAN — Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  Gen- 
eral Council  of  the  Evangelical  Lutheran  Church  in  N.  A., 
Rev.  George  Drach,  Trappe,  Pa. 

Board  of  Home  Missions  of  the  General  Council  of  the  Evan- 
gelical Lutheran  Church  in  North  America,  805-807  Drexel 
Building,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  General  Synod  of  the  Evan- 
gelical Lutheran  Church  in  the  U.  S.  A.,  Rev.  L.  B. 
Wolf,  21  West  Saratoga  Street,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Board  of  Home  Missions  and  Church  Extension  of  the  Evan- 
gelical Lutheran  Church,  Rev.  H.  H.  Weber,  York,  Pa. 

Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  United  Synod  of  the  Evan- 
gelical Lutheran  Church  in  the  South,  Rev.  C.  L.  Brown, 
Columbia,  S.  C. 

FRIENDS — American  Friends  Board  of  Foreign  Missions,  Mr.  Ross 

A.  Hadley,  Richmond,  Ind. 

Evangelistic  and  Church  Extension  Board  of  the  Friends  Five 
Years'  Meeting,  Mr.  Harry  R.  Keates,  1314  Lyon  Street,  Des 
Moines,  Iowa. 

GORMAN  EVANGELICAL — Foreign  Mission  Board,  German  Evan- 
gelical Synod  of  North  America,  Rev.  E.  Schmidt,  1377  Main 
Street,  Buffalo,  N.  Y. 

Board  of  Home  Missions  of  the  German  Evangelical  Synod  of 
North  America,  Evansville,  Ind. 

MBTHODIST  EPISCOPAL — The  Department  of  Missionary  Educa- 
tion. Representing  the  Board  of  Foreign  Missions,  the  Board 
of  Home  Missions  and  Church  Extension,  and  the  Board  of 
Sunday  Schools.  150  Fifth  Ave.,  New  York  City. 

METHODIST  EPISCOPAL  (SOUTH) — The  Educational  Department 
of  the  Board  of  Missions  of  the  Methodist  Episcopal  Church, 
South,  Rev.  E.  H.  Rawlings,  810  Broadway,  Nashville,  Ten- 
nessee. (Correspondence  concerning  both  foreign  and  home 
missions.) 

METHODIST  PROTESTANT — Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the 
Methodist  Protestant  Church,  Rev.  Fred.  C.  Klein,  316  North 
Charles  Street,  Baltimore,  Md. 

Board  of  Home  Missions  of  the  Methodist  Protestant  Church, 
Rev.  Charles  H.  Beck,  West  Lafayette,  Ohio. 

MORAVIAN — The  Department  of  Missionary  Education  of  the 
Moravian  Church  in  America,  Northern  Province,  Rev.  F.  W. 
Stengel,  Lititz,  Pa. 

PRESBYTERIAN  (U.  S.  A.) — The  Board  of  Foreign  Missions  of  the 
Presbyterian  Church  in  the  U.  S.  A..  Mr.  B.  Carter  Millikin, 
Educational  Secretary ;  Rev.  George  H.  Trull,  Sunday  School 
Secretary,  156  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York  City. 
Board  of  Home  Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the 
U.  S.  A.,  Mr.  Ralph  A.  Felton,  156  Fifth  Avenue,  New  York 
City. 


PRESBYTERIAN  (U.  S.) — Executive  Committee  of  Foreign  Mis- 
sions of  the  Presbyterian  Church  in  the  U.  S.,  Mr.  John  I. 
Armstrong,  154  Fifth  Avenue,  North,  Nashville,  Tenn. 
General  Assembly's  Home  Missions  of  the  Presbyterian  Church 
in  the  U.  S.,  Rev.  S.  L.  Morris,  1522  Hurt  Building,  Atlanta, 
Ga. 

PROTESTANT  EPISCOPAL — The  Domestic  and  Foreign  Missionary 
Society  of  the  Protestant  Episcopal  Church  in  the  U.  S.  A., 
Rev.  Arthur  R.  Gray,  281  Fourth  Avenue,  New  York  City. 

REFORMED  CHURCH  IN  AMERICA — Department  of  Missionary  Edu- 
cation, Reformed  Church  in  America,  Mr.  H.  A.  Kinports,  25 
East  Twenty-second  Street,  New  York  City. 

REFORMED  CHURCH  IN  THE  UNITED  STATES — Mission  Study  De- 
partment. Representing  the  Boards  of  Home  and  Foreign 
Missions,  Mr.  John  H.  Poorman,  304  Reformed  Church 
Building,  Fifteenth  and  Race  Streets,  Philadelphia, 
Pa. 

UNITED  BRETHREN  IN  CHRIST — Missionary  Education  Depart- 
ment, U.  B.  Building,  Dayton,  Ohio.  Representing  the  Home 
Missionary  Society,  the  Foreign  Missionary  Society,  and  the 
Woman's  Missionary  Association. 

UNITED  EVANGELICAL — Home  and  Foreign  Missionary  Society  of 
the  United  Evangelical  Church  and  Board  of  Church  Exten- 
sion, Rev.  B.  H.  Niebel,  Penbrook,  Pa. 

UNITED  NORWEGIAN  LUTHERAN — Board  of  Foreign  Missions  United 
Norwegian  Lutheran  Church  of  America,  Rev.  M.  Saterlie, 
425-429  South  Fourth  Street,  Minneapolis,  Minn. 
Board  of  Home  Missions,  United  Norwegian  Lutheran  Church 
of  America,  Rev.  Olaf  Guldseth,  425  South  Fourth  Street, 
Minneapolis,  Minn. 

UNITED  PRESBYTERIAN — Mission  Study  Department  of  the  Board 
of  Foreign  Missions  of  the  United  Presbyterian  Church  of 
North  America,  Rev.  James  K.  Quay,  200  North  Fifteenth 
Street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 

Board  of  Home  Missions  of  the  United  Presbyterian  Church  of 
North  America,  Rev.  R.  A.  Hutchison,  209  Ninth  Street, 
Pittsburgh,  Pa. 

UNIVERSALIST — Department  of  Missionary  Education  of  the  Gen- 
eral Sunday  School  Association  of  the  Universalist  Church, 
Rev.  A.  Gertrude  Earle,  Methuen,  Mass. 

CANADIAN  BOARDS 

BAPTIST — The  Canadian  Baptist  Foreign  Mission  Board.  Rev.  J. 

G.  Brown,  223  Church  Street,  Toronto,  Ontario. 
CHURCH  OF  ENGLAND — The  Missionary  Society  of  the  Church  of 

England  in  Canada,  Rev.  Canon  S.  Gould,  131  Confederation 

Life  Building,  Toronto,  Ontario^ 

CONGREGATIONAL — Canada  Congregational  Foreign  Missionary  So- 
ciety, Miss  Effie  Jamieson,  23  Woodlawn  Avenue,  East,  Tor- 
onto, Ontario. 

METHODIST — Young  People's  Forward  Movement  Department  of 
the  Missionary  Society  of  the  Methodist  Church,  Canada, 
Rev.  F.  C.  Stephenson,  299  Queen  Street,  West,  Toronto, 
Ontario. 

PRESBYTERIAN — Presbyterian  Church  in  Canada,  Board  of  For- 
eign Missions,  Rev.  A.  E.  Armstrong,  439  Confederation  Life 
Building,  Toronto,  Ontario. 


UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 
BERKELEY 


Return  to  desk  from  which  borrowed. 
This  book  is  DUE  on  the  last  date  stamped  below. 


953  Cli 


CO 

AUG  13  1958 


LD  21-100m-ll,'49(B7146sl6)476 


M128558 


THE  UNIVERSITY  OF  CALIFORNIA  LIBRARY 


